KV-700 Series: User's Manual

183GB
Programmable Controller
KV-700 Series
User's Manual
Preface
The NEW VISUAL PLC KV-700 Series is equipped with a hyper access window. This
access window allows you to check at a glance the I/O information and error
information of Expansion Units that has not been possible up till now unless a tool was
connected. The NEW VISUAL PLC KV-700 Series is also provided with a Memory
Card slot. This enables exchange of programs using auto-load, logging of production
information and other extensive functions.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can retrieve it whenever necessary.
See to it that this manual reaches the last person who is going to use the KV-700 Series.
■ KV-700 Series Related Manuals

Read the following manuals when you use the KV-700 Series.
If you require these manuals, contact your agent.
Type of Manual Description of Manual

KV-700 Series User's This manual. This manual describes the specifications of
Manual each of the units in the KV-700 Series, and their functions
(PDF manual) and method of operations. When using the KV-700
series, refer mainly to this manual.
KV-700 Series Instruction This manual describes the instructions used in programs
Reference Manual run on the KV-700 Series.
(PDF manual)
KV BUILDER User's This manual describes the functions and methods of
Manual operation of Windows version Ladder Support Software
(PDF manual) KV BUILDER.
KV-D30 User's Manual This manual describes the specifications of Operator
Panel KV-D30, and its functions and methods of opera-
tion.
KV-L20 User's Manual This manual describes the specifications of Multi-
(PDF manual) communication Unit KV-L20, and its functions and
methods of operation.
KV-AD40/DA40 User's This manual describes the specifications of AD/DA
Manual Conversion Unit KV-AD40/DA40, and its functions and
(PDF manual) methods of operation.
KV-SC20 User's Manual This manual describes the specifications of High-speed
(PDF manual) Counter Unit KV-SC20, and its functions and methods of
operation.
KV-TF40 User's Manual This manual describes the specifications of Multi-input
(PDF manual) PID Temperature Control Unit KV-TF40, and its functions
and methods of operation.
KV-LE20 User's Manual This manual describes the specifications of Ethernet Unit
(PDF manual) KV-LE20, and its functions and methods of operations.
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 1 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Safety Precautions
This manual describes how to handle the KV-700 and KV-700 Series, operation
procedures, and precautions.
Be sure to read and understand this manual to make full use of the KV-700 and KV-
700 Series before use.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can retrieve it whenever necessary.
See to it that this manual reaches the last person who is going to use the KV-700 Series.
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to alert you to important information.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or serious
DANGER injury.
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to physical dam-

CAUTION age (product malfunction, etc.).
Important: Provides additional information on precautions and restrictions that must

be followed in operation.
Note: Provides additional information on proper operation.
[Tip]
Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text descrip-
tions.
Indicates a reference item or page to be referred to in this manual and a separate

manual.
General Precautions
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performance
of the KV-700 Series.
• Provide a safety circuit that does not pass via the programmable controller to ensure
that, even if an abnormality occurs on the programmable controller body, the overall
system functions on the safe side from the failsafe point onwards.
• Correct control operations might no longer be possible if output circuits or internal
circuits malfunction. Be sure to provide a safety circuit for control operations that
might cause fire and other serious accidents.
• Do not modify the KV-700 Series or use it in any way other than described in the
specifications. The functions and performance of products used or modified in this
way cannot be assured.
• When the KV-700 Series is used in combination with other equipment, functions and
performance may be degraded depending on operating conditions, surrounding
environment and other factors. Fully take this into consideration before using the KV-
700 Series in this way.
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or part of a
human body.
• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this
product in a hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
183GB i
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 2 2012/03/15 17:25:24

■ CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the
applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifica-
tions when using this product inthe Member States of European Union.
● EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

• Applicable standard EMI: EN61131-2, Class A EMS: EN61131-2
• When installing the KV-700 Series, it must be installed in an conductive enclosure (industrial control
panel) with IP54 or higher.
• When using a Keyence KV-U7 as the power supply for the KV-700 Series, pass the power cable
through the ferrite core twice.
• When using a Keyence KV-U7 as the power supply for the KV-700 Series, be sure to connect the
protective earthing terminal located on the power supply input terminal to the protective earthing
conductor in the building installation.
• When using the DC power input terminal of the KV-700 Series, pass the power cable through the
ferrite core twice.
• Use a shielded cable for the signal lines located outside of the conductive enclosure (industrial control
panel). The shielded cable must be grounded.
• Be sure to use the functional earthing terminal on the unit for grounding, if applicable.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
ii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 3 2012/03/15 17:25:24

● Low-voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
The Low-voltage Directive is applied to KV-U7 and KV-B16RA. It is not applicable to any other models.
• Applicable standard EN61131-2 (KV-B16RA), EN60950-1 (KV-U7)
• Overvoltage Category II
• Pollution degree 2
• When using a Keyence KV-U7 as the power supply of the KV-1000/700 Series, be sure to connect the
protective earthing terminal located on the power supply input terminal to the protective earthing
conductor in the building installation because the KV-U7 is designed as a Class I equipment.
• When installing the KV-700 Series, it must be installed in an enclosure (industrial control panel)
with IP54 or higher.
• The rated relay load of the KV-B16RA is 8A per common. In other words, when all eight channels are
used, the maximum load per channel is 1A, and when four channels are used, the maximum load per
channel is 2A.
■ UL Certificate
The KV-700 Series is an UL Listed Product.
UL-certified products display the UL mark on the label found on the side of each product.
• UL File No. E207185
• Category NRAQ
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as an UL Listed product.
• When installing the KV-700 Series, it must be installed in an enclosure (Industrial control panel)
with IP54 or higher.
• Supply power to the KV-700 Series using either the exclusive Keyence KV-U7 power supply, or a
power supply that provides Class 2 output defined in NFPA 70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
• When using a Keyence KV-U7 as the power supply of the KV-700 Series, be sure to connect the
protective earthing terminal located on the input terminal to the protective earthing conductor in the
building installation wiring as the KV-U7 is designed as a Class I equipment.
• Use stranded copper wire having a gage of AWG#14 to #22 and temperature rating of 105°C or higher
as the lead for wiring to the terminal block on the KV-U7. The tightening torque is 0.6N·m.
• For wiring to the power supply terminal block on KV-700, use stranded copper wire having a
gage of AWG#20 and temperature rating of 60°C or higher. The tightening torque is 0.5 N·m (4.4 lb-in).
• For wiring to the terminal block on the special units except for the KV-DN20 or I/O units, use stranded
copper wire having a gage of AWG#16 to #22 and temperature rating of 60°C or higher (105°C or
higher for the KV-B16RA). The tightening torque is 0.56 N·m (4.94 lb-in).
• For wiring to the functional grounding terminal on the KV-DN20, use stranded copper wire having a
gage of AWG#12 to #22 and temperature rating of 60°C or higher. The tightening torque is 1.8N·m.
• For wiring to the DeviceNet connector on the KV-DN20, use stranded copper wire having a gage of
AWG#12 to #30 and temperature rating of 60°C or higher. The tightening torque is 0.6N·m.
• The KV-700 (CPU Unit) has a built-in replaceable lithium battery. When replacing the lithium
battery, be sure to use the Replacement Lithium Battery (OP-42139 for KV-700) specified in this
manual. The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Explosion hazard. Never charge, dismantle
or throw the battery into fire.
iii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 4 2012/03/15 17:25:24

This page left intentionally blank.
iv
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 5 2012/03/15 17:25:24

How This Manual Is Organized 1
Chapter 1 CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES & SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the configuration of the KV-700 Series system, names and
functions of parts on units, and specifications,. 2
Chapter 2 ACCESS WINDOW
This chapter describes the access window that allows the user to change data and easily 3
perform monitoring.
Chapter 3 MEMORY CARD 4

This chapter describes how to exchange ladder programs with the PLC and exchange
data with various units using the Memory Card.
5
Chapter 4 PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the procedures for making programs, basic knowledge regarding
device configuration, relay assignments and other information, and special functions and
6
extended ladder language for setting and checking KV-700 operation.
Chapter 5 INTERRUPTS
7
This chapter describes functions for executing interrupt programs when there is a request
(generation of an interrupt cause) from an external input or high-speed comparator during
operation of the KV-700.
8
This chapter describes the types of interrupt causes and I/O during interrupt processing.
9
Chapter 6 HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
This chapter describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators that
enable high-speed pulse measurement and pulse output unreliant on scan time. 10
Chapter 7 FREQUENCY COUNTERS
This chapter describes how high-speed counter functions can be used for frequency 11
counters.
Chapter 8 CAM SWITCHES

This chapter describes how high-speed counter functions can be used for cam switch
functions.
Chapter 9 MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL)

This chapter describes functions for outputting pulses to a stepping motor or a servo
motor, and for controlling positioning.
Chapter 10 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

The KV-700 can be connected to external devices having an RS-232C-compliant
interface to perform communications.
This chapter describes communications specifications, connection methods and commu-
nications methods.
Chapter 11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the various functions incorporated on the KV-700 CPU Unit such
as functions for setting and checking PLC operation, and handy functions when debugging
programs and performing adjustments with external devices.
Appendices
These appendices present tables for the relays, timers, counters, memory Nos. and
special relays for each model of the KV-700 Series. Refer to these appendices when using
the KV-700 CPU.
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 6 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Contents
Safety Precautions ................................................................................ i
How This Manual Is Organized ............................................................ v
Contents ............................................................................................... vi
Chapter 1 CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES &

SPECIFICATIONS
1-1 Basic System Configuration.................................................... 1-2

System Configuration ................................................................. 1-2
KV-700 Series Specifications ..................................................... 1-4
1-2 CPU Unit .................................................................................... 1-6
Names and Functions of Parts ................................................... 1-6
Specifications ............................................................................. 1-8
RUN-PROG Selector Switch .................................................... 1-11
Connector for Extended Memory.............................................. 1-11
CPU Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams ........................ 1-12
1-3 AC Power Unit......................................................................... 1-14
Names and Functions of Parts ................................................. 1-14
Specifications ........................................................................... 1-16
Power Unit Wiring Method ........................................................ 1-17
1-4 Expansion Input Unit.............................................................. 1-18
Specifications ........................................................................... 1-19
Expansion Input Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams ...... 1-21
1-5 Expansion Output Unit........................................................... 1-24
Specifications ........................................................................... 1-25
Expansion Output Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams ... 1-27
1-6 Extension Unit ........................................................................ 1-31
Specifications ........................................................................... 1-32
1-7 Installation Environment........................................................ 1-34
Installation Environment ........................................................... 1-34
Mounting Position ..................................................................... 1-35
1-8 Connecting Units .................................................................... 1-36
Cautions When Connecting Units............................................. 1-36
Assembling the Unit.................................................................. 1-37
Mounting on the DIN Rail ......................................................... 1-38
1-9 Wiring Units ............................................................................ 1-39
Precautions When Wiring to Each Unit .................................... 1-39
Assembling and Wiring Connectors ......................................... 1-41
Removing the Terminal Block ................................................... 1-45
1-10 Maintenance ............................................................................ 1-46
Inspection and Daily Care ........................................................ 1-46
Replacing the Battery ............................................................... 1-46
vi
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 7 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 2 ACCESS WINDOW
2-1 Outline ....................................................................................... 2-2

What is the "Access Window?" ................................................... 2-2
Access Window Modes .............................................................. 2-3
Access Window Menu Tree ........................................................ 2-4
Names and Functions of Access Window Parts ......................... 2-5
2-2 Unit Monitor .............................................................................. 2-6
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys....................... 2-6
Method of Operation (example: on I/O unit) ............................... 2-6
2-3 Device Mode.............................................................................. 2-8
Devices That Can Be Displayed and Whose Settings Can be
Changed ..................................................................................... 2-8
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys....................... 2-8
Method of Operation in Device Mode ......................................... 2-9
2-4 Digital Trimmer Mode ............................................................. 2-19
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys..................... 2-19
Changing Digital Trimmers ....................................................... 2-19
2-5 Displaying and Setting the Date/Time .................................. 2-21
About the Date/Time Display .................................................... 2-21
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys..................... 2-21
Method of Operation ................................................................. 2-21
2-6 Memory Card Operations....................................................... 2-24
About Memory Card Operation................................................. 2-24
2-7 CPU Monitor ............................................................................ 2-25
Positioning Monitor ................................................................... 2-25
Frequency Counter ................................................................... 2-27
Cam Switches........................................................................... 2-28
2-8 Alarm Monitor ......................................................................... 2-30
About the Alarm Monitor Function ............................................ 2-30
How to Register Alarms ............................................................ 2-30
Examples of Alarm Monitor Display .......................................... 2-31
How to Monitor Alarms ............................................................. 2-33
Displaying the Alarm Relay Record .......................................... 2-35
Clearing Alarm Relay Records ................................................. 2-36
2-9 Access Window Setup ........................................................... 2-37
Setup Functions Available in Access Window Setup ............... 2-37
Contrast .................................................................................... 2-37
Display Language ..................................................................... 2-38
2-10 Clearing SRAM........................................................................ 2-40
Clearing SRAM ......................................................................... 2-40
2-11 All Clear ................................................................................... 2-42
All Clear .................................................................................... 2-42
2-12 User Messages ....................................................................... 2-44
About the User Message Display ............................................. 2-44
2-13 Setting Inhibited Operation ................................................... 2-46
Modes in Which Operation Can be Inhibited ............................ 2-46
2-14 Key Lock.................................................................................. 2-48
How to Set Key Lock ................................................................ 2-48
vii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 8 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 3 MEMORY CARD
3-1 About the Memory Card ........................................................... 3-2

Memory Card Functions ............................................................. 3-2
To Use the Memory Card ........................................................... 3-3
Names and Functions of Setting Operation Keys....................... 3-5
Operation Method ....................................................................... 3-5
3-2 Transferring Programs........................................................... 3-15
Transferring Programs from the Access Window ..................... 3-15
3-3 DM Transfer............................................................................. 3-16
About DM Data Format............................................................. 3-16
3-4 Logging Function ................................................................... 3-17
About Logging .......................................................................... 3-17
How to Register Logging Devices ............................................ 3-17
Sample Program....................................................................... 3-24
Chapter 4 PROGRAMMING
4-1 Before You Start Programming ............................................... 4-2

Flow of Operation from Installation to Actual Operation ............. 4-2
About Scan Time ........................................................................ 4-3
4-2 User Memory ............................................................................. 4-4
Program Size .............................................................................. 4-4
4-3 Device Configuration ............................................................... 4-6
List of Devices ............................................................................ 4-6
About Relay Nos......................................................................... 4-6
Input Relays................................................................................ 4-7
Output Relays ............................................................................. 4-8
Internal Auxiliary Relays ............................................................. 4-9
Control Relays .......................................................................... 4-10
Control Relay Lists ................................................................... 4-11
Timers/Counters ....................................................................... 4-16
Control Memory ........................................................................ 4-17
Temporary Data Memory.......................................................... 4-24
Data Memory ............................................................................ 4-24
4-4 Extended Ladder .................................................................... 4-25
Features of the Extended Ladder Language ............................ 4-25
Advantages of the Extended Ladder Language ....................... 4-26
Chapter 5 INTERRUPTS
5-1 Interrupt Processing ................................................................ 5-2

What Is "Interrupt Processing?" .................................................. 5-2
Types of Interrupts...................................................................... 5-3
Interrupt Priority .......................................................................... 5-4
Interrupt Program ....................................................................... 5-5
5-2 Direct Input/Output ................................................................... 5-6
Direct Input ................................................................................. 5-6
Direct Output .............................................................................. 5-6
viii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 9 2012/03/15 17:25:24

5-3 Sample Interrupt Programs ..................................................... 5-7
Example of Interrupt Application................................................. 5-7
Example of Application of an Interrupt Using a High-speed Counter . 5-8
Chapter 6 HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
6-1 High-speed Counters ............................................................... 6-2

Outline of High-speed Counters ................................................. 6-2
High-speed Counter Specifications ............................................ 6-5
Setting Count Input ..................................................................... 6-8
Reset Method ........................................................................... 6-11
Preset Function ........................................................................ 6-13
Comparator Match Output ........................................................ 6-14
Ring Counter Function.............................................................. 6-15
Extended Functions .................................................................. 6-16
Chapter 7 FREQUENCY COUNTERS
7-1 Frequency Counters................................................................. 7-2

Frequency Counter Functions .................................................... 7-2
7-2 Specified Frequency Pulse Output ......................................... 7-5
Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .............................. 7-5
Chapter 8 CAM SWITCHES
8-1 Cam Switch Function ............................................................... 8-2

Cam Switch Function.................................................................. 8-2
Cam Switch Mode (absolute encoder) ....................................... 8-4
Cam Switch Mode (incremental encoder) .................................. 8-6
Multi-level Comparator Mode ..................................................... 8-8
Chapter 9 MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL)
9-1 About Positioning/Speed Control ........................................... 9-2

Outline of Positioning/Speed Control.......................................... 9-2
9-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing Instructions .............. 9-4
Parameter Setup ........................................................................ 9-4
Point Parameters ........................................................................ 9-4
System Parameters [I/O Setup] .................................................. 9-9
System Parameters [Comparator Setup].................................. 9-13
System Parameters [Zero Return/Jog] ..................................... 9-15
9-3 Other Positioning Devices ..................................................... 9-19
Control Relays for Positioning Control...................................... 9-19
Control Memories for Positioning Control ................................. 9-20
Operation Timing Charts .......................................................... 9-21
Device Lists .............................................................................. 9-22
ix
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 10 2012/03/15 17:25:24

9-4 Positioning Instructions ........................................................ 9-27
Positioning Instructions Lists .................................................... 9-27
Description of Operation ........................................................... 9-28
Execution Timing ...................................................................... 9-29
Sample Program....................................................................... 9-29
Sample Program....................................................................... 9-31
Sample Program....................................................................... 9-32
Sample Program....................................................................... 9-35
9-5 Positioning Control Reference Examples ............................ 9-36
Positioning Control Reference Examples ................................. 9-36
Speed Control Reference Examples ........................................ 9-38
Program Example Continuous Operation Reference Example 9-40
Program Example High-speed Execution................................. 9-41
KV-10/16/24/40 Compatibility ................................................... 9-42
Positioning Control Exceeding 32 Points.................................. 9-43
Chapter 10 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
10-1 Serial Communications Specifications ................................ 10-2

Communications Specifications................................................ 10-2
How to Connect to the KV-700 ................................................. 10-2
10-2 Serial Communications.......................................................... 10-3
Command Send Procedure ...................................................... 10-3
Format of Commands and Responses ..................................... 10-4
10-3 Commands/Responses List .................................................. 10-5
Commands/Responses List...................................................... 10-5
10-4 Explanation of Commands and Responses ......................... 10-7
CR Start communications ........................................................ 10-7
CQ End communications ......................................................... 10-7
Mn Change mode .................................................................... 10-8
ER Clear error ......................................................................... 10-8
?E Error No. confirmation ........................................................ 10-9
?K Model query ..................................................................... 10-10
?M Operation mode confirmation .......................................... 10-10
RD_C Read counter .............................................................. 10-11
RDS_C Read continuous counters........................................ 10-11
RD_CTH Read high-speed counter....................................... 10-13
RDS_CTH Read continuous high-speed counters ................ 10-14
RD_CTC Read high-speed counter comparator ................... 10-15
RDS_CTC Read continuous high-speed counter comparators10-15
RD_T Read timer................................................................... 10-17
RDS_T Read continuous timers ............................................ 10-17
RD_AT Read digital trimmer.................................................. 10-19
RDS_AT Read continuous digital trimmers ........................... 10-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 11 2012/03/15 17:25:24

RD/RD_CR Read relay/control relay contact ........................ 10-21
RDS/RDS_CR Read continuous relay/control relay contacts 10-22
RD_DM/RD_CM Read data memory/control memory........... 10-23
RDS_DM/RDS_CM Read continuous data memories/control
memories ................................................................................ 10-23
RD_TM Read temporary data memory ................................. 10-24
RDS_TM Read continuous temporary data memories .......... 10-25
RDC Read comment ............................................................. 10-26
MBS Read monitor registration of bit devices ....................... 10-27
MWS Read monitor registration of word devices .................. 10-28
MBR Read the monitor of registered bit devices ................... 10-29
MWR Read the monitor of registered word devices .............. 10-29
WR_C Write counter current value ........................................ 10-30
WRS_C Write continuous counter current values ................. 10-30
WS_C Write counter setting values ....................................... 10-31
WSS_C Write continuous counter setting values .................. 10-32
ST_C Write counter contact set............................................. 10-33
RS_C Write counter contact reset ......................................... 10-33
WR_CTH Write high-speed counter ...................................... 10-34
WRS_CTH Write continuous high-speed counters ............... 10-34
WS_CTC Write high-speed counter comparator setting values 10-35
WSS_CTC Write continuous high-speed counter comparator
setting values.......................................................................... 10-36
RS_CTC Write high-speed counter comparator contact reset10-37
WR_T Write timer current value ............................................ 10-38
WRS_T Write continuous timer current values...................... 10-38
WS_T Write timer setting value ............................................. 10-39
WSS_T Write continuous timer setting values ...................... 10-40
ST_T Write timer contact set ................................................. 10-41
RS_T Write timer contact reset ............................................. 10-41
ST Write relay contact set ..................................................... 10-42
STS Write continuous relay contact sets ............................... 10-42
RS Write relay contact reset .................................................. 10-43
RSS Write continuous relay contact resets ........................... 10-43
ST_CR Write control relay contact set .................................. 10-44
STS_CR Write continuous control relay contact sets ............ 10-44
RS_CR Write control relay contact reset ............................... 10-45
RSS_CR Write continuous control relay contact resets ........ 10-45
WR_DM/WR_CM Write data memories/control memories.... 10-46
WRS_DM/WRS_CM Write continuous data memories/control
memories ................................................................................ 10-47
WR_TM Write temporary data memory ................................. 10-48
WRS_TM Write continuous temporary data memories ......... 10-49
WRT Set time ........................................................................ 10-50
Responses during an Error..................................................... 10-51
10-5 Sending/Receiving Text Data .............................................. 10-52
Receiving Text Data ............................................................... 10-52
Sending Text Data .................................................................. 10-54
10-6 ASCII Code Table .................................................................. 10-56
xi
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 12 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-1 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function ................................... 11-2

Fixed Scan Time Operation ...................................................... 11-2
11-2 I/O Inhibit Function ................................................................. 11-3
Input Refresh Inhibit Function................................................... 11-3
Output Inhibit Function ............................................................. 11-3
11-3 Input Time Constant Selection Function.............................. 11-4
About the Input Time Constant ................................................. 11-4
11-4 Latch Function (Power Interruption Hold) ........................... 11-5
Latch Function .......................................................................... 11-5
11-5 Direct Clock Pulse Output ..................................................... 11-7
Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output ........................................ 11-7
Setting Pulse Output by High-speed Counter Comparator....... 11-8
Example of Direct Clock Pulse Output (output example of
ON/OFF ratio 1:1) ................................................................... 11-12
Example of Variable Clock Pulse ON/OFF Ratio ................... 11-16
Example of Stopping Clock Pulse Output at a Specified
Number of Pulses ................................................................... 11-20
11-6 Clock Function...................................................................... 11-22
Clock Function ........................................................................ 11-22
11-7 Other Functions .................................................................... 11-23
Contact Device Comment Store Function, Rung Comment
Store Function ........................................................................ 11-23
Password Setting Function ..................................................... 11-23
Precautions When Writing the Ladder Program in the RUN
Mode....................................................................................... 11-24
Appendices
1 Device No. Lists ........................................................................ A-2

Relay, Timer, Counter and Memory Nos. by Model ................... A-2
KV-700 Devices .......................................................................... A-3
2 Error Message Lists ............................................................... A-15
PLC Body Errors....................................................................... A-15
3 ASCII Code Table .................................................................... A-18
4 Index ........................................................................................ A-19
xii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 13 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Conventions Used In This Manual
The following shows how pages are configured, and the symbols and terminology used
in this manual.
Page Configuration and Symbols
3-1 About the Memory Card
Headline 3-1 About the Memory Card

Indicates the content of the On the KV-700 Series, you can exchange ladder programs and various unit information
with the PLCs using Memory Cards.
section.
Thumbnail index 3 Memory Card Functions Mid-heading
Indicates the chapter. ■ How to save and read program data Indicates the content that
MEMORY CARD
Save and read program data to and from the Memory Card by operation on the
access window as follows. follows after a section is
Chapter title broken down into smaller
Make sure that the Memory Card is in-
serted in the Memory Card slot on the KV-700.
units.
Name of Keyence Corporation
24
V
5V
Sub-heading
KV-
70
product
0A
Data is automatically read to the Memory 0
1
2
0
1
B
Card when the power is turned ON if the

3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
R AC 6 5
CE 7 6
SS 8 7
project name is set to "AUTOLOAD."

WI
ND 9 8
OW
M 10
11
9
10
12 11
13 12
Indicates the page or manual

14 13
15 14
15
"Access window menu tree" page 2-4

CAR
D
Figure illustrating operation

SD
RD
USB
to refer to. The page or

manual containing the related
information is indicated here. ■ Loading data (can be executed only in the program mode)
Before you execute a load, insert the Memory Card into the CPU.
(Loading be executed only in the program mode.)
Access window operation
Operational step 1 Press the "M" key. key. Enclosed by " " brackets.
The menu is displayed.
1.DeviceMode
2.Trrimer
M
Operation keys
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
Screen
Note: Note: • Never remove Memory Cards while the Memory Card access LED is
blinking.
Describes cautions for • In environments subject to severe noise, it may take time to access the
easily mistaken operations. Memory Card. (In the worst case, this might damage the card or FAT.) In
such cases, attach a ferrite core onto the power cable before use. Also,
Be sure to read these. install the KV-700 away from equipment that emits strong electromagnetic
fields.
While the Memory Card accessing LED is lit (reading and writing of data to the Memory
CAUTION Card), never remove the Memory Card or turn the KV-700 OFF. Doing so might corrupt
the data inside the Memory Card.
Caution
Failure to observe the caution
described here may result in
product trouble.
3-2
* This page was made for the purpose of explaining page components,
and differs form an actual page.
Terminology
This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
Main body This refers to the Programmable Controller KV made by Keyence
Corporation.
KV, These are generic names for KV Series.
Visual KV Series
Expansion Unit This refers to the Expansion Input Unit, Expansion Output Unit, and
Expansion Mixed I/O Unit other than the Basic Unit in the Visual KV
Series.
PLC This refers to the overall system of a programmable controller.
PC Stands for personal computer. Generally, this refers to an IBM PC
and PC-AT compatible machine (DOS/V).
xiii
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 14 2012/03/15 17:25:24

xiv
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 15 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1
CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES & SPECIFICATIONS

CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES &
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the configuration of the KV-700 Series sys-
tem, names and functions of parts on units, and specifications.
1-1 Basic System Configuration ..............................................1-2
1-2 CPU Unit ..............................................................................1-6
1-3 AC Power Unit ...................................................................1-14
1-4 Expansion Input Unit ........................................................ 1-18
1-5 Expansion Output Unit ..................................................... 1-24
1-6 Extension Unit ...................................................................1-31
1-7 Installation Environment .................................................. 1-34
1-8 Connecting Units .............................................................. 1-36
1-9 Wiring Units ....................................................................... 1-39
1-10 Maintenance ...................................................................... 1-46
1 -1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 16 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-1 Basic System Configuration

1
This section describes the types of units, general specifications and the configuration
of a basic KV-700 Series system.
System Configuration
The KV-700 Series basic system is configured as possible.
AC Power Unit CPU Unit Expansion Input Unit

KV-U7 KV-700 KV-B16XA KV-C32X1 KV-C64XA
24 VDC, 1.8A 10 inputs, 4 outputs (16 DC input) (32 DC inputs) (64 DC input)
(w/ service power terminal)
KV-U7 KEYENCE KV-700 A B

0 0
1 1
2 2
OC 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 13 13
24V OUT 14 14
15 15
24VDC
0V
1.8A
Expansion
memory RUN
PROG
N CARD SD RD USB
INPUT
100-240V
AC
50/60Hz
0.98A
L
SERIAL
OP-42138
Start Unit
(provided with CPU)
Ladder support software

KV BUILDER
(Windows 98/98SE/2000/NT4/Me/XP compatible)
PC
IBM PC and PC/AT
compatible machine (DOS/V)
Memory Card
OP-42137
1 -2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 17 2012/03/15 17:25:24


Expansion Input Unit Extension Units End Unit
KV-B16RA KV-B16TA (provided
KV-C32TA KV-C64TA KV-EB1S KV-EB1R
(16 relay (16 transistor with CPU)
(32transistor (64 transistor
outputs) outputs) outputs) outputs)
Cable
(1 m)
(OP-42142)
Cable
(2 m)
(OP-42141)
Other special units
Multi-communication A/D Conversion D/A Conversion Unit

Unit Unit KV-DA40
KV-L20 KV-AD40 4 analog output
RS-232C/RS-422A 4 analog input channels
channels
1 -3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 18 2012/03/15 17:25:24

KV-700 Series Specifications

1 The following tables show the general specifications and performance specifications of the KV-700 series.
■ General specifications
Item Specification
Power voltage 24 VDC (±10%)
Internal current CPU Unit KV700: 160 mA or less
consumption Expansion KV-C64XA: 25 mA or less KV-C32XA: 15 mA or less
(excluding Input Unit KV-B16XA: 15 mA or less
current for input
Expansion KV-C64TA: 100 mA or less KV-C32TA: 55 mA or less
circuit drive)
Output Unit KV-B16RA: 120 mA or less KV-B16TA: 35 mA or less
Extension Unit KV-EB1S: 15 mA or less
KV-EB1R: 25 mA or less
Operating surrounding air temperature 0 to 50°
C (freezing not allowed)*1, *2
Storage temperature -20 to 70°
C*1
Operating ambient humidity 35 to 85°
C (condensation not allowed)*1, *2
Withstand voltage 1500 VAC across power terminal and I/O terminals, and across all external termi-
nals and case
Resistance to line noise 1500 V peak-to-peak or more, pulse width 1 µs, 50 ns (by noise simulator)
IEC standard compliancy (IEC61000-4-2/3/4/6)
Resistance to vibration In conformity In presence of an intermittent vibration Scan iterations
with Frequency Acceleration Amplitude 10 iterations
JIS B 3502 (over 80 min.)
IEC61131-2 10 to 58 Hz — 0.075 mm
for each of X, Y, Z
57 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s2 —
directions
In presence of a continuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude
10 to 58 Hz — 0.035 mm
57 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2 —
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (across power terminal and I/O terminals, and all external terminals
and case by 500 VDC megger)
Operating atmosphere Excessive dirt, dust and corrosive gases not allowed
Overvoltage category II (with KV-U7 in use)
Pollution degree 2
Weight CPU Unit KV-700: Approx. 240 g Extended memory (OP-42138) 10 g End Unit 30 g Start Unit 30 g
Expansion Input Unit KV-C64XA: Approx. 140 g KV-C32XA: Approx. 110 g KV-B16XA: Approx. 120 g
Expansion Output KV-C64TA: Approx. 140 g KV-C32TA: Approx. 100 g KV-B16TA: Approx. 130 g
Unit KV-B16RA: Approx. 190 g
Extension Unit KV-EB1S: Approx. 90 g KV-EB1R: Approx. 115 g
Power Unit KV-U7: Approx. 190 g
*1 Assured range as a system

*2 Specified by the temperature on the bottom side of the unit in a control panel
1 -4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 19 2012/03/15 17:25:24

■ Performance specifications
Item Specifications 1
Arithmetic operation control method Stored program system

I/O control method Refresh system
Program language Ladder chart system
Number of instructions Basic instructions: 122 Applied instructions: 19
Arithmetic operation instructions: 294 Extended instructions: 48
Total: 483
Instruction execution Basic instructions Min. 0.1 µs
speed Applied instruc- Min. 0.1 µs
tions
Program size Approx. 16K steps Approx. 32K steps when memory is expanded
Number of mounted I/O units 16 48 when Extension Unit is connected
Max. number of I/O Max. 3086 when expanded (KV-EB1S/KV-EB1R: when 2 units are
added on) (64-point unit)
Input relays Total 9530 points 00000 to 59915 (excluding 00010 to 00415)
Output relays
Internal auxiliary relays
Control relays 640 (CR0000 to CR3915)
Timers Total 512, 32 bits
Counters
Data memory 20000 (DM00000 to DM19999), 40000 when expanded (DM00000 to
39999)
Control memory 4000 (CM0000 to CM3999)
High-speed counters Auto reset counter*1
2 32-bit (input response 40 kHz/single-phase, 30 kHz/2-phase) at 24 V*2
High-speed counter comparators 4 (2 per high-speed counter)
Positioning pulse output 2 (max. output frequency 100 kHz)
CPU Unit I/O 10 inputs, 4 outputs (total 14 points), 1 input common, 1 output
common
Number of stored device comments 5000 10000 when memory is expanded
Power interruption hold Program memory Flash ROM Re-writable 100,0000 times
function Devices (RLY, CR, Battery backup 5 years (in power interruption hold state at operating
DM, CM, C, T, CTH, ambient temperature of 25(C)
CTC, TM)
Self-diagnostic function CPU error, RAM error, etc.
*1 Disabling of the auto reset is also possible.

*2 At 5V ±10%, refer to the 5V Mode Response Frequency Characteristics (typical example) ( page 1-8).
■ Operation during broken line detection on the KV-700

Power voltage drop
• When the power voltage drops, KV-700 Series operation stops, and output is
turned OFF.
Detection of momentary power interruptions
• In the case of the KV-U7, operation is continued even if a momentary power
interruption of less than 10 ms occurs, and in the case of the DC power supply,
operation is continued even if a momentary power interruption of less than 2 ms
occurs.
Automatic restoration
• Operation is automatically resumed when the power voltage is restored.
1 -5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 20 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
1-2 CPU Unit ......................................................................KV-700

1
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-700 CPU, and
specifications.
Names and Functions of Parts

CPU Unit front
(16) Backup battery (1) Input voltage selector
(w/ screw-fastened cover) KEYENCE KV-700 A B
switch (top of body)
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5
6
5
6 (2) Access window
(17) Connector for extended 7
8
7
8
memory 9 9 (3) I/O display
10 10
(body side, w/ cover) 11
12
11
12
14 14
15 15
(6) RUN-PRO selector

(4) Setting/operation keys
switch RUN
PROG
(7) Memory Card (5) I/O connector

access LED CARD SD RD USB
(8) Memory Card

insert slot
(9) SERIAL access LED
SERIAL
(10) USB access LED

(12) USB connector
(11) Modular connector
CPU Unit bottom side
(13) Expansion unit

(15) KV-U7 connector connector
(body side, shielded) (body side)
+ –
(14) DC power input terminal block (max. 3.5A)
1 -6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 21 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
No. Name Function

(1) Input voltage selector Switches the input voltage. 1
switch 24 V ↔ 5 V

(2) Access window Sets the unit monitor display.
Operating state is indicated by a backlight.
RUN: green PROG: red
(3) I/O display Displays the channel I/O state of the unit on
which a direct access switch was pressed.
When the CPU state is displayed, row A
indicates inputs 000 to 009, and row B indi-
cates inputs 500 to 503.
(4) Setting/operation keys This is used for operating the access window.
(5) I/O connector I/O connector (20-pin)*
(6) RUN-PRO selector switch Switches between the RUN and PROG modes.
(7) Memory Card access LED Lights when the Memory Card is being ac-
cessed.
(8) Memory Card insert slot Slot for inserting the Memory Card
(9) SERIAL access LED Lights during serial communications
RD: During data reception
SD: During data transmission
(10) USB access LED Lights during data reception/transmission on
USB cable.
(11) Modular connector Connector for connecting to modular plug
This is used for connecting to a PC or other
device.
(12) USB connector Connector for USB connection
(13) Expansion unit connector Connector for connecting Expansion Unit
(body side)
(14) DC power input terminal Terminal block for 24 VDC power input
block (max. 3.5 A) Max. 3.5 A
(15) KV-U7 connector (body Connector for KV-U7 Power Unit connection
side, shielded)
(16) Backup battery (w/ screw- OP-42139 (provided with CPU)
fastened cover)
(17) Connector for extended Connector for mounting extended memory
memory (body side, w/ (OP-42138) (w/ cover)
cover)
* MIL-C-83503 compliant
Note: • Communications is sometimes discontinued if noise, for example, causes

unstable USB communications. If this happens, disconnect the USB cable
then re-connect it.
• In situations (environments subject to excessive noise) where communica-
tions is extremely unstable, insert a ferrite core on the cable for PC
protection as well. (Attachment of a ferrite core proves effective in counter-
ing noise.)
Do not connect the USB cable to the serial port. Doing so might damage the unit.
CAUTION
1 -7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 22 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
Specifications
1 ■ Input specifications
00000 to 00009 (10 inputs)

Item 24 VDC Input Mode 5 VDC Input Mode
Rated max. input 26.4 VDC
Input voltage 24 VDC (5.3 mA) 5 VDC (1 mA)
Min. ON voltage 19 V 4.5 V
Max. OFF current 1.5 mA —
Max. OFF voltage — 1.5 V
Common mode 10 points/1 common
Input time constant Normally, 10 ms
HSP instruction use 10 µs
Switchable in range 10 µs to 10 ms in 7 stages when
control relay CR2305 is ON
(set at CM1620)
High-speed counter 40 kHz/single-phase,
input response 30 kHz/2-phase (24 V ±10%) (duty 50%)
At 5V ±10%, refer to the 5V Mode Response Frequency Characteristics (typical

example) below.
"Input circuit" (page 1-13)
Prevent the input simultaneous continuous ON rate from exceeding the specification
CAUTION range. Otherwise, the unit might become damaged.
5V mode response frequency KV-700 derating

characteristics diagram
Continuous simultaneous ON rate (%)
40°C 45°C
(typical example) 100
35
Response frequency (kHz)
30
80
25
60
20
50%
15 40
26.4V input
5V mode response 24V input 36%
10 frequency characteristics
diagram (typical example) 20
5
0 0
4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 0 10 20 30 40 50
Input voltage (V) Ambient temperature (°C)
1 -8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 23 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
■ Output specifications
00500 to 00503 (4 outputs) 1
Item Specifications

Output mode Transistor NPN output
Rated load 30 VDC 0.1 A
Peak load current 0.2 A
Max. OFF voltage 30 VDC
ON leakage current 100 µA or less
ON residual voltage 0.3 V or less
Common mode 4 points/1 common
Operation time 10 µs or less (OFF→ON, ON→OFF common) (at 5
to 50 mA)
"Output circuit" (page 1-13)

• Output circuit frequency 100 kHz
• Built-in series resistance value 1.6 kΩ 1/2W (R500 to R503)
1 -9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 24 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
■ External dimension diagrams (CPU)

1 Front view Side view
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 55 80
100
(131.3)
Bottom view
19.4
Unit: mm
■ External dimension diagrams (Start Unit, End Unit)
Start unit End Unit
90 90
8 9 8 80 Unit: mm
1-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 25 2012/03/15 17:25:24

1-2 CPU Unit
RUN-PROG Selector Switch

The KV-700 CPU Unit has two modes, the RUN mode
1
and PROG mode.

Each of these modes is switched by the RUN-PROG HYPER ACCESS WIN
selector switch shown in the figure on the right.
RUN mode: This mode is for executing the pro-

gram.
RUN
PROG mode: This mode is for stopping program PROG
execution, and turning all outputs

OFF. CARD SD RD
Connector for Extended Memory

When extended memory OP-42138 is mounted, the number of DMs is extended from
20,000 to 40,000, program memory is extended from 16 K steps to 32 K steps, and the
number of device comments is extended from 5,000 to 10,000.
1 Remove the cover on the left of the

body.
• Hook your fingernail into the groove at
the bottom of the cover and lift up.
2 Insert extended memory into its con-

nector.
3 Attach the cover.

• Attach the cover by aligning the claw at
the top of the cover with the top of the
body, and pressing in the cover bottom
until you hear it click into place.
4 Be sure to attach the KV-U7 or Start Unit onto the left side of the body.
Note: • When mounting extended memory, pay attention to static electricity.
• Before mounting or removing extended memory, be sure to perform an
all clear first.
"All Clear" page 2-42
1-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 26 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-2 CPU Unit
CPU Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams

1 ■ CPU unit
Connector wiring diagram
KEYENCE KV-700 A B
0 0
1 1
2
3
4
2
3
4
Connector terminal No.
5 5
6 6
7 7
8
9
8
9
1 11
10 10
11
12
13
11
12
13
2 12
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW
14 14
15 15
3 13
4 14
Modular connector RUN

5 15
PROG
6 16
CARD SD RD USB I/O connector 7 17
8 18
SERIAL
9 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 10 20
I/O connector
24 VDC/5 VDC
Terminal Signal Name
No. Direction
1 Input Input common COM0
2 Input (Interrupt) 001
4 Input (high-speed counter 1) 005
5 Input (high-speed counter 1-phase) 007
6 Input (high-speed counter 1 reset) 009
7 Output (w/ resistor) 500 L
Modular connector 12 Input (Interrupt) 002
13 Input (high-speed counter 0) 004
Terminal Direction Signal Name
No. 14 Input (high-speed counter 0-phase) 006
1 +5V power output 15 Input (high-speed counter 0 reset) 008
2 +5V power output 16 Output 500 L
3 Input RD 17 Output 501 L
4 – SG 18 Output 502 L
5 Output SD 19 Output 503 L
6 GND 20 Output Output common COM1

(terminal undefined) * COM0 and COM1 are not connected internally. Load power
supply
[Tip]
A current limiting resistor of 1.6 kΩ (1/2W) is built in as the output w/ resistor for pin
Nos.7 to 10. So, use these pins for motor driver connection.
1-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 27 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-2 CPU Unit
I/O circuit diagrams

Input circuit 1

000 to 009 4.3 KΩ
Internal circuit
IN 5V/24V
switching
circuit
COM0
Photocoupler isolation
Input power
Output circuit
Isolated 1.6 kΩ 1 2 W R500 to R503

power supply L
L
Internal
circuit 500 to 503
COM1
During connections, do not mistake the polarity of the load power on the output side.
CAUTION Connecting the load power with polarities reversed may damage the KV-700 Series.
1-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 28 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-3 AC Power Unit
1-3 AC Power Unit ............................................................. KV-U7

1
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-U7 AC Power Unit,
and specifications.

Power Unit front Power Unit side
(6) Lock lever
KV-U7
(1) Output
bar LED
OC
(2) Terminal
block
cover 24V OUT
(3) 24 VDC 24VDC

output 1.8A
0V
(4) FG
terminal
N
INPUT
(5) Power 100-240V
AC
input L
50/60Hz
0.98A
terminal
100 to
240 VAC
(6) Lock lever

(7) KV-700/KV-EB1R connector
1-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 29 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-3 AC Power Unit
No. Name Function

(1) Output bar LED LED lighting patterns 1
LED No.1 (green) ON at voltage output

LED No.2 (green) ON at output current 30% or more
LED No.5 (yellow) ON at output current 70% or more
LED No.6 (red) ON at overcurrent detection
LED No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
OC
Current used has little margin with respect to power capacity
when LED No.5 (yellow) is lit. Use a separate power supply,
for example.
(2) Terminal block Cover
cover
(3) 24 VDC output 24 VDC power terminal for service power supply (M4
screws) Total 1.8 A including main power supply
(4) FG terminal Frame ground terminal for connecting earth lead (M4
screws)
(5) Power input Connected to 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz) power supply (M4
terminal screws)
(6) Lock lever Locks the unit coupling.
(7) KV-700, EB1R Connector for KV-700/EB1R
connector
• During an overcurrent (LED No.6 lit (red)), turn the unit OFF and remove the cause
CAUTION of the overcurrent.
• When an overvoltage is applied, output stops. (Output indicator goes out.)
Turn the power OFF, and wait at least 30 seconds before turning the power ON again.
• When the KV-U7 is used, do not supply power from the power terminal on the KV-
700.
Note: • Be sure to connect the KV-U7 immediately to the left of the KV-700 or
Extension Unit. Also, when the KV-U7 is used, 24V is not output to the
power terminal on the KV-700.
• When using the KV-U7, limit the total current consumption of the unit to 70%
(LED No.4 lit (green), approx. 1.3 A) of the KV-U7's output capacity to
protect defective startup caused by rush current on the unit.
1-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 30 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-3 AC Power Unit
Specifications
1 ■ Specifications
Item KV-U7
Input power voltage 100 to 240 VAC ±10% (50/60 Hz)
Output voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Output capacity 1.8 A (total of power supply to each unit
and service power supply)
Power consumption 135 VA or less
Instantaneous power interruption time 10 ms or less
Startup time Max. 2 s or less
■ External dimensions
2.8
KV-U7
OC 27.3
24V OUT
24VDC
1.8A
0V 90 35.9
N
INPUT
100-240V
AC
50/60Hz
0.98A
L
3.5 80
35 5.2 93.2 Unit: mm
1-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 31 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-3 AC Power Unit
Power Unit Wiring Method

The following describes how to wire the Power Unit.
1

■ Wiring the AC power unit
Wire the KV-U7 AC Power Unit as follows.
KV-U7
KV-U7
OC
24V OUT
24VDC
1.8A
0V
Sensor or other
N
INPUT
100-240V
external device
AC
50/60Hz
0.98A
L
Class D earth
100 to 240 VAC

±10%
Insulating transformer
noise filter, etc.
Note: • To reduce line noise, connect an insulated transformer or noise filter in a 1:1
configuration.
• To reduce dielectric influence, use twisted cables.
• When connecting the Power Unit, be sure to connect to a protective ground.
1-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 32 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-4 Expansion Input Unit
1-4 Expansion Input Unit .................. KV-B16XA/C32XA/C64XA

1
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-B16XA/C32XA/
C64XA Expansion Input Unit, and specifications.

KV-B16XA KV-C32XA KV-C64XA (side)
(front) (front) (front)
(3) Direct access switch (5) Lock lever
24V 24V
5V 5V
L H
(4) Input (1) Input voltage selector (2) Input connector (5) Lock lever
terminal block switch
No. Name Function

(1) Input voltage selector Switches the input voltage. 5 V→24 V
switch
(2) Input connector Input connector
(3) Direct access switch Turning this switch ON enables monitoring of the Expansion Unit on
the CPU access window. The state of the Expansion Unit changes
according to the color of the switch.
Lit (green): Normal operation (excluding some exceptions*1)
Blinking (green): When the switch is turned ON in a green lit state,
and the unit is selected
Lit (red): When an unit error has occurred (excluding some
exceptions*2)
Blinking (red): When the switch is turned ON in a red lit state, and
the unit is selected
(4) Input terminal block Input terminal block. Removable (M3 screws)
*1: This LED lights (green) in the following instances even if operation is not normal:
(1) When the number of connected units differs from the unit information on the CPU unit when
the power is turned ON
(2) When the model type different from the unit information on the CPU unit is connected when
In these cases, an error will be displayed in the access window.
*2: This LED lights (red) in the following instances even if the state is not a unit error state:
(1) When the unit information on the CPU unit is for a one CPU configuration when the power is
turned ON
In this case, an error will be displayed in the access window.
* The 34-pin connector for KV-C32XA/C64XA connection is available as an option.
Note: The terminal blocks on the KV-B16XA, KV-B16RA, KV-B16TA, KV-AD40, and KV-DA40
can be removed.
(For details on the KV-AD40/KV-DA40, refer to the KV-AD40/DA40 User's Manual.)
1-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 33 2012/03/15 17:25:25

Specifications
■ Specifications
1

Item KV-B16XA (16-points) KV-C32XA (32-points) KV-C64XA (64-points)
External connection Terminal block Connector (MIL standard)*1 Connector (MIL standard)*1
method
Input terminal 24 VDC mode 5 VDC mode 24 VDC mode 5 VDC mode 24 VDC mode*4 5 VDC mode*5
Rated max. input 26.4 VDC
Input voltage 24 VDC 5.3 mA 5 VDC 1 mA 24 VDC 5.3 mA 5 VDC 1 mA 24 VDC 5.3 mA 5 VDC 1.5 mA
Min. ON voltage 19 V 3.5 V 19 V 3.5 V 19 V
Max. OFF current 1.5 mA — 1.5 mA — 1.5 mA 0.5 mA
Max. OFF voltage — 1.5 V — 1.5 V — 7V
Common mode 16-points/1 common*2 32-points/1 common*2 64-points/1 common*3
Input time constant OFF→ON ON→OFF
(selected in three 25 µsec 25 µs ±20% 75 µs ±20%
levels)
1 ms 1 ms ±20% 1 ms ±20%
10 ms 10 ms ±20% 10 ms ±20%
Input impedance 4.3 KΩ 4.3 KΩ 15 KΩ
Internal current 15 mA or less 25 mA or less
consumption
Weight Approx. 120 g Approx. 110 g Approx. 140 g
*1 MIL-C-83503 compliant
*2 Two COMs are provided on the KV-C32XA and the KV-B16XA, and are common internally.
*3 Four COMs are provided on the KV-C64XA, are common internally at each of the location on the H side (two points)
and L side (two points).
*4 Relay Nos. 108 to 115, 308 to 315 (2-lead type supported)
*5 Relay Nos. 000 to 015, 100 to 115, 200 to 215, 300 to 307 (2-lead type unsupported)
"KV-B16XA internal circuit diagram" page 1-21, "KV-C32XA internal circuit diagram" page 1-22
"KV-C64XA internal circuit diagram" page 1-23
• The unit may become damaged when the number of inputs that simultaneously turn
CAUTION ON exceeds the specification range.
• With the KV-C64XA Unit, 2-lead wire unsupported terminals can be turned ON 100%
regardless of the ambient temperature.
• With the KV-C64XA Unit, the relationship between the ambient temperature and the
continuous simultaneous ON rate on 2-lead wire supported terminals is shown by the
following graph:
KV-C32XA derating KV-C64XA derating

(2-wire type compatible terminal)

120 120
17°C 30°C 48℃
43°C 48°C
100 100
80 80
75%
60 60
26.4V input 26.4V input
40 40
24V input 24V input
20 20 20%
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50
Ambient temperature (°C) Ambient temperature (°C)
1-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 34 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1 KV-B16XA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 80
9 29 3 (96.5) Unit: mm
KV-C32XA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 80
9 23 3 96.3
(125) Unit: mm
KV-C64XA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 80
9 29 3 96.3
(125) Unit: mm
1-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 35 2012/03/15 17:25:25

Expansion Input Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams

1

KV-B16XA wiring diagram KV-B16XA internal circuit diagram
Terminal No.
1
0
3
2
5 000 to 015 4.3KΩ
Internal circuit
4
7 IN
6 5V/24V
switching
C0 circuit
8 COM0
9 Photocoupler isolation
10
11 Input power
COM1
12
13
14
15
C1
Terminal No. Direction Signal Name

0 Input 000
1 Input 001
2 Input 002
3 Input 003
4 Input 004
5 Input 005
6 Input 006
7 Input 007
C0 Input COM0
8 Input 008
9 Input 009
24 VDC/5 VDC
10 Input 010
11 Input 011
12 Input 012
13 Input 013
14 Input 014
15 Input 015
C1 Input COM1
24 VDC/ 5VDC
COM internally shorted
1-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 36 2012/03/15 17:25:25

KV-C32XA wiring diagram KV-C32XA internal circuit diagram

1 Connector pin No.
1 18
2 19
3 20
4 21
5 22
000 to 015
6 23 100 to 115 4.3 KΩ
Internal circuit
7 24 IN
5V/24V
8 25 switching
circuit
9 26 COM0
10 27 Photocoupler isolation
COM1
11 28 Input power
12 29
13 30
14 31
15 32
16 33
17 34
Pin No. Direction Signal Name Pin No. Direction Signal Name
1 Input 000 18 Input 100
17 Input COM0 34 Input COM1
24 VDC/5 VDC 24 VDC/5 VDC
* COM internally shorted
Prevent the input simultaneous continuous ON rate from exceeding the specification
CAUTION range. Otherwise, the unit might become damaged.
"KV-C32XA derating precautions" page 1-19
1-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 37 2012/03/15 17:25:25

KV-C64XA wiring diagram KV-C64XA internal circuit diagram
L side H side 2-wire type compatible input

1
Connector Connector (Relay No.108 to 115, 308 to 315)

pin No. pin No.
1 18 1 18 108 to 115
300 to 315 4.3KΩ
2 19 2 19
Internal circuit
IN
3 20 3 20
330Ω
4 21 4 21 COM0 to 3
5 22 5 22 Photocoupler isolation
6 23 6 23 Input power
7 24 7 24
8 25 8 25
2-wire type incompatible input
(Relay No.000 to 015, 100 to 107, 200 to 215,
9 26 9 26
300 to 307)
10 27 10 27
11 28 11 28
15KΩ
12 29 12 29
Internal circuit
IN
13 30 13 30
2.7kΩ
14 31 14 31 COM0 to 3
15 32 15 32 Photocoupler isolation
16 33 16 33 Input power
17 34 17 34
Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin

No. Name Name No. No. Name Name No.
1 000 100 18 1 200 300 18
2 001 101 19 2 201 301 19
3 002 102 20 3 202 302 20
4 003 103 21 4 203 303 21
5 004 104 22 5 204 304 22
6 005 105 23 6 205 305 23
7 006 106 24 7 206 306 24
8 007 107 25 8 207 307 25
9 008 108 26 9 208 308 26
10 009 109 27 10 209 309 27
11 010 110 28 11 210 310 28
12 011 111 29 12 211 311 29
13 012 112 30 13 212 312 30
14 013 113 31 14 213 313 31
15 014 114 32 15 214 314 32
16 015 115 33 16 215 315 33
17 COM0 COM1 34 17 COM2 COM3 34
24 VDC 24 VDC
* COM0, COM1 internally shorted.

COM2, COM3 internally shorted.
(COM0, 1)-(COM2, 3) are not internally shorted.
Restrictions are applied on the 2-lead wire supported input simultaneous continuous
CAUTION ON rate. Prevent the input simultaneous continuous ON rate from exceeding the
specification range. Otherwise, the unit might become damaged.
"KV-C64XA derating precautions" page 1-19
Note: Use the OP-42224 connector (34-pin) for the 64-input units.
The OP-23139 cannot be used.
1-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 38 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-5 Expansion Output Unit
1-5 Expansion Output Unit ....KV-B16RA/B16TA/C32TA/C64TA

1
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-B16RA/B16TA/
C32TA/C64TA Expansion Output Unit, and specifications.

KV-B16RA/B16TA KV-C32TA KV-C64TA (side)
(front) (front) (front)
(2) Direct access switch (4) Lock lever
(3) Output terminal block (1) Output connector (4) Lock lever
No. Name Function

(1) Output connector Output connector
(2) Direct access switch Turning this switch ON enables monitoring of the Expansion Unit on
the CPU access window. The state of the Expansion Unit changes
according to the color of the switch.
Lit (green): Normal operation (excluding some exceptions*1)
Blinking (green): When the switch is turned ON in a green lit state,
and the unit is selected
Lit (red): When an unit error has occurred (excluding some
exceptions*2)
Blinking (red): When the switch is turned ON in a red lit state, and
the unit is selected
(3) Output terminal block Output terminal block. Removable (M3 screws)
*1: This LED lights (green) in the following instances even if operation is not normal:
(1) When the number of connected units differs from the unit information on the CPU unit when
(2) When the model type different from the unit information on the CPU unit is connected when
In these cases, an error will be displayed in the access window.
*2: This LED lights (red) in the following instances even if the state is not a unit error state:
(1) When the unit information on the CPU unit is for a one CPU configuration when the power is
turned ON
In this case, an error will be displayed in the access window.
* The 34-pin connector for KV-C32TA/C64TA connection is available as an option.
Note: The terminal blocks on the KV-B16XA, KV-B16RA, KV-B16TA, KV-AD40, and KV-DA40
can be removed.
(For details on the KV-AD40/KV-DA40, refer to the KV-AD40/DA40 User's Manual.)
1-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 39 2012/03/15 17:25:25

Specifications
■ Specifications
1

Item KV-B16RA KV-B16TA KV-C32TA KV-C64TA
(16 points) (16 points) (32 points) (64 points)
External connection Removable terminal Removable terminal Connector*1 Connector*1
method block block
Output mode Relay Transistor (NPN) Transistor (NPN) Transistor (NPN)
Rated load 250 VAC/30 VDC 2 A 30 VDC 0.2 A 30 VDC 0.2 A 30 VDC 0.2 A
(8 A/1 common)
OFF leakage current — 100 µA or less 100 µA or less 100 µA or less
ON residual voltage — 0.5 V or less 0.5 V or less 0.5 V or less
ON resistance 50 mΩ or less — — —
Common mode 8 points/ 1 common 16 points/2 common*2 32 points/2 common*2 64/ points4 common*3
(2 points)
Operating OFF→
→ON 10 msec or less 10 µs or less 10 µs or less 10 µs or less
time ON→
→OFF 100 µs or less 100 µs or less 100 µs or less
Internal current 120 mA or less 30 mA or less 45 mA or less 100 mA or less
consumption
Weight Approx. 190 g Approx. 130 g Approx. 100 g Approx. 140 g
*1 MIL-C-83503 compliant
*2 Two COMs are provided on the KV-C32TA and the KV-B16TA, and are common internally.
*3 Four COMs are provided on the KV-C64TA, and are common internally.
"KV-C32TA internal circuit diagram" page 1-29, "KV-B16RA internal circuit diagram" page 1-27
"KV-B16TA internal circuit diagram" page 1-28, "KV-C64TA internal circuit diagram" page 1-30
Note: • On the KV-C32TA/C64TA, the common is 1.6 A/1.

• The service life of the relays used on the KV-B16RA is as follows. These relays cannot be replaced.
Mechanical life: 20 million operations or more, Electrical life: 100,000 operations or more (used 20
times per minute)
The unit may become damaged when the number of outputs that simultaneously turn
CAUTION ON exceed the specification range.
The relationship between the ambient temperature and the continuous simultaneous
ON rate is shown by the following graph:
KV-B16RA derating
30°C
100
80
60
40
37.5%
20
0
0 10 20 30 50
Ambient temperature(°C)
1-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 40 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1 KV-B16RA/B16TA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 80
9 29 3 (96.5) Unit: mm
KV-C32TA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
3.5 80
9 23 3 96.3
(125) Unit: mm
KV-C64TA
2.8
27.3
90 35.9
12.3 80
3.5
9 29 3 96.3
(125) Unit: mm
1-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 41 2012/03/15 17:25:25

Expansion Output Unit Wiring and Internal Circuit Diagrams

1

KV-B16RA wiring diagram KV-B16RA internal circuit diagram
Terminal No.
1
0
3
2 000 to 007
5 (008 to 015)
4 OUT
Internal circuit
7 Load
6
C0
8
9 COM0
10
11 (COM1)
12
13
14
15 Load power supply
C1

0 Output 000 L
1 Output 001 L
2 Output 002 L
3 Output 003 L
4 Output 004 L
5 Output 005 L
6 Output 006 L
7 Output 007 L
C0 Output COM
8 Output 008 L
9 Output 009 L
10 Output 010 L
11 Output 011 L
12 Output 012 L
13 Output 013 L
14 Output 014 L
15 Output 015 L
C1 Output COM
* COM are not internally shorted.

There are independent.
1-27
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 42 2012/03/15 17:25:25

KV-B16TA wiring diagram KV-B16TA internal circuit diagram

1
Terminal No.
1 Isolated
0 power
3
2 supply
5
4
7 000 to 015
6
C0
Internal circuit
8 OUT
9
10 Load
11
12
13
14
15 Photocoupler COM0
C1 isolation
COM1
Load power supply

0 Output 000 L
1 Output 001 L
2 Output 002 L
3 Output 003 L
4 Output 004 L
5 Output 005 L
6 Output 006 L
7 Output 007 L
C0 Output COM0
8 Output 008 L DC
9 Output 009 L
10 Output 010 L
11 Output 011 L
12 Output 012 L
13 Output 013 L
14 Output 014 L
15 Output 015 L
C1 Output COM1
DC
1-28
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 43 2012/03/15 17:25:25

KV-C32TA wiring diagram KV-C32TA internal circuit diagram
Connector pin No.

1

1 18
2 19
3 20
4 21 Isolated
power
5 22 supply
6 23
7 24 000 to 015
100 to 115
8 25
Internal circuit
OUT
9 26 Load
10 27
11 28
12 29 Photocoupler COM0
13 30 isolation
14 31 COM1
15 32 Load power supply
16 33
17 34
Pin No. Direction Signal Name Pin No. Direction Signal Name
1 Output 000 L 18 Output 100 L
17 Output COM0 34 Output COM1
DC DC
1-29
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 44 2012/03/15 17:25:25

KV-C64TA wiring diagram KV-C64TA internal circuit diagram

1 L side H side
Connector Connector
pin No. pin No.

1 18 1 18
2 19 2 19
3 20 3 20 Isolated
power
4 21 4 21 supply
5 22 5 22 000 to 015
100 to 115
6 23 6 23 200 to 215
300 to 315
7 24 7 24
Internal circuit
OUT
8 25 8 25 Load
9 26 9 26 COM0
10 27 10 27 COM1
11 28 11 28 Photocoupler COM2
12 29 12 29 isolation
13 30 13 30 COM3
14 31 14 31 Load power supply
15 32 15 32
16 33 16 33
17 34 17 34
Pin Signal Name Signal Name Pin Pin Signal Name Signal Name Pin
No. No. No. No.
L 1 000 100 18 L L 1 200 300 18 L
L 2 001 101 19 L L 2 201 301 19 L
L 3 002 102 20 L L 3 202 302 20 L
L 4 003 103 21 L L 4 203 303 21 L
L 5 004 104 22 L L 5 204 304 22 L
L 6 005 105 23 L L 6 205 305 23 L
L 7 006 106 24 L L 7 206 306 24 L
L 8 007 107 25 L L 8 207 307 25 L
L 9 008 108 26 L L 9 208 308 26 L
L 10 009 109 27 L L 10 209 309 27 L
L 11 010 110 28 L L 11 210 310 28 L
L 12 011 111 29 L L 12 211 311 29 L
L 13 012 112 30 L L 13 212 312 30 L
L 14 013 113 31 L L 14 213 313 31 L
L 15 014 114 32 L L 15 214 314 32 L
L 16 015 115 33 L L 16 215 315 33 L
17 COM0 COM1 34 17 COM2 COM3 34
* All COMs internally shorted
Note: Use the OP-42224 connector (34-pin) for the 64-output units.
1-30
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 45 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-6 Extension Unit
1-6 Extension Unit ........................................ KV-EB1S/KV-EB1R

1
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-EB1S/KV-EB1R Extension Unit, and

specifications.

KV-EB1S KV-EB1R
(1) Power monitor LED
(6) OP cable
(4) Power supply selector switch (bottom)
(2) Extension connector (3) DC power input terminal block

(5) KV-U7 connector (side)
No. Name Function

(1) Power monitor LED Power monitor LED *1
(2) Extension connector Connector for extension cable connection
(3) DC power input Terminal block for 24 VDC power input (3.5 A max.) *2, *3
terminal block
(4) Power supply selector This switch is for selecting the power supplied to the Expansion Unit.
switch INT: To use the power supply on the KV-700 side POWER
INT EXT
EXT: To use the DC power from the EBIR or the UV
(5) KV-U7 connector Connector for KV-U7 Power Unit connection *3, *4
(6) Extension cable This is for connecting the KV-EBIS and KV-EBIR.
(OP-42142 1 m) (OP-42141 2 m)
*1 When the LED lights orange or red, a probable cause is that the power voltage has dropped. Check
the power supply.
*2 Pay sufficient attention to reverse connection of the power supply. The unit has a built-in reverse
connection protection circuit. However, protection may not function depending on the power supply
connection.
Pay attention to the current consumption of the Expansion Unit to prevent the current supplied from
the terminal block from falling to 3.5 A or below.
*3 When the power capacity on the KV-700 side is limited, power is supplied to units on the extended
side from here.
*4 When the KV-U7 is connected, pay attention to the current consumption of the extended unit.
Note: Before switching the power supply selector switch, be sure to turn the power OFF.
1-31
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 46 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-6 Extension Unit
Specifications
1 ■ Specifications
Item KV-EB1S KV-EB1R

Power voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Internal current 15 mA or less 25 mA or less
consumption
Weight Approx. 90 g Approx. 115g
Connected unit example (max.)
Max. number of horizontal units: 16

KV-700
60 mm or more
Vertical
■ About connection
• When extension cable 1 m (OP-42142) is used
Up to 3 vertical levels (max. 48 units can be connected)
• When extension cable 2 m (OP-42141) is used
Up to 2 vertical levels (max. 32 units can be connected)
■ About installation
When the Extension Unit is used, allow 60 mm of space between the upper and
lower level units to allow heat to escape.
If the temperature inside the panel (temperature at the bottom of the unit) exceeds
the operating ambient temperature of the unit, lower the temperature, for example,
by forced air cooling or by providing more space between mounted units and the
surrounding area to improve ventilation.
• Power supply wiring methods
"Wire the power supply to levels 1, 2 and 3 when a separate power supply is used
on the same system. If the power supply is turned OFF on the 1st level during
operation when separate power supplies are used for the 1st level, and for the 2nd
and 3rd levels, operation of the units on the 2nd and 3rd level will enter the state
when instructions are executed with the power supply OFF. Pay sufficient
attention to operation when the power supply is OFF."
• Noise countermeasures
"When EB1 is used, and three levels are added on, and a DC power supply is used
as each power supply, insert two ferrite cores on the power cable, and when KV-
U7 is used, adopt noise countermeasures such as grounding of the FG."
1-32
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 47 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-6 Extension Unit
■ Precautions when separate power supplies are used

1
Pay attention to the following points when supplying power from separate power

CAUTION supplies from the KV-EB1R.
• At power ON: Supply power from the KV-EB1R first.
• At power OFF: Turn the power from the KV-700 OFF first.
(When an error occurs, press the key on the KV-700 to clear the error, and change
the mode from PROG to RUN to start operations.)
KV-EB1S
2.8
27.3
35.9
90
9 29 3.5 80
(130)
KV-EB1R
27.3
35.9
90
3.5 80
29 3 (105)
(130)
Unit: mm
1-33
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 48 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-7 Installation Environment

1
This section describes cautions for the environments in which each of the units are
installed, and mounting positions in the panel.
Installation Environment
Do not install the KV-700 in the following places.
Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature Locations subject to ambient humidity
out of 0 to +50°C range out of 35 to 85%RH range
Locations subject to condensation Locations subject to corrosive and flam- Locations subject to large amounts of
caused by sudden temperature change mable gases dirt and dust, salt, iron and oil smoke
ER
NG
DA
Locations directly subject to vibration Locations that may be splashed with wa- Locations where strong magnetic and
and shock ter, oil or chemical mist electrical fields are generated
Che
mic
als
1-34
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 49 2012/03/15 17:25:25

Mounting Position
■ Mounting orientation
1

When mounting the KV-700 inside a panel, make sure that the KV-700 CPU Unit
is mounted so that the front panel and I/O connectors are facing the front.
H
Y
P
K
E
R
V 12 34
A
-70 2
C
C
000 1
E
S
S
A
W
4
IN
B
5
D
6
O
5
7
W
6
8
M
7
9
10
8
11
9
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
CA
15
RD
SD
RD
US
24
24V
B
V
5V 24
5V
V
CK 5V
KV LO
-70
0A
B LO
CK
0
1 0
KV
2
3
1
2 -B1
HY 4 3 6X
PE
R AC
5
6
4
5
A
CE
SS
7 6
KV
8 7
-C
KV-700 A B
WIN
DO 9 8
32
M W 10
11
9
10 XA
12 11
0
1
13 12
2
3
24
0
14 13
4
V
5
2
15 14
6
3
7
4
15
8
5
5V
9
10 10
6
11 11
7
12 12
8
CA
13 13
9
RD
14 14
15 15
SD
RD
US
B
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW
USB
LOCK
RD
SD
CARD
■ Distance between surrounding areas
Be sure to leave at least 30 mm of space between the wall at the inner side of the
device and other devices.
30 mm
30 mm
Respective unit Bottom
Allow 30 mm of space to allow you to put
in your finger to remove unit.
30 mm
Bottom left
Allows 30 mm of space to allow heat to escape.
Note: If the temperature inside the panel (temperature at the bottom of the unit)
exceeds the operating ambient temperature of the unit, lower the tempera-
ture, for example, by forced air cooling or by providing more space between
mounted units and the surrounding area to improve ventilation.
When the Extension Unit is used, allow 60 mm of space between the upper
and lower level units to allow heat to escape.
1-35
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 50 2012/03/15 17:25:25

1-8 Connecting Units

1
This section describes how to assemble each unit and how to mount each unit on the
DIN rail.
Cautions When Connecting Units

Observe the following points when connecting each of the units:
• Be sure to connect the Start Unit or Power Unit to the left of the CPU Unit.
• Be sure to connect the End Unit to the right of the last connected unit.
Start Unit
Max. number of horizontal units: 16

CPU Unit (max. 48 when extension is used) End unit
KV-700
KEYENCE KV-700
0 16
1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
or
14 30
15 31
Power Unit
RUN
STOP
KV-U7
CARD RD SD USB
KV-U7 SERIAL
CC
24V OUT
24VDC
1.8A
0V
N
INPUT
100-240VAC
50/60Hz
0.98A
■ Max. number of connected units

Up to 16 units (excluding the Power Unit and End Unit) can be connected to a single
CPU Unit.
When two Extension Units are used, up to 48 units can be connected to the CPU
Unit.
With some special units, 48 units cannot be connected to the CPU Unit.
Refer to the manual for each unit.
Note: • Be sure to connect units with the power turned OFF.

• Before the KV-700 CPU Unit is shipped from the factory, its battery is
removed to prevent power capacity from falling. When using the KV-700
CPU Unit for the first time, connect the battery, and be sure to first perform
an all clear in the access window.
1-36
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 51 2012/03/15 17:25:26

Assembling the Unit

The following describes an example of how to assemble the KV-700 CPU Unit and KV-
1
B16XA Expansion Input Unit.

KV
-B1
6X
A
24
V
5V
KV
-70
0A
B
KV-700 (left) KV-B16XA (right)

0
1 0
2 1
3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
R AC 6 5
CE 7 6
SS 8 7
WIN
9 8
DO
M W 10
11
9
10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
15
CA
RD
SD
RD
US
B
Note: Assemble units with the Power Unit disassembled.
1 Unlock the lock levers at the top and bottom of

the unit on the right.
• Hook your finger into the indentation, and slide
towards the front of the unit to unlock. 24
V
24
V
2 Insert the lock lever on the unit on the right into the
lock lever slot of the unit on the left to connect.
24
V
• The unit can be easily connected by holding both units

5V
KV
-70
0A
B
0
1 0
so that they are parallel to each other and by aligning

2 1
3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
R AC 6 5
CE 7 6
SS 8 7
WIN 8
9
DO
M W 10
11
9
10
12 11
13 12
the connector positions.

14 13
15 14
15 KV
-B1
CA 6X
A
RD
SD
RD
US
B
3 Lock the lock levers at the top and bottom of the unit
on the right.
• Following the same procedure as in (1), hook your finger
24
V
5V
KV
-70
0A
B
into the indentation and slide towards the rear of the unit.
0
1 0
KV
2
3
1
2 -B1
HY 4 3 6X
PE
R AC
5
6
4
5
A
CE 7 6
SS 8 7
WIN 8
9
DO
M W 10
11
9
10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
15
CA
RD
SD
RD
US
B
During this operation, make sure that there is no gap

between the units. If there is a gap, this is a sign that the
units are not connected correctly.
1-37
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 52 2012/03/15 17:25:26

Mounting on the DIN Rail

1 The following describes how to mount the unit to be connected onto the DIN rail and
remove the unit from the DIN rail.
■ Mounting units
1 Hook the groove at the top of the DIN

5V
24
V
rail onto the DIN rail mounting claw at
LO
CK
the top of the unit.
Upper claw
DIN rail
2 Hook the groove at the bottom of

the DIN rail onto the DIN rail mount-
5V
24
V
ing claw at the bottom of the unit.
• The black claw at the bottom is
LO
C
K
designed to move by means of a
spring. Press in this claw until you
hear it click into place.
Lower black claw
• In difficult to mount locations, re-
move all locks, mount the unit on
the DIN rail, and then lock.
3 Make sure that the lower DIN rail

mounting claw is pressed in
(locked).
Locked Unlocked
■ Removing units
1 Pull down the lower DIN rail mounting claw.

2 Remove the DIN rail from the units following the
procedure in reverse to the mounting procedure.
Loose
1-38
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 53 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
1-9 Wiring Units

1
This section describes how to assemble connectors, wiring of each unit, internal

circuits, and how to wire each unit.
Precautions When Wiring to Each Unit

The following describes the precautions to follow when wiring I/O devices and I/O units.
Be sure to read these precautions before starting wiring.
■ Precautions when wiring to I/O devices

Pay attention to the following points when wiring to I/O devices.
• Separate input leads from output leads, and wire separately.
• I/O signal leads wired nearby power leads may be influenced by high voltage or
large current, causing the KV-700 Series to malfunction. Wire power leads at
least 100 mm away from I/O signal leads.
• Wire 24 VDC I/O leads away from 100 VAC or 200 VAC leads.
• When wiring using ducts, make sure that the ducts are properly grounded.
When I/O leads cannot be separated from power leads

Use a single shielded cable, and ground the shielded cable at the PLC side.
(In some environments, the shielded cable may have to be grounded at the side
opposite the PLC.)
PLC Shielded cable

Sensor, etc.,
Input
RL
Output
24 VDC Class D earth
Be sure to separate connecting leads for the Extension Unit away from power leads.
1-39
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 54 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
■ Grounding precautions
1 • Provide a class D earth (maximum resistance of 100 Ohms) individually for each
of the devices.
• If a separate ground is not possible, ground using a shared grounding point. Note,
however, that in this case the leads must of the same length.
Other Other Other

PLC PLC PLC
device device device
B
A B A
Class D earth A=B A>B

A<B
■ About protection of contacts

When using clutches, motors, solenoids or other inductive loads, rush current flows
when the load power is turned ON or counter electromotive force may occur when
the load power is cut. Rush current or counter electromotive force is a major cause
of shorter contact life. To suppress these phenomena, provide a contact protection
circuit.
Examples of contact protection circuits
In case of an AC load (1) In case of an DC load (1)

Contact
Contact
L L
Load CR circuit Load Diode
In case of an AC load (2) In case of an DC load (2)
a b
L L
Zener diode
Varistor
• When the power voltage is

24 to 48 V install at point b.
100 to 200 V install at point a.
• Use a load coil rated at the contact capacity or lower.

• Use a diode whose peak inverse voltage is 10X or more than the circuit voltage
and whose forward current is the current of the load or higher.
• Install diodes, varistors, and CR circuits directly at the relay coil terminal.
1-40
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 55 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
■ Connecting to terminal block units

Use Y-shaped terminals of the following size. 1

B
d2
Compatible dimensions
L B: 6 mm min.
L: 13 mm min.
Dimensions of Y-shaped terminal
d2: 3.2 mm max.
B: Distance between prong outsides
d1: Diameter of lead insert section
d2: Distance between prong insides
(screw fit section) width
L: Total length
d1
Assembling and Wiring Connectors

To connect devices to each unit, you must wire the electrical leads from each device
to the connectors (female) to connect to on the unit side.
■ Precautions during wiring (OP-22185, OP-23139, OP-42224)

Pay attention to the following points before wiring.
• Be sure to use the following compatible lead.
Lead size: AWG22 to 24 (stranded lead)
Cross-section area: 0.2 to 0.3 mm2
Sheath outer diameter: ø1.5 to ø1.1 mm
• Cut the end of leads straight so that they are flat.
• After wiring, make sure that the clamp section completely wraps around the lead
wire, and that it is inserted as far as possible.
• Cut sections of the lead wire must be cut so that there are no loose strands. (The
sheath need not be stripped away.)
• Fine lead contacts (OP-30594) for AWG26 to 28 lead are also available.
(Use in combination with OP-22185, OP-23139 and OP-42224.)
Lead size: AWG26 to 28
Cross-section area: 0.08 to 0.14 mm2
Sheath outer diameter: ø1.3 to ø1.1 mm
This unit is made of synthetic resin, and may melt if it comes in contact with acetone,
CAUTION trichlene, benzene, and other solvents with strong dissolving power. Also, note that the
unit may be damaged if excessive force is applied during fastening.
Note: Use the OP-42224 connector (34-pin) for the 64-output units.
1-41
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 56 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
■ About the exclusive pressure-contact tool

1 Units can be wired more easily if you use the Exclusive Pressure-contact Tool to
pressure-fasten the leads.
Prepare the following Exclusive Pressure-contact Tool beforehand.
Note: The lead must be soldered if you do not have the Exclusive Pressure-contact
Tool.
Names of parts
Exclusive Pressure-contact Tool: Model No. OP-21734
Handle
Press-fastener punch
Body
Contact extractor pin

Guide Contact holder Cover
■ About the connector

The connector is provided Hood cover
with an upper and a lower Unscrew these
cover. When wiring the con- two screws.
nector, remove both of these
covers.
Housing
OP-23139 OP-42224
Connector terminal Nos.

There are two types of connectors, 34-pin and 20-pin, depending on the type of unit.
The figures below show the pin Nos. for each of the terminals. When wiring, also
check with "Unit wiring/internal circuit diagrams."
34-pin connector: Model No. OP-23139, OP-42224
Side is claw is up side.

Mark Up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Down
20-pin connector: Model No. OP-22185
Mark Up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Down
1-42
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 57 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
■ Wiring to the connector

The following describes how to wire to the connector using the Exclusive Pressure- 1
contact Tool. Prepare "contacts," "housing" and "lead wire" beforehand.

1 Cut the contact from below the cutoff position on
the carrier in the cutaway direction shown by the
arrow.
Carrier
Contact cutoff position
2 Insert the contact straight into the contact holder of the Exclusive Pressure-
contact Tool as far as possible. (Figure A)
3 Insert the lead wire straight in as far as possible along the crimping groove
of the contact. (Figure B)
Press-fastener
Fig.A Fig.B
punch
Crimping groove
Cover Electrical lead

Guide
Contact
View from side
Handle
Press-fastener
punch
Press-fastener punch
Cover
Body
Electrical Guide
lead
Guide Cover
Contact holder
4 Grip the handle of the Exclusive Pressure-contact Tool until the clamp is
completely wrapped around the lead wire.
The clamp must be gripping

the elecrical lead.
Insert electrical lead as far as possible.
1-43
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 58 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
1 5 Lightly pull on the lead wire to remove the

contact pressure-fastened with the lead wire
from the contact holder of the Exclusive Pres-
sure-contact Tool.
Electrical lead
6 Insert the contact straight in as far as possible

along the groove of a housing in which a Housing　
contact is not attached.
7 Attach the housing in which Screw in these two screws.

contacts are inserted to the
connector, and attach the
covers.
Housing
Align this section.
8 Fasten the electrical leads with the bundling

band as shown in the figure.
Bundling band
To remove contacts
Remove contacts from the connector as follows.
1 Align the terminal that you want Hold down
to remove with the arrow on the

frame of the Exclusive Pres- Pull electrical lead
sure-contact Tool.
2 Pull out the lead wire while hold-

ing down the contact.
1-44
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 59 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-9 Wiring Units
Removing the Terminal Block

The following describes how to remove the terminal block.
1

The terminal blocks on the KV-B16TA, KV-B16RA, KV-B16XA, KV-AD40 and KV-
DA40 units can be removed.
Note: Be sure to turn the power OFF before you remove the terminal block.
1 Open the terminal block cover attached to the

unit. A
6X
-B1
KV
V
24
5V
2 Unscrew the fastening screws, and remove

the terminal block.
• The black screws are the terminal block fasten- 6X
A
-B1
ing screws. 24
5V
V
KV
3 Remove the terminal block by pulling it out

towards you.
• Pull out towards you while exerting a small 16
XA
-B
amount of force.
KV
V
24
5V
1-45
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 60 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-10 Maintenance
1-10 Maintenance
1
This section describes how to inspect and perform daily care on units, and how to
replace batteries and relays.
Inspection and Daily Care

■ Inspection
When the KV-700 or units are used for a long time, the connecting sections of the
connectors become loose or the battery is worn down. Continued use of the KV-700
in this state may cause trouble during operation.
For this reason, periodically inspect the body and wired sections of the KV-700 and
each of the KV-700 Series units.
The following table shows the main inspection items.
• Are the locks on the connections of each unit loose or disconnected?

• Are the connector connections loose or disconnected?
• Are the screws on the terminal block loose?
• Is the battery worn?
• Are the wiring cables between units and other equipment damaged?
■ Daily care
Dirt adheres to the CPU Unit or each of the units when they are used for a long time.
Clean off any dirt from the KV-700 using a clean, dry cloth.
Dust and dirt on fine components can be removed with a cotton bud after first
removing the connector.
Replacing the Battery

■ When battery power has dropped
When the message [CPU Error No. 83 Low Battery] is displayed, the built-in lithium
battery must be replaced. Replace the battery by following the procedure below.
(Before the KV-700 is shipped from the factory, the battery connector is discon-
nected. To use the KV-700, open the battery cover and connect the battery
connector.)
When a battery error occurs, CR2306 turns ON.

Data is held in memory for at least one week after a battery error occurs.
1-46
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 61 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-10 Maintenance
■ When the battery has run out of power

When the battery has run out of power, the SRAM backup error occurs, and data 1
memory (DM), control memory (CM) and other values disappear. The ladder

program itself, however, will not disappear. If execution of the ladder program will
not cause any problems in operation even without DM, CM and other information,
the ladder program can be temporarily executed by clearing SRAM in the access
window.
Buy the following battery:
Replacement lithium battery Model No.: OP-42139
• The battery life is five years at an ambient temperature of 25°C. Replace the battery
CAUTION every five years regardless of the operating environment of the unit. Note that use
of the unit in an environment that exceeds this temperature will reduce the battery's
service life.
• When the unit is used under a high-temperature environment (ambient temperature:
40°C or more), replace the battery within the total unit operation time of 17,520 hours
(two years).
Failure to do so might damage the battery.
• Data is sometimes lost if the battery is not energized before it is replaced.
• Limit the battery replacement time to within ten minutes.
1 Before you replace the battery, energize

the battery for at least ten minutes, and
then turn the power OFF.
2 Open the battery cover, and remove the old

battery.
• Complete the battery replacement within
ten minutes.
24
V
5V
KV
-70
0A
B
0
1 0
3 Remove the old battery connector, and

2 1
3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
RA 6 5
CC
ES 7 6
SW 8 7
IN 9 8
DO 10 9
W
connect the new battery connector.

11 10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
15
4 Insert the battery into the battery compart-

ment, and attach the battery cover.
5 Turn the unit ON, and make sure that the

battery error is not displayed on the access
window.
24
V
5V
KV
-70
0A
B
0
1 0
2 1
3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
RA 6 5
CC
ES 7 6
SW 8 7
IN 9 8
DO 10 9
W
11 10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
15
1-47
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 62 2012/03/15 17:25:26

1-10 Maintenance

1
1-48
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 63 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2
ACCESS WINDOW
ACCESS WINDOW
This chapter describes the access window that allows the user to
change data and easily perform monitoring.
2-1 Outline ................................................................................. 2-2
2-2 Unit Monitor ......................................................................... 2-6
2-3 Device Mode ........................................................................ 2-8
2-4 Digital Trimmer Mode ....................................................... 2-19
2-5 Displaying and Setting the Date/Time ............................ 2-21
2-6 Memory Card Operations ................................................. 2-24
2-7 CPU Monitor ...................................................................... 2-25
2-8 Alarm Monitor ...................................................................2-30
2-9 Access Window Setup ..................................................... 2-37
2-10 Clearing SRAM .................................................................. 2-40
2-11 All Clear ............................................................................. 2-42
2-12 User Messages .................................................................. 2-44
2-13 Setting Inhibited Operation ..............................................2-46
2-14 Key Lock ............................................................................2-48
2-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 64 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-1 Outline
2-1 Outline
This manual describes an outline of the access window and examples of how to use
the access window.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
What is the "Access Window?"

The KV-700 is provided with a compact LCD display unit with 2-color backlight.
The LCD is displayed green in the Run mode and red in the Program mode.
Memory Card KV-700 A B Digital trimmer
·Load 0
1
0
1
TRMO Direct
·Save 2
3
2
3
0
·File List 4
5
4
5
L _____
·Free Space 6
7
6
7
1
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
14 14
15 15
RUN
PROG
Unit monitor User message
KV-AD40 CHOM CARD SD RD USB Usr Message

ANALOG
+0.00 STOP!!
V
SERIAL
Alarm record Device display Date
Record 01/31 Sensor A 2000/09/16

Press. Alarm OFF 15:52:40
2000/09/01 RLY1 Sat
10:10:10 OFF
2-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 65 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-1 Outline
Access Window Modes

The KV-700 body is equipped with the access window for easily changing and
monitoring data.
The access window also allows the user to check error codes that may occur. 2
Access window is provided with the following ten modes.
ACCESS WINDOW
Unit Monitor mode
In this mode, the state of the unit can be monitored on the access window by pressing
the direct access switch on the unit connected to the CPU.
"2-2 Unit Monitor" page 2-6
Device mode
Up till now, Ladder Support Software KV BUILDER and Programming Console were
used for displaying internal devices. KV-700 uses the access window to display
internal devices.
Access window also allows the user to change settings.
"2-3 Device Mode" page 2-8
Digital Trimmer mode

In this mode, the trimmer can be set digitally in more detail than by the conventional
knobs. The maximum resolution is 4294967296.
"2-4 Digital Trimmer Mode" page 2-19
Access Window setup

In this mode, you can set the contrast of the access window, display language, and
other access window related settings.
"2-9 Access Window Setup" page 2-37
Clock
In this mode, the CPU internal clock can be displayed and the time set.
"2-5 Displaying and Setting the Date/Time" page 2-21
Alarm
In this mode, the alarm monitor and alarm record can be checked.
"2-8 Alarm Monitor" page 2-30
Memory Card
In this mode, operations such as saving/loading files in Memory Card, and displaying
a list of files can be performed.
"2-6 Memory Card Operations" page 2-24
Clearing SRAM
In this mode, device values can be cleared.
"2-10 Clearing SRAM" page 2-40
All clear
In this mode, all settings can be cleared.
"2-11 All Clear" page 2-42
CPU monitor
In this mode, the state of the CPU positioning, frequency counter, and cam switch
functions can be monitored.
"2-7 CPU Monitor" page 2-25
2-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 66 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-1 Outline
Access Window Menu Tree

The following shows how the access window menu is configured.
2 1. Device Mode DM
CM
ACCESS WINDOW
TM
T
C
CTH/CTC
TRM
HM
RLY
CR
2. Trimmer Trimmer display
3. Date Date display Date/time setting/adjustment
4. CPU Mon Positioning X-axis current value
X-axis relay
Y-axis current value
Y-axis relay
X-/Y-axis current value
Frequency counter
Cam switch
5. Alarm Monitor
Record
Clear record
6. Memory Card Load
Save
File List Delete file
Free Space
7. AW Setting Contrast (3 to 9)
Language (English/Japanese)
8. S-RAM Clr Execute/cancel clear
9. All Clr Execute/cancel clear
2-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 67 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-1 Outline
Names and Functions of Access Window Parts

KV-700 A B
2
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6
7
8
6
7
8
(1) Display window
ACCESS WINDOW
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
14 14
15 15
RUN
PROG
CARD SD RD USB
SERIAL
(1) Display window

This window displays the current values and setting values of each device, and
error messages.
The information of each unit is displayed by pressing the direct access switch on
each unit.

These keys are used for moving between modes and changing the settings of each
mode. Key functions differ according to each mode. For details, refer to the
description of operations for the respective mode.
Menu items
Pressing the "M" key displays the menu.
If menu items do not fit in the screen, press the ▼
" " key to display the rest of the menu.
Pressing the "▲" and "▼" scrolls the menu up and down.
M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
When screens are displayed in a language other than English, re-select the display
language.
The following table shows the CPU menu items.
CPU Menu
1. DeviceMode
2 Trimmer
3 Date
4. CPU Mon
5. Alarm
6. MemoryCard
7. AW Setting
8. S-RAM Clr
9. All Clr
2-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 68 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-2 Unit Monitor
2-2 Unit Monitor

The state of expansion units and special units can be monitored on the access window.
2
Units can be monitored and set on the access window by pressing the direct access
ACCESS WINDOW
switch on special units or expansion units such as the I/O unit connected to the CPU.
To return to the original screen from the expansion unit or special unit, press the direct
access switch of the unit currently displayed on the access window.
For details on monitor items and settings for each unit, refer to the User's Manual for
the respective unit.
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys

The following table summarizes key operations when monitoring or setting up units.
Setting/operation Key Regular Function Display When Changing Numerical Values
M Menu display Menu display
Not used Changes the digit whose value is to be
incremented/decremented.
▲ Switches pages, and changes selections Increments the current set value.
when changing settings.
▼ Switches pages, and changes selections Decrements the current set value.
when changing settings.
Holding this key down for at least one Holding this key down for at least one second
second apples changes to settings. apples changes to settings.
Method of Operation (example: on I/O unit)

■ KV-C32XA (example)
1 Press the direct access switch on the unit.

The direct access switch on the selected unit flashes.
KV-700 A B KV-C32XA
0
1
0
1
Direct access switch
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
14 14
15 15
RUN
STOP
CARD SD RD USB
SERIAL
2-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 69 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-2 Unit Monitor
2 The relay No. and relay ON/OFF state assigned to the unit is displayed.
The LED indication changes as follows according to the currently selected unit.
RLY30100
76543210
M
2
L __ ■ ____ ■
ACCESS WINDOW
H■ ___ ■ ___
0 0
1
2
1
2
On the two 16-LED rows (left row: +0 to15, right
3 3 row: +100 to +115), for example, the leading No.
RLY30000 4
5
4
5 of relays occupied by C32XA are displayed.
76543210 6 6
L __ ■ ____ ■ 7 7 In the figure on the left, the top left of the LED
8 8
H■ ___ ■ ___ 9 9 indicates relay 30000, and the bottom right
10 10
11 11 indicates relay 30015.
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
3 Press the "M" key with the direct access switch on the unit flashing (se-
lected).
The menu for the unit is displayed.
M
Monitor
Filter
4 Select the filter using the up/down keys, and then press the " " key.
The currently set filter state can be checked.
KV-C32XA M
Filter
10ms
5 Hold down the " " key for at least one second in this state.
The setting value flashes, and the unit enters the change mode. (This operation is
not possible in the Run mode. Values can be changed only in the Program mode.)
KV-C32XA M
Filter
10ms
6 Change the setting value using the up/down keys, and hold down the " " key
for at least one second.
The setting value stops flashing, and is set. (Holding down the " " key for less than
one second cancels the newly set value.)
M
KV-C32XA
Filter
1ms
2-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 70 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-3 Device Mode
2-3 Device Mode

PLC device values can be monitored and changed.
2
Devices That Can Be Displayed and Whose Settings Can be Changed
ACCESS WINDOW
The following table summarizes devices that can be displayed and whose settings can
be changed.
Display Name Display Name
RLY Relay T Timer
CR Control Relay C Counter
DM Data Memory CTH High-speed Counter
CM Control Memory CTC High-speed Counter Comparator
TM Temporary Data Memory TRM Digital Trimmer
Note: The states of timers, counters, and high-speed comparators cannot be

monitored.

The following table summarizes key operations in the Device mode.
Setting/operation Key Regular Function Menu Display When Changing Numerical Values
M Menu display Menu display
Moves to setting value change mode. Registration/cancellation of new value
* Hold down for at least one second. Hold down for at least one second to apply regis-
tration.
Registration is canceled if held down for less than
one second.
▲/▼ Selection of device No. Increments/decrements newly set changed value.
Selection of device Selects the digit whose numerical value is to be
changed.
Selection of display attribute
Selection of device name
2-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 71 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-3 Device Mode
Method of Operation in Device Mode

To check the menu configuration of the access window, refer to the "access window
menu tree."
"Access Window Menu Tree" page 2-4 2
ACCESS WINDOW
■ Moving to the Device mode
1 Press the "M" key.

The menu is displayed. (If other menus are displayed, press the "M" key twice.)
When the menu is displayed, [1.DeviceMode] is displayed flashing.
M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [1. DeviceMode].

In this example, [1. DeviceMode] is displayed flashing. This is OK.
3 Determine the mode setting.

Press the " " to switch to the device mode.
The monitor screen is displayed in the device mode.
■ Example of monitor screen for each device
Relay Control relay
Data memory Control memory
2-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 72 2012/03/15 17:25:26

2-3 Device Mode
■ Changing the device No. to monitor
1 After moving to the Device mode, press the "▼" key.

2 Pressing the "▼" key increases the device No., and pressing the ▲
" " key decreases
the device No.
ACCESS WINDOW
RLY600
ON
RLY601
OFF
RLY601
ON
RLY602
OFF
■ Changing the device type to monitor
1 In the monitor display state, press the " " key.
2 A list of device types is displayed.

Select the device to display using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
In this example, select [TM].
The device types are displayed in the following order:

RLY → CR → DM → CM → TM → T → C → CTH/CTC → TRM
When the "▼" key is pressed with TRM selected, the display returns to RLY.
Likewise, if the "▲" key is pressed with RLY selected, the display returns to TRM.
2-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 73 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
3 [ • TM] is displayed flashing.

Press the " " key.
·CR
·DM 2
·CM
The screen for determining the desired device No. is
ACCESS WINDOW
·TM
displayed.
The current device No. is displayed on the 3rd line.
The numerical value displayed on the 4th line is the
Jump device No. change increment.
TM
000 Change the device No. using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
10
The device No. change increment increases tenfold by
pressing the " " key.
Determine the desired device No. using the "▲", "▼" and
" " keys.
TM53
0 Press the " " key. This displays the TM of the specified
TM54 No.
000
■ Changing the monitor value display format
2 Press the " " key with the list of device types displayed.
3 This displays the display format selection screen.

Disp Format
16Bit-BASE2
2-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 74 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
4 Select the display format.

Select the display format using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
2 Disp Form
M
On/Off
ACCESS WINDOW
5 Press the " " key. This displays the monitor value in the selected display
format.
The display format selected here is applied to all devices.
The following table summarizes the display formats that can be selected.
Format Description
Default According to device type (see separate table)*
ON/OFF ON/OFF display
16Bit-BASE10 Data width 16-bits, decimal number display
16Bit-BASE16 Data width 16-bits, Hex number display
16Bit-BASE2 Data width 16-bits, binary number display
32Bit-BASE10 Data width 32-bits, decimal number display
32Bit-BASE16 Data width 32-bits, Hex number display
* "Available formats for each device" page 2-13
[Example]
RLY1 DM0 DM0

OFF 1234 $FF0F
RLY2 DM1 DM1
ON 5678 $01A0
ON/OFF 16Bit-BASE10 16Bit-BASE16
DM0 DM0 DM0

76543210 1234567 $AB03AF05
L __ ■ _ ■ _ ■■ DM2 DM2
H _ ■ _ ■■ ___ 1234567 $4329AF0F
16Bit-BASE2 32Bit-BASE10 32Bit-BASE16
2-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 75 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
Available formats for each device

ON/OFF 16Bit-BASE10 16Bit-BASE16 16Bit-BASE2 32Bit-BASE10 32Bit-BASE16
RLY (default)
CR (default) 2
DM (default)
ACCESS WINDOW
CM (default)
TM (default)
TMR (default)
CTR (default)
CTH/CTC (default)
TRM (default)
The display format that can be selected varies according to device type. When a
display format that cannot be applied to a specific device is selected, the default display
format is selected.
■ Device name/comment display
2 Press the " " key with the list of device types displayed.
3 This displays the display format selection screen.

Disp Format
16Bit-BASE2
2-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 76 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
4 Press the " " key in the display format selection screen.
2
M
Disp Format
Default
ACCESS WINDOW
5 The screen for selecting device names/comment display is displayed.

Select whether to display the device name or comment using the ▲
" " and "▼" keys.
Pressing the "▼" key displays the comment.
M
Device Name
Comment
6 Press the " " key. This selects the comment display, and the display returns
to the Device mode monitor.
The following screen shows comment "SensorA " registered to RLY0, and no
comment registered to RLY1:
Sensor A
OFF
RLY1
OFF
About comments that can be displayed in the access window

• Up to 12 one-byte alphanumeric characters can be displayed. Comments from
the 13th character onwards cannot be displayed.
• Available display characters are ASCII codes 20 to 7f (Hex) and a0 to df (Hex).
If characters other than these are used, the device name is displayed instead of
the comment.
Comments entered here are registered to Comment 1 on KV BUILDER.
"KV BUILDER User's Manual"
• CTH comments cannot be displayed. CTC comments are displayed.
2-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 77 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
■ Changing device values (when device values are ON/OFF display)
1 Hold down the " " key for at least one second with the device to change
displayed.
2
If two devices are currently displayed in one screen, the device whose value can
ACCESS WINDOW
be changed is the device displayed on the top row of the screen. (In this case, the
device on the bottom row is no longer displayed.)
2 The value of the device is displayed flashing.

In this state, press the "▼" and "▲" keys. The display toggles between "ON" and
"OFF".
(At this stage in the procedure, writing of the device value is not executed.)
3 Set the desired device value to write, and hold down the " " key for at least
one second.
Flashing stops and writing of the entered device value is executed. If the " " key
is held down for less than one second, writing is not executed, and the screen
returns to the monitor display.
2-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 78 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
■ Changing device values (when device values are numerical values)

The following example describes how to change the value of DM1000 No. from
"100" to "201".
2
1 Hold down the " " key for at least one second with the device to change
ACCESS WINDOW
displayed.
2 The value of the desired device flashes.

The [change increment] is displayed on the bottommost row of the screen.
3 Press the "▲" key once.

The device value is incremented by the amount set to the change increment, and
the device No. display changes to [101].
4 Press the " " key once.

This changes the "change increment" digit. Each press of the " " key changes the
digit one digit at a time.
To change the 100's digit, press the " " key twice.
2-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 79 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
5 The "change increment" value changes to [100].
ACCESS WINDOW
6 Press the "▲" key once.
The device value is incremented by the amount set to the change increment, and
the device No. display changes to [201].
7 When you have set the new value to write as the device value, hold down the
" " key for at least one second.
Writing of the new device value is executed, and the screen returns to the monitor
display.
To cancel writing midway, hold down the " " key for less than one second.
This returns to the monitor display without executing writing of the device value.
■ Changing device values (T, C, CTH/CTC, TRM)

The setting value and current value can both be changed in the case of T, C, CTH/
CTC, and TRM devices.
• How to change setting values

To change device values, hold down the " " key for at least one second. Items
change as follows:
T: Timer setting value
C: Counter setting value
CTH/CTC: CTC (high-speed counter comparator)
TRM: Trimmer
• How to change current values

Items change as follows by holding down the " " key for at least one second with
the " " key pressed.
T: Timer current value
C: Counter current value
CTH/CTC: CTC (high-speed counter comparator)
TRM: Trimmer upper limit value (The trimmer upper limit value is assigned
to CM.)
"Digital Trimmer Mode" page 2-19
2-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 80 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-3 Device Mode
■ T, C, CTH/CTC, TRM monitor display examples
Timer current value Counter current value

2 Timer setting value Counter setting value
ACCESS WINDOW
CTH value
Trimmer value
(high-speed counter)
Trimmer upper limit value
CTC value
(high-speed counter The upper limit value is
comparator) not displayed if it is not
set.
"MEMSW Instruction"
The display is as shown on the left when the device is

used on a ladder program (but not registered).
2-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 81 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-4 Digital Trimmer Mode

Trimmer values can be changed more easily than in the Device mode.
Trimmer values are loaded by the TMIN instruction.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
The following table summarizes key operations when changing the trimmer values.
Setting/operation Key Function
M Menu display
Changes the number of the trimmer to display.
Each press increments the device number.
▲ Increments the trimmer value.
▼ Decrements the trimmer value.
Change the increment/decrement amount. Each press incre-
ments the digit. (When the 10th digit is exceeded, the 1st digit is
returned to.
Changing trimmer values involves changing values in the Device mode. So, in the
Digital Trimmer mode, changes to values are reflected directly as they are without
pressing the " " key.
Changing Digital Trimmers

menu tree."
"Access Window Menu Tree" page 2-4

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Press the "▼" key once.

[2. Trimmer] is selected. Press the " " key.
M
TRM0 Direct
1
L 10000
1
The value of the 3rd row indicates the trimmer upper limit value. When the
upper limit value setting is not used, nothing is displayed on this row. For
details on use and selection of the upper limit value, refer to "MEMSW
Instruction" on page 3-8 of the Instruction Reference Manual.
2-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 82 2012/03/15 17:25:27

3 The trimmer No. to be displayed can be changed by the " " key.
Select the desired trimmer No. to change.
2 TRM0 Direct M
1
ACCESS WINDOW
L 0
10
4 Change the increment amount by the " " key.
M
TRM0 Direct
11
L 0
10
5 Pressing the "▲" key increases the trimmer value by the increment amount,
and pressing the "▼" key decreases the trimmer value by the decrement
amount.
The Digital Trimmer mode differs from the Device mode in that changes to values
are reflected directly as they area without pressing the " " key.
[Tip]
• The upper limit value can be set on the ladder or access window Device mode.
• The upper limit value is stored to CM.
• The current trimmer value is loaded by the TMIN instruction.
• To enable the upper limit value, use the MEMSW instruction.
• Even if use of the upper limit value has been set by the MEMSW instruction,
the upper limit value becomes 4294967295 when "0" is entered for the upper
limit setting value.
Trimmer No. Device

TRM0 upper limit value CM1700, 1701
2-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 83 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-5 Displaying and Setting the Date/Time

The time can be displayed and set.
2
About the Date/Time Display
ACCESS WINDOW
The time display conforms to the 24-hour clock.
The day of the week is displayed as follows:
Sun : Sunday Thu : Thursday 2000/09/18

Mon : Monday Fri : Friday 15:58:44
Mon
Tue : Tuesday Sat : Saturday
Wed : Wednesday

The following table summarizes key operations when setting the date/time.
Operation Key Description

M Menu display
Switches setting items.
Toggles between adjustment ON/OFF of setting items.
▲ Increments setting items when setting the date/time.
▼ Decrements setting items when setting the date/time.
Holding this down for at least one second in the date display sets
the date/time.
Holding this down for at least one second when setting the date/
time applies the setting.
Holding this down for at least one second and then releasing the
key when adjusting the date/time applies the newly adjusted time.
Method of Operation
menu tree."
■ Date/time setting

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 84 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2 Press the "▼" key twice and then the " " key.
[3. Date] is displayed.
2 1.DeviceMode M
2.Trrimer
ACCESS WINDOW
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
3 Hold down the " " for at least one second.

The date/time display screen is displayed, and the "Year" item flashes.
M
2000/09/18
15:58:44
Mon
4 Select the desired item to set by pressing the " " key.
Each press of the " " key switches the item as follows:
"Year" → "Month" → "Day" → "Hours" → "Minutes" → "Seconds" → "Day of week"
→ "Year" and so forth
M
2000/09/18
15:58:50
Mon
5 Set the item using the "▲" and "▼" keys.

M
2000/09/18
15:58:44
Mon
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5. When you have finished setting the date/time, hold
down the " " for at least one second.
[Exec] is displayed at the right of the bottommost row of the display to prompt setting
of the date/time.
(At this stage in the procedure, setting of the date/time has not been executed.)
Release the " " key. This executes setting of the date/time, and returns the screen
to the date/time display.
M
2000/09/18
15:58:44
Mon
Exec
If you release the " " key before [Exec] is displayed, the date/time setting is not
executed, and the screen returns to the date/time display.
2-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 85 2012/03/15 17:25:27

■ Time adjustment
Time adjustment is a function for setting the second value for "0" seconds.
The second setting changes to "0" when time adjustment is executed. 2

Current Second Value Operation
ACCESS WINDOW
0 to 29 Second value only is set to "0".
30 to 59 Minute value is incremented, and second value only is set to "0".
1 Press the " " key in the date/time display state.
M
2000/09/18
15:59:44
Mon
2 [Adjust] is displayed on the bottommost row to indicate that the time can be
adjusted.
(To cancel time adjustment, press the " " key again. The [Adjust] display disap-
pears, and the screen returns to the date/time display.)
M
2000/09/18
15:59:44
Mon
Adjust
3 Hold down the " " for at least one second.
4 [Exec] is displayed at the right of the bottommost row of the display.

(At this stage in the procedure, time adjustment has not been executed.)
Release the " " key. This executes the time adjustment.
M
2000/09/18
16:00:00
Mon
Adjust Exec
If you release the " " key before [Exec] is displayed, the time adjustment is not
executed, and the screen returns to the date/time display.
2-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 86 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-6 Memory Card Operations
2-6 Memory Card Operations

Saving of data to Memory Card and loading of data from Memory Card can be
performed on the access window. For details on operation, see "Chapter 3
2 MEMORY CARD" page 3-1.
ACCESS WINDOW
About Memory Card Operation

The following shows the operations that the user can perform on the Memory Card.
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
Item Description
Load Loads the file in the specified directory (project folder) to the CPU Unit.
Save Saves the CPU data to Memory Card. Programs, DM, CM, RCY, CR,
device comments, and unit setup information are saved.
File List Displays a list of directories and files in Memory Card. Files in the list
can also be deleted.
Free Space Displays free space on the Memory Card.
Accessing of the Memory Card is possible only in the Program mode. Before you use
the Memory Card, switch to the Program mode.
Only files in the directories one level down in the root directory can be accessed.
In the following example file configuration, files under directory B cannot be viewed by
"File List."
<File Configuration Example>

Root Directory A Directory B
File C File E
File D File F
■ About file names

Directory names (project folder name) are displayed on the access window as
"KVSAVE00<D>" with three characters entered at "<D>".
Periods "." are not allowed in directory names, and only upper-case characters are
allowed in directory names.
2-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 87 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-7 CPU Monitor
2-7 CPU Monitor

Special functions mounted on the KV-700CPU can be monitored on the access
window when they are in use.
2
The following shows the special functions that can be monitored.
ACCESS WINDOW
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
Item Description
Pos Control Monitors CPU Unit positional functions.
Freq Count Monitors CPU Unit frequencies.
Cam Switch Monitors CPU cam switches.
Positioning Monitor
menu tree." "Access Window Menu Tree" page 2-4
Monitor positioning functions. "Chapter 9 MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING
CONTROL)" page 9-1

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Press the "▼" three times to select [4. CPU Mon], and press the " " key.
The CPU special functions menu is displayed.
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
3 [Pos Control] is displayed flashing. Press the " " key as it is.
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
2-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 88 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-7 CPU Monitor
4 The currently set state of the positioning control function is displayed.

The positioning monitor is provided with five monitor functions.
2 Each of these functions can be selected by using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
The following describes each of these functions.
ACCESS WINDOW
• Monitoring X-axis M codes, current values, current speed

"✽" is displayed during pulse output.
"✽" is displayed here during pulse output.
X
M-Code 0 If an error occurs, the error No. is displayed here.
P +0
V 0
P Current value
V Current speed
• Monitoring X-axis related relays
X CR3000 CR3000
76543210 to
L __ ■ _ ■ _ ■■ CR3000
H _ ■ _ ■■ ___ CR3008 CR3015
CR3015
• Monitoring Y-axis M codes, current values, current speed

"✽" is displayed during pulse output.
Y
M-Code 0 P Current value
P +0
V 0 V Current speed
• Monitoring Y-axis related relays
Y CR3100 CR3100
76543210 to
L __ ■ _ ■ _ ■■ CR3100
H _ ■ _ ■■ ___ CR3108 CR3115
CR3115
• Monitoring X-axis current value, current speed, Y-axis current value, and current
speed
P +123456789 Upper two lines are X-axis: X-axis current value

V 2345 X-axis current speed
P -1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lower two lines are Y-axis: Y-axis current value
V 1234 Y-axis current speed
2-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 89 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-7 CPU Monitor
Frequency Counter
Display the frequency counter. "Frequency Counters" page 7-2 2
ACCESS WINDOW
M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
3 [Pos Control] is displayed flashing. Press the "▼" key once to select [Freq
Count].
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
4 Press the " " key.

The frequency counter monitor screen is displayed.
The display unit is either "Hz" or "rpm" depending on the frequency counter setting.
Example of "Hz" display
M
Freq Counter
+12345
Hz
Example of "rpm" display
M
Freq Counter
+12345
rpm
2-27
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 90 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-7 CPU Monitor
The display is as follows when the frequency counter is not in use.
Freq Counter
2 _____
ACCESS WINDOW
Cam Switches
Monitor cam switches.
"Cam Switch Function" page 8-2

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
3 [Pos Control] is displayed flashing. Press the "▼" key twice to select [Cam
Switch].
M
·Pos Control
·Freq Count
·Cam Switch
2-28
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 91 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-7 CPU Monitor

The cam switch function monitor screen is displayed.
The cam switch monitor is provided with three monitor functions.
Each of these functions can be selected by using the "▲" and "▼" keys. 2
The following describes each of these functions.
ACCESS WINDOW
The following details are monitored.
Current angle
Cam Sw Angle In the case of a multi-stage

comparator output, the current
180.5= angle is not displayed.
Cam switch relay output monitor (lower 16 points)
Cam Sw 3100
76543210
L __ ■ _ ■ _ ■■
H _ ■ _ ■■ ___
Cam switch relay output monitor (upper 16 points)
Cam Sw 3100
76543210
L __ ■ _ ■ _ ■■ 3100
H _ ■ _ ■■ ___
3115
When a cam switch is not used, or the multi-stage comparator mode is used, the
display is as follows if the cam switch output relay No. is incorrectly specified.
Cam Sw
_____
2-29
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 92 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-8 Alarm Monitor
2-8 Alarm Monitor

The state of alarm relays can be monitored in real time and the alarm record checked
on the access window.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
About the Alarm Monitor Function

Messages can be displayed on the access window when an alarm occurs if the
message is set in advance to alarm relays (CR3300 to CR3415). The alarm monitor
function also allows you to check the record of alarms that have occurred.
The following table summarizes the alarm functions in the access window.
Function Description
Monitor Monitors ON alarm relays in real time.
Record Monitors the alarm ON/OFF record.
Clear record Clears the alarm ON/OFF record.
Comments are displayed as alarm messages if contact comments are registered in

advance to alarm relays. This helps the user distinguish the alarm details.
If comments have not been set, the No. (CR No.) of the alarm relay is displayed.
The date and time that alarm relays turn ON are automatically recorded to the alarm
record. To also set the date and time that alarm relays turn OFF, set CR3504 to ON.
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed is twelve.
Single-byte alphanumerics and ASCII codes 20 to 7f (Hex) and 90 to df (Hex) can be
displayed.
If characters other than these are used, the device name is displayed instead of the
comment.
How to Register Alarms

The following table shows devices used for alarms.
Control Relay R/W Description
CR3300 to CR3415 R/W Alarm relay (32)
CR3500 R Relays in which alarms are occurring
CR3501 R/W Alarm ON→OFF state change relays
Alarm function specifications

This function allows you to display alarm messages on the access window and KV-
D30, and store a record of alarms that have occurred.
The alarm record can be checked on the access window and KV-D30.
Note: Be sure to manipulate alarm relays by the SET and RES instructions. Alarm
relays can be batch cleared by the ARES instruction.
2-30
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 93 2012/03/15 17:25:27

2-8 Alarm Monitor
<Setting of alarm relays> 32 CRs (CR3300 to CR3415)

Be sure to execute the SET instruction to set alarm relays.
If alarm relays are set by other methods, a record is not left behind.
Alarm messages are recorded as contact comment 1 of the alarm relay. 2
ACCESS WINDOW
<Resetting of alarm relays> 32 CRs (CR3300 to CR3415)
Be sure to execute the RES instruction to reset alarm relays.
When CR3501 is ON, a record of when alarm relays turn OFF is already recorded.
Set CR3501 to ON to leave behind a record of alarm relay OFF times.
<Current alarm relays>

CR3500 turns ON even if one alarm is occurring.
CR3500 automatically turns OFF when all ON alarm relays are turned OFF.
<ON→ →OFF record relay> (CR3501)

Up to 64 alarms are stored to the alarm record internally on the CPU.
When the number of alarms in this record exceeds 64, alarms are deleted in order from
the oldest record so that the latest occurring alarm can be recorded.
Each alarm stores the alarm relay No., date/time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/
seconds) of occurrence, and ON/OFF state.
When the ON→OFF record relay (CR3501) is set to OFF, only a record of when the
OFF state of the alarm relay changes to ON is recorded.
When the ON→OFF record relay (CR3501) is set to ON, the record of when the ON
state of the alarm relay changes to OFF is also recorded.
Use the ARES instruction to batch reset alarm relays, reset alarm actuation relays, and
batch clear records.
Examples of Alarm Monitor Display

menu tree."
The access window displays changes as follows when an alarm occurs.

• Example of contact comment settings
Alarm Relay Contact Comments
CR3300 Press. Alarm
CR3301 Temp. Alarm
CR3302 No mtrl. A
CR3303 No mtrl. B
CR3304 No mtrl. C
CR3305 No mtrl. D
CR3306 No mtrl. E
CR3307 Hopper jam
2-31
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 94 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-8 Alarm Monitor
■ Alarm monitor (real time display)
Monitor mode of currently occurring alarm
2 Press. Alarm
The smallest relay No. of the two currently
occurring alarms is displayed.
Currently occurring alarms (contact
ACCESS WINDOW
comment of alarm relay)
Pressing the "▲" and "▼" keys on the access window switches the alarm display.
Monitor mode of currently occurring alarm

The second smallest relay No. of the two
Temp. Alarm currently occurring alarms is displayed.
Currently occurring alarms (contact
comment of alarm relay)
■ Alarm monitor (record display)
This indicates that the 1st alarm in the

record (31 alarms) on the record display is
Press. Alarm displayed.
Details of alarm
Date
↑ indicates the time
(hours/minutes/seconds) that the alarm
occurred.
Pressing the "▲" and "▼" keys on the access window switches the alarm display.
This indicates that the 2nd alarm in the

record (31 alarms) on the record display is
Press. Alarm displayed.
Details of alarm
Date
↓ indicates the time
(hours/minutes/seconds) that the alarm
was canceled.
The entire record and all alarm relays can be reset by the ARES instruction or
access window operations.
2-32
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 95 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-8 Alarm Monitor
How to Monitor Alarms

menu tree."
"Access Window Menu Tree" page 2-4 2
ACCESS WINDOW
The following describes the procedure for monitoring alarms in the access window.

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [5. Alarm] using the "▲" and "▼" keys.

M
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
5.Alarm
3 Press the "" " key.

The alarm menu is displayed.
M
·Monitor
·Record
·Clr Record
4 Press the "▲" and "▼" keys to select [Monitor], and press the "" " key.
The alarm relay monitor is displayed.
In the following screen example, the CR3302 is ON, two of the other alarm relays
are ON while the other is OFF.
(1)
M
Alarm Mon
01/03
CR3302
(2)
2-33
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 96 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-8 Alarm Monitor
(1) [01/03]
[01] indicates that the No. of the alarm relay having the highest priority among
currently ON alarm relays.
2 [03] is the total number of currently ON alarm relays.
ACCESS WINDOW
(2) [CR3302]
This indicates the currently displayed alarm relay. If a comment is registered to the
alarm relay, the comment is displayed instead of the device name. Only single-byte
alphanumerics can be displayed in comments.
(Same as the comment display in the Device mode)
Alarm Mon
03/03
Work Error
Pressing the "▼" displays the next alarm relay in order of priority.
When the display changes to the highest priority alarm relay No., the screen flashes,
and the highest priority alarm relay No.
(Note, however, that the screen does not change even if the display changes to the
highest priority alarm relay No. in the alarm relay record display or clear alarm relay
record display.)
In the above screen example, CR3301 is displayed and the entire screen flashes when
CR3301 turns ON.
M
Alarm Mon
01/04
CR3301
To stop flashing, press any one of the " ", "▲", "▼" or " " keys.
Pressing the "M" key returns the screen to the alarm menu display.
When the currently displayed alarm relay turns OFF, the relay having the next highest
priority is displayed.
• When alarm relay is OFF

The display changes as follows when all alarm relays are OFF.
Alarm Mon
No Alarm
2-34
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 97 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-8 Alarm Monitor
Displaying the Alarm Relay Record

Display the alarm relay ON/OFF record.
1 Press the "▲" and "▼" keys with the alarm menu displayed to select [Record]. 2
ACCESS WINDOW
M
·Monitor
·Record
·Clr Record

The alarm relay ON/OFF record is displayed.
In this screen example, CR3302, CR3303 and CR3400 turns ON in order, and then
CR3400 turned OFF.
M
Record 01/04 (1)
(2) CR3400
(4) 2000/07/11
15 : 49 : 39 (3)
(1) [01/04]
[01] indicates the newest item in the currently displayed record.
[04] indicates the total number of items in the records.
(2) [CR3400]
This is the device currently targeted for recording. If a comment is registered to the
device, the comment is displayed instead of the device name. Only single-byte
alphanumerics can be displayed in comments.
(Same as the comment display in the Device mode)
(3) "↓
↓" indicates that the record is for a device whose alarm relay state changed
from ON to OFF. Records for a device whose alarm relay state changed from
OFF to ON are indicated by "↑ ↑".
(4) [2000/07/11 15:49:39]

This indicates the date/time that the record was recorded.
Each press of the "▼" displays the next latest record.

In this screen example, a comment "Power On" is registered to CR3300.
M
Record 02/04
Power On
2000/07/11
15 : 49 : 22
2-35
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 98 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-8 Alarm Monitor
To return to the alarm menu press the "M" key.
• When there are no records

2 The display is as follows when there are no alarm records.
ACCESS WINDOW
Record
No Record
Clearing Alarm Relay Records

1 Press the "▲" and "▼" keys with the alarm menu displayed to select [Clr
Record].
M
·Monitor
·Record
·Clr Record

The clear record confirmation message is displayed.
M
Clr Record
Clr OK?
3 To execute clearing of the record, hold down the " " key again for at least one
second.
If you press the "M" key, clearing of the record is canceled, and the screen returns
to the alarm menu display.
4 The display changes as follows when clearing of the record is completed.

Clr Record
Clr Done
If you press the "M" key, the screen returns to the alarm menu display.
2-36
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 99 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-9 Access Window Setup

By setting up the access window, you set up the access window screen display.
2
Setup Functions Available in Access Window Setup
ACCESS WINDOW
The following two functions are available in access window setup.
Contrast Adjusts LCD contrast.
Language Sets the display language. Either Japanese and English can be selected.
Contrast
menu tree."
This function is for adjusting the LCD contrast.

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [7. AW Setting] using the "▲" and "▼" keys, and press the " " key.
The AW setup menu is displayed.
M
·Contrast
·Language
3 Select [Contrast] using the "▲" and "▼" keys, and press the " " key.
M
Contrast
6
2-37
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 100 2012/03/15 17:25:28

4 Increment or decrement the contrast using the "▲" and "▼" keys to adjust the
LCD to an easy-to-view contrast.
You can set the contrast within the range 3 to 9.
2
M
ACCESS WINDOW
Contrast
5
Display Language
Select either English or Japanese as the display language.

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [7. AW Setting] using the "▲" and "▼" keys, and press the " " key.
The AW setup menu is displayed.
M
·Contrast
·Language
3 Select [Language] using the "▲" and "▼" keys, and hold down the " " key for
at least one second.
M
Language
English
2-38
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 101 2012/03/15 17:25:28

4 Switch between English and Japanese using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
2
M
Language
English
ACCESS WINDOW
5 Hold down the " " key fro at least one second.
This sets the display language.
2-39
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 102 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-10 Clearing SRAM
2-10 Clearing SRAM

Clearing SRAM is used for clearing currently stored device values and the alarm
record.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
Clearing SRAM
This function allows you to batch clear currently stored device values and the alarm
record. It also restores details set by access window setup to their defaults.
SRAM clear can be executed in only the Program mode.
Executing this function initializes CM, DM, R, and CR. It does not initialize ladder
programs,. unit setup information, comments, T, C, setting values, and CTC.

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [8. S-RAM Clr] using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
The clear SRAM confirmation message is displayed.
M
S-RAM Clr
Clr OK?
+
3 Press down the " " key for at least one second with the " " key held down.
The confirmation message is displayed again.
M
S-RAM Clr
Clr OK?
Clr OK?
2-40
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 103 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-10 Clearing SRAM
4 Holding down the " " key for at least one second with the second confirma-
tion message displayed executes SRAM clear.
The screen changes as follows while SRAM clear is being executed.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
Wait...
When execution of SRAM clear ends after the above message is displayed, access
window is automatically rebooted. If the [NEW VISUAL PLC KV-700] message is
displayed, this indicates that SRAM clear is completed.
Note: If the " " key is not held down for at least one second, the [NEW VISUAL PLC
KV-700] message is not displayed, and SRAM clear is canceled.
2-41
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 104 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-11 All Clear
2-11 All Clear

All clear returns all settings on the CPU unit to their defaults.
2
All Clear
ACCESS WINDOW
All clear returns all settings to their defaults. (This means that the ladder program and
device values are cleared.)
All clear can be executed in only the Program mode.

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trimmer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
2 Select [9. All Clr] using the "▲" and "▼" keys.
The all clear confirmation message is displayed.
M
All Clr
Clr OK?
+
3 Press down the " " key for at least one second with the " " key held down.
The confirmation message is displayed again.
M
All Clr
Clr OK?
Clr OK?
If you press the "M" key or " " key, all clear is canceled, and the screen returns to
the menu display.
2-42
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 105 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-11 All Clear
4 Holding down the " " key for at least one second with the second confirma-
tion message displayed executes all clear.
The screen changes as follows while all clear is being executed.
When execution of all clear ends, access window is automatically reset and
2
rebooted.
ACCESS WINDOW
Wait...
Note: If the " " key is not held down for at least one second, the [NEW VISUAL PLC
KV-700] message is not displayed, and all clear is canceled.
5 Finally, the system initialized message is displayed.
2-43
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 106 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-12 User Messages
2-12 User Messages

This section describes user messages.
2
About the User Message Display
ACCESS WINDOW
"User message" is a function for displaying any numerical value or ASCII code string
on the access window from the ladder program.
User messages come in two types, user message 1 an, user message 2. User
message 1 indicates values currently stored to CM1720, and user message 2 indicates
up to 24 single-byte ASCII codes or the characters preceding ASCII code "00" stored
starting from CM1721.
To select user message 1, set CR2900 to ON, and to set user message 2, set CR2901
to ON.
When both CR2900 and CR2900 are set to ON, the CR2900 setting is given priority
over CR2901.
(The user message stored to CR2900 is displayed.)
■ User message 1
When CR2900 is set to ON, the values currently in CM1720 are displayed on
screen.
In the screen example, the value for CM1720 is set to "12345", and the entire screen
flashes.
UsrMessage1:
12345
The original display is returned to in the following instances:

• When any of the access window keys is pressed (In this case, CR2900 is turned
OFF.)
• When CR2900 is turned OFF
■ User message 2
When CR2901 is set to ON, up to 24 single-byte ASCII codes or the characters
preceding ASCII code "00" stored starting from CM1721 are displayed.
UsrMessage2:
Emergency
Stop!!
2-44
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 107 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-12 User Messages
CM No. CM Value (Hex) ASCII Annotation

CM1721 $456d Em
CM1722 $6572 er
CM1723 $6765 ge 2
CM1724 $6e63 nc
ACCESS WINDOW
CM1725 $7920 y_(blank)
CM1726 $2020 _ _ (blank) (blank)
CM1727 $2020 _ _ (blank) (blank)
CM1728 $2020 _ _ (blank) (blank)
CM1729 $5374 St
CM1730 $6f70 op
CM1731 $2021 _!
CM1732 $2100 ! (00)
The entire screen flashes when user message 2 is displayed.

The original display is returned to in the following instances:
• When any of the access window keys is pressed (In this case, CR2901 is turned
OFF.)
• When CR2901 is turned OFF
2-45
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 108 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-13 Setting Inhibited Operation

Operations on the access window can be inhibited. This item describes how to set
inhibited operation.
2
ACCESS WINDOW
Modes in Which Operation Can be Inhibited

Operation can be inhibited in the following modes:
• Setting of expansion unit

• Device mode
• Trimmer
• Alarm
• Memory Card
• AW Setting
• All Clr
Setting of inhibited operation is assigned to single bits in each bit on CM1738. Set the
following numerical values.
Bit Description
Bit 15 to Bit 7 Reserved for system
Bit 6 All clear, SRAM clear inhibit
Bit 5 AW settings, changes to setting inhibit
Bit 4 Memory Card, file load/save/delete inhibit
Bit 3 Alarm record clear inhibit
Bit 2 Trimmer, device writing inhibit
Bit 1 Device mode, device writing inhibit
Bit 0 Expansion Unit, setting change inhibit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved for system

Expansion Unit, setting change inhibit
Device mode, device writing inhibit
Trimmer, device writing inhibit
Alarm record clear inhibit
Memory Card, file load/save/delete inhibit
AW settings, changes to setting inhibit
All clear, SRAM clear inhibit
The display is as follows when an attempt is made to perform an inhibited operation.
AW Message:
Key Input
Disabled
2-46
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 109 2012/03/15 17:25:28

[Example]
● When writing in the Digital Trimmer mode is inhibited
$0004
DW
CM1738
2
ACCESS WINDOW
● When reading/writing to Memory Card is inhibited
$0010
DW
CM1738
● When writing in the Device mode is inhibited
$0002
DW
CM1738
● When changing of access window settings is inhibited
$0020
DW
CM1738
2-47
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 110 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2-14 Key Lock
2-14 Key Lock

The key lock function inhibits movement to other screens from the currently displayed
screen by operating keys.
2 Though monitoring is possible, values cannot be written.
ACCESS WINDOW
How to Set Key Lock
1 Press down the "M" key down for at least three seconds with " " key held
down.
The following screen is displayed to indicate that the key lock function is applied.
AW Message
Key Lock
This screen is displayed even if an operation other than that intended to cancel key
lock is performed while the key lock function is applied.
2 To cancel the key lock, press down the "M" key down for at least three
seconds with " " key held down.
The following screen is displayed to indicate that the key lock is canceled.
AW Message
Key UnLock
Note: • Direct access switches are not selected even if pressed while the key lock
function is applied.
• The key lock function cannot be applied while the unit is monitoring.
2-48
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 111 2012/03/15 17:25:28

3
MEMORY CARD
MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes how to exchange ladder programs with the
PLC and exchange data with various units using the Memory Card.
3-1 About the Memory Card .....................................................3-2
3-2 Transferring Programs ..................................................... 3-15
3-3 DM Transfer ....................................................................... 3-16
3-4 Logging Function .............................................................3-17
3-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 112 2012/03/15 17:25:28


On the KV-700 Series, you can exchange ladder programs and various unit information
with the PLCs using Memory Cards.
3 Memory Card Functions

■ About Memory Card functions
MEMORY CARD
Memory Cards allow you to transfer ladder programs, and save and read device
values by operation on the KV-700's access window without the need for KV
BUILDER.
• Transferring data from Memory Card to CPU

Data can be transferred by selecting the sub-directory (project folder) of the
Memory Card in the access window.
Data includes the following: program data such as ladder, comments, unit setup
information, and device file data such as DM, CM, RLY, and CR.
• Saving data to Memory Card from CPU

Device files (DM, CM, R, CR) in all areas of program files (ladders, comments, unit
setup information) can be saved to the Memory Card from the CPU. Saved files
are stored in a newly created sub-directory (project folder). The sub-directory
name is automatically assigned, and is displayed on the access window when
operation ends successfully.
• Automatic Memory Card transfer at power ON

When the power is turned ON, files stored to the directory (project folder)
"AUTOLOAD" are automatically transferred to the CPU. Data for "AUTOLOAD"
is made in KV BUILDER. Note, however, that execution of transfer will end in error
if the program on the KV-700 body is write-protected by the MEMSW instruction.
• Logging function
Devices to be logged are registered on the ladder, and the data of these devices
is stored to Memory Card at a trigger pre-determined by the user. "3-4 Logging
Function" page 3-17.
■ Usable Memory Cards

The exclusive OP-42137 16 Mbyte MMC (multimedia card) can be used.
(Operation using Memory Cards other than the exclusive recommended card is not
guaranteed.)
Note: • Never remove Memory Cards while the Memory Card access LED is
blinking.
• In environments subject to severe noise, it may take time to access the
Memory Card. (In the worst case, this might damage the card or FAT.) In
such cases, attach a ferrite core onto the power cable before use. Also,
install the KV-700 away from equipment that emits strong electromagnetic
fields.
While the Memory Card accessing LED is lit (reading and writing of data to the Memory
CAUTION Card), never remove the Memory Card or turn the KV-700 OFF. Doing so might corrupt
the data inside the Memory Card.
3-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 113 2012/03/15 17:25:28

■ How to save and read program data

Save and read program data to and from the Memory Card by operation on the
access window as follows.
Make sure that the Memory Card is

inserted in the Memory Card slot on
the KV-700. 3
Data is automatically read to the
24
MEMORY CARD
V
5V
KV
-70
Memory Card when the power is 0
0A
B
turned ON if the project name is set to

1 0
2 1
3 2
HY 4 3
PE 5 4
"AUTOLOAD."
RA 6 5
CC
ES 7 6
SW 8 7
IN 9 8
DO
M W 10
11
9
10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
15
CA
RD
SD
RD
US
B
To Use the Memory Card

A Memory Card and an adapter and card reader for reading the Memory Card are
required. Be sure to use the OP-42137 Memory Card specified by Keyence. Operation
by Memory Cards not specified by Keyence is not assured.
Type Mutlimedia card

Storage element Flash ROM
Memory capacity 16 Mbytes
Max. number of rewrites 300,000 operation
Operating temperature -25 to +85°C
Storage temperature -40 to +85°C
■ System requirements
* In the case of a PC (laptop PC) that has a PCMCIA socket
■ When the device is equipped with a PCMCIA slot (laptop PC, etc.)
Connect the Memory Card to the card adapter, and insert the card adapter into the
PCMCIA slot on the PC.
INSERT
Memory Card
OP-42137
PC with PCMCIA slot PC Card Adapter (MMC)
3-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 114 2012/03/15 17:25:28

* In the case of a PC (desktop PC) that does not have a PCMCIA socket
■ When the device is not equipped with a PCMCIA slot (desktop PC, etc.)
Connect the card reader-writer to the PC. Next, connect the Memory Card to the
card adapter, and insert the card adapter into the card reader-writer.
3 INSERT
MEMORY CARD
PC w/out PCMCIA slot Card Reader/Writer PC Card Adapter (MMC) Memory Card
OP-42137
■ Data management on Memory Cards

Data on the Memory Card is managed in project folder units. When storing new
ladder files, be sure to make folder using "New".
If you select an existing project folder and save the data to that folder, the data in
that folder will be overwritten.
For details, refer to the "KV BUILDER User's Manual."
* Example of folder structure in Memory Card

Memory card drive (Z)
\ABCD1 (Project folder)
ABCD.ZDC
ABCD.ZCT
ABCD.ZLB
Ladder data is stored in folder "project folder (\ABCD1)".
Note: The folder structure in the Memory Card goes down only one layer.
Other project folders cannot be made within project folders.
The file names and folder names that can be handled on the access window and
Memory Cards are restricted as follows.
Length 8 characters + 3-character extension
Characters usable in file 1-byte characters (Kanji and other 2-byte characters are
names not allowed.)
The data format of the data stored on Memory Cards differs from that of data saved by
regular save operations. When saving data to Memory Cards, be sure select [Save to
Memory Card] on KV BUILDER.
3-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 115 2012/03/15 17:25:28

■ About files stored on Memory Cards from KV BUILDER

The data format of files stored on Memory Cards from KV BUILDER differs from that
of all regularly saved data on hard disk from KV BUILDER.
Function File type File Name

KV BUILDER Ladder program .ZCD*1
Contact comment
Unit setup information
.ZCT*1
.ZLB*1
3
Device file DM DM.ZDV
MEMORY CARD
CM CM.ZDV
RLY R.ZDV
CR CR.ZDV
CPU positioning function CPUMB.ZSH
Parameter file
*1 " " is the same as the project folder name.
Names and Functions of Setting Operation Keys

Operation Key Function
M Displays menu.
Switches the setting item.
▲▼ Selects an item.
RET Holding down for at least one second selects and determines an item.
Pressing for less than one second cancels an item, and returns to
the previous menu.
Operation Method
To check the menu configuration on the access window, see "Access window menu
tree."
■ Loading data (can be executed only in the program mode)

Before you execute a load, insert the Memory Card into the CPU.
(Loading be executed only in the program mode.)

M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trrimer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
3-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 116 2012/03/15 17:25:28

2 Press the "▼" key five times to select [Memory Card].

The letters [MemoryCard] blink on screen.
M
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
3 5.Alarm
6.MemoryCard
MEMORY CARD

The Memory Card menu is displayed.
M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
4 Press the " " key with [Load] blinking.

The directory (project folder) under the Memory Card root directory is displayed.
(Files are not displayed.)
M
KVSAVE00 <D>
KVSAVE01 <D>
AUTO <D>
[Tip]
You can check for a file time stamp by the " " key.
"Checking the time stamp" page 3-11
5 Select the directory (project folder) to load by the "▲" and "▼" keys.
Press the " " key.
After you select the directory (project folder), the load confirmation message is
displayed.
M
Load
Load OK?
KVSAVE00 < D >
3-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 117 2012/03/15 17:25:28

6 To execute the load, hold down the " " key for at least one second.
The display is as follows during execution of the load.
To cancel the load, hold down the "M" or " " key for at least one second.
Load
M
3
KVSAVE00.ZCT
MEMORY CARD
62%
7 The display is as follows when execution of the load ends.

Pressing the "M" key returns the display to the Memory Card menu.
M
Load
Load Done
If the Memory Card is protected, the display is as follows:

To forcibly execute the load, hold down the " " key for at least one second.
To cancel the load, press the "M" or " " key for less than one second.
Load
Protected
Load OK?
KVSAVE01 < D >
■ Checking the time stamp

You can also check the time stamp and size of the file.
To display the file time stamp and size, select the file or directory by the "▲" "▼"
keys, and press the " " key.
M
DM .ZDV
2000/08/28
11:25:00
125KByte
The directory size is displayed as [0KByte].
3-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 118 2012/03/15 17:25:28

■ Saving data to Memory Card

Before you execute a save, insert the Memory Card into the CPU.
(Saving can be executed only in the program mode.)

3 The menu is displayed.
MEMORY CARD
M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trrimer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon

M
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
5.Alarm
6.MemoryCard

M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
4 [Load] is displayed blinking. Press the "▼" key once to select [Save].
M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space

A message for checking whether it is OK or not to save the CPU data is displayed.
M
Save
Save OK?
3-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 119 2012/03/15 17:25:28

6 To execute the save, hold down the " " key for at least one second.
The following screen is displayed during execution of the save.
This indicates the progress of the save operation on the file currently being saved.
3
M
Save
DM .ZDV
MEMORY CARD
80%
To cancel the save, hold down the "M" or " " key for at least one second.
This cancels the save, and returns the display to the Memory Card menu.
7 When the save ends, the directory (project folder) in which the data is saved
is displayed.
M
Save
Save Done
Dir Name..
KVSAVE00
■ Files that are saved by operation in the access window

When data is saved on the KV-700's access window, the following data is created.
The directory named "KVSAVE??" (??: 2-digit, 1-byte number) is searched for, a
directory having the lowest unused 2-digit number is created, and all of the following
files are stored to this directory.
File Content File Format
Program KVSVAE**.ZCD (** is same number as directory.)
Contact comment KVSVAE**.ZCT
Unit setup information KVSVAE**.ZLB
Device File Format

DM DM.ZDV
CM CM.ZDV
RLY R.ZDV
CR CR.ZDV
Files for MOTION BUILDER are not generated. These files are saved together with
other CMs as CM device values.
Data for PROTOCOL BUILDER is saved to file together with other DMs as DM
device values.
3-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 120 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ File list
Before you execute file list, insert the Memory Card into the CPU.

3
M
MEMORY CARD
1.DeviceMode
2.Trrimer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon

M
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
5.Alarm
6.MemoryCard

M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
4 [Load] is displayed blinking. Press the "▼" key twice to select [File List].
M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
3-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 121 2012/03/15 17:25:29


The directory (project folder) in the Memory Card's root directory and a list of files
is displayed.
If this information does not fit in a single page, press the▼"
" key four times to display
the next information.
3
M
MEMORY CARD
Files in the directory (project folder) are displayed by selecting the directory (project
folder) by "▲" and "▼", and pressing the " " key.
■ Checking the time stamp

You can also check the time stamp and size of the file.
To display the file time stamp and size, select the file or directory by the "▲" "▼"
keys, and press the " " key.
M
DM .ZDV
2000/08/28
11:25:00
125KByte
3-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 122 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ Deleting files
Delete the directory (project folder) or files selected at [File List]. (Delete can be
executed only in the program mode.)
1 Select the file or directory (project folder) to delete at [File List].

3
2 Press the " " key for at least one second with the " " key held down.
MEMORY CARD
The message for confirming whether it is OK to execute the delete is displayed.
<File>
Delete
Delete OK?
KVSAVE00.ZCD
[Tip] <Directory>
Delete OK?
Delete Dir +
Contens
KVSAVE00 < D >
3 To execute the delete, hold down the " " key for at least one second.
The "Delete Wait..." message is displayed.
M
Delete
Wait...
4 When the delete ends, the display returns to the File List display.
Note: If you delete a directory, all of the files under that directory also will be
displayed. Be sure to check the content of a directory before you execute a
delete.
3-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 123 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ Free space
You can check free space on the Memory Card. (Checking can be executed only
in the program mode.)

The menu is displayed. 3
MEMORY CARD
M
1.DeviceMode
2.Trrimer
3.Date
4.CPU Mon

The letters [Memory Card] blink on screen.
M
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
5.Alarm
6.MemoryCard

M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
4 [Load] is displayed blinking. Press the "▼" key three times to select [Free
Space].
M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
3-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 124 2012/03/15 17:25:29


The "Free Space Wait..." message is displayed.
M
Free Space
3 Wait...
MEMORY CARD
6 After the KV-700 finishes verifying free space, free space on the Memory Card
is displayed.
M
Free Space
5864Kbyte
■ Memory Card errors

If an error occurs during Memory Card operation, the display changes as follows,
and the entire screen blinks.
Press any key to return to the Memory Card menu.
AW Message:
File Err
KVSAVE00.ZLB
3-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 125 2012/03/15 17:25:29

3-2 Transferring Programs
3-2 Transferring Programs

The Memory Card can be used to save or read program data.
Programs can be transferred on the access window or by KV BUILDER.
Transferring Programs from the Access Window 3

1 Select the Memory Card in the access window.
MEMORY CARD
M
3.Date
4.CPU Mon
5.Alarm
6.MemoryCard
2 Select the name of the project folder containing the ladder to be read.
(To save data, specify the project folder to save the data to.)
M
·Load
·Save
·File List
·Free Space
For details on access window operations, read "Access Window" page 2-2.
3-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 126 2012/03/15 17:25:29

3-3 DM Transfer
3-3 DM Transfer
DM data can be transferred from the Memory Card to the CPU, or vice versa.
DM data can be transferred on the access window or by KV BUILDER.
3 About DM Data Format

Normally, all data in a project folder (sub-directory) is batch-transferred from Memory
MEMORY CARD
Card. However, only DM values can be transferred to the PLC from the Memory Card
by storing only specific data such as DM data or program data in the project folder in
a Memory Card.
To create a Memory Card (project folder (sub-directory)) containing only DM data, use
KV BUILDER's on-line device editing functions.
Also, to copy only DMs from other CPU units, create a project file containing only DM
data either by saving the DM values only to Memory Card after capturing the device
values by KV BUILDER, or by saving the DM data for each program file to Memory Card
directly from the CPU, and deleting unwanted program files from the project folder on
a PC.
Normally, files in the following format are created if a save is executed on the access
window.
Delete unwanted files from these saved files.
"Deleting files" page 3-12
File Content File Format

Intermediate code KVSVAE**.ZCD (** is same number as directory.)
Contact comment KVSVAE**.ZCD
Unit setup information KVSVAE**.ZLB
Device File Format

DM DM.ZDV
CM CM.ZDV
RLY R.ZDV
CR CR.ZDV
3-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 127 2012/03/15 17:25:29

3-4 Logging Function

The KV-700 CPU Unit's logging function enables monitoring and recording of device
states. Records are saved to Memory Card.
About Logging 3
"Logging" refers to monitoring and recording of what kind of states devices are in at a
MEMORY CARD
certain timing or how these states are changing.
The information of devices or triggers to be monitored on the ladder is registered to
control memory or control relay, and saved to Memory Card. This logging data is saved
in CSV format so it can be imported to Excel or other spreadsheet software for analysis.
Data is logged in order starting with data having the oldest time stamped (if time-
stamped) in order through to the newest, and then in order from devices having the
smallest registered control memory No.
Control Relay Content

CR3200 Specify trigger.
CR3201
CR3202 Add time stamp.
CR3203 Execute logging operation.
CR3204 Write present during logging operation and in RUN mode
CR3205 Temporary abort during logging operation (buffer over)
CR3206 Device/trigger registration error
CR3207 Write error
CR3208 Specified size, end of write
CR3209 Run out of memory error
CR3210 Logging in operation relay
Control Memory Content

CM2600 Registration of logging device
CM2663
CM2664 Trigger setting
CM2670
CM2671 Number of registered logging devices
CM2672 Recording size restriction
How to Register Logging Devices

■ Device registration
A single logging device is registered as a double word using two control memories.
Logging devices are registered as follows in pairs of control memories: CM2600/
CM2601, CM2602.CM2603 and so forth through to CM2662/CM2663.
Control memory to which logging devices are registered
Control Memory Logging Device Control Memory Logging Device Control Memory Logging Device Control Memory Logging Device
CM2600 CM2601 Registration 1 CM2616 CM2617 Registration 9 CM2632 CM2633 Registration 17 CM2648 CM2649 Registration 25
3-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 128 2012/03/15 17:25:29

To register logging devices, specify a number obtained by adding an offset No. specific
to the device type to the device No. as a double word.
[Example]
To register (RLY) 200 as a logging device
3 #100200
DW.D
CM2600
MEMORY CARD
(This becomes 100200 as RLY offset 100000 is added to RLY No. 200.)
The tables below summarize the specified offsets specific to device type.
Type Offset No. Example Specified
Numerical Value
RLY 100000 1000 #101000
CR 200000 CR2000 #202000
DM 300000 DM01000 #301000
CM 400000 CM0100 #400100
TM 500000 TM010 #500010
C (current value) 600000 C100 (current value) #600100
C (setting value) 700000 C100 (setting value) #700100
T (current value) 800000 T050 (current value) #800050
T (setting value) 900000 T050 (setting value) #900050
CTH 1000000 CTH0 #1000000
CTC 1100000 CTC1 #1100001
TRM 1200000 TRM3 #1200003
Note: C, T and CTC contacts cannot be set.
Bit devices (RLY and CR) are logged in channel (16 points) units.
When specifying bit devices, be sure to specify the leading No. (lower 2 digits "00") of
the channel.
If device registration spans three or more control memories, a registration error occurs
(CR3206 turns ON), and logging cannot be started.
3-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 129 2012/03/15 17:25:29

• Example of device registration
0001 • Registration of logging device
01000
3
MOV.D
0002
#0000101000 CM2600 Relay 1000
00000
Logging device
registration 1
MEMORY CARD
MOV.D
0003
#0000202000 CM2602 CR200
00000
Logging device
registration 2
MOV.D
0004
#0000301000 CM2604 DM01000
00000
Logging device
registration 3
MOV.D
0005
#0000400100 CM2606 CM0100
00000
Logging device
registration 4
MO V.D
0006
#0000500010 CM2608 TM010
00000
Logging device
registration 5
MOV.D
0007
C100 (current value)
Registration of devices to be logged

00000 #0000600100 CM2610
Logging device
registration 6
MOV.D
0008
#0000700100 CM2612 C100 (setting value)
00000
Logging device
registration 7
MOV.D
0009
#0000800050 CM2614 T050 (current value)
00000
Logging device
registration 8
MOV.D
0010
#0000900050 CM2616 T050 (setting value)
00000
Logging device
registration 9
MOV.D
0011
#0001000000 CM2618 CTH0
00000
Logging device
registration 10
MOV.D
0012
#0001100001 CM2620 CTC0
00000
Logging device
registration 11
MOV.D
0013
#0001200003 CM2622 TRM3
00000
Logging device
registration 12
0014
00000
0015
MOV
0016
00000 #00012 CM2671 Number of logging
devices 12
Number of
logging devices
0017
3-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 130 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ Setting addition of a logging stamp

If CR3202 is set in advance, a time stamp is also recorded at the same time as
device logging.
The time data (year, month, day, hour, minute, seconds) that logging was
performed is recorded in CSV format to the time stamp.
3 ■ Number of registered devices

The number of devices to be logged is registered to CM2671.
MEMORY CARD
Though 32 devices CM2600 or 2601 to CM2662 or 2663 are allocated as the

logging device registration area, the maximum number of devices that can actually
be logged changes according to the type of registered device.
• 16-bit word devices

Up to 32 devices can be logged only in the case of DM, CM, TM, CR (ch units)
and RLY (ch units) devices.
• 32-bit double word devices

Up to 16 devices can be logged only in the case of C (current value), C (setting
value), T (current value), T (setting value), CTH, CTC and TRM devices.
• Mixture of 16-bit devices and 32-bit devices

Up to a total of 32 devices can be logged with one 32-bit device counted as two
devices.
• Devices with time stamp ON (CR2302 ON)

The time stamp is handled as one 32-bit device, so the maximum number of
logging devices is decreased.
• When the value of CM2671 (number of logging registered devices) exceeds

the maximum number of registerable devices
If this happens, a registration error occurs (CR3206 turns ON), and logging
cannot be started.
■ Specifying the trigger

You can select from the following four ways of specifying the trigger or timing to start
logging:
• Time interval
• Time
• Bit device, level
• Bit device, up edge
Specify the trigger in control relays CR3200 and CR3201.
Specified Content CR3200 CR3201
Time interval OFF OFF
Time ON OFF
Bit device, level OFF ON
Bit device, up edge ON ON
• Specifying a time interval trigger

Set both CR3200 and CR3201 to OFF.
Set the specified time interval in ms units to the double words of CM2664 and
CM2665.
The trigger upper limit is 86400000 msec (24-hour clock).
When the setting is shorter than the scan time, the trigger is performed at each
scan time.
If the setting exceeds the upper limit time interval, a registration error (CR3206
turns ON) occurs, and logging cannot be started.
3-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 131 2012/03/15 17:25:29

• Specifying a time trigger

Set CR3200 to ON and CR3201 to OFF.
Logging is performed only once when the specified time is reached.
The following table shows the devices to be set when specifying a time trigger:
Setting Device Description

CM2664
CM2665
Year (00 to 99)
Month (1 to 12)
3
MEMORY CARD
CM2666 Date (1 to 31)
CM2667 h (0 to 23)
CM2668 m (0 to 59)
CM2669 s (0 to 59)
CM2670 Weeks (0 to 6)*
* 0=Sunday, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Sat-
urday
You can exclude specific devices from the trigger conditions by setting "$FFFF" to
the device.
[Example]
To perform logging once every hour, logging will be performed each time that the
"minutes" (CM2668) device becomes "0" after logging is started if "0" is stored to
CM2668 and "$FFFF" is set to other devices.
• Specifying a bit device, level trigger

Logging is performed continuously for the duration that the specified bit device is ON.
Set CR3200 OFF and CR3201 to ON.
Set the bit device to be used as the trigger by "device No. + offset No." to the double
words of CM2664 and CM2665 in the same way that logging device Nos. are
registered.
Only CR and RLY can be set as bit devices.
When the level is specified, logging data increases as logging is performed at each
scan. For this reason, buffer overflows are more likely to occur (CR3205 turns ON).
"Error information" page 3-22
[Example]
#110005 CM2664
To specify No. 10005, set as follows LDA.D STA.D
• Specifying a bit device, up edge trigger

Logging is performed at up edge when the specified bit device turns ON.
Set both CR3200 and CR3201 to ON.
Set the bit device to be used as the trigger by "device No. + offset No." to the double
words of CM2664 and CM2665 in the same way that logging device Nos. are
registered.
Only CR and RLY can be set as bit devices.
[Example]
#110005 CM2664
To specify No. 10005, set as follows LDA.D STA.D
3-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 132 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ Memory Card storage capacity (recording capacity restrictions)

The maximum size in the Memory Card that is used for recording logging data is set
to CM2672 in Kbyte units (1 to 65535).
Example: If "1000" is set, data up to the trigger data is stored until immediately
before the recording capacity of the logging data is about to exceed 1000 K, and
CR3208 turns OFF to end logging (CR3203 automatically turns OFF). About 5 to
3 10 bytes is consumed for each trigger for each device.
When "0" is stored, logging is performed until there is about 256 Kbytes of free
space remaining on the Memory Card.
MEMORY CARD
• Details of storage capacity

During logging, about 20 bytes is consumed for the time stamp, and about six
bytes are consumed per logging device (16-bit device).
For example, when a time stamp and 30 logging devices (16-bit device) are
logged, "about 20 bytes + about 180 bytes + 2 bytes (line feeds, etc.) = about 202
bytes" is consumed per single logging trigger.
With a 16 MB Memory Card, this means that logging for up to about 80000 triggers
is possible for the above case.
When the number of devices to be logged is halved, this means that the maximum
number of logging triggers (number of lines of data) that can be logged on a single
Memory Card is doubled.
■ Operation method
1 Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.

2 Register the device to be logged and the logging trigger in the ladder
program.
3 Logging is started when CR3203 turns ON.

The settings of control memories and control relays at the moment that CR3203
turns ON are captured and subsequent operations are performed based upon
those settings. So, operation will not be affected even if control memory or control
relay settings are changed when CR3203 is turned ON.
During logging, the Memory Card access LED lights and CR3210 turns ON.
4 Logging ends when CR3203 turns OFF.

Data logged when CR3203 turns OFF is saved to Memory Card, and CR3210 turns
OFF.
Note: Data will not be saved if the power is turned OFF during logging.
■ Error information
The table below summarizes error information during logging:
No. Error
CR3204 Write present during logging operation and in RUN mode
CR3205 Temporary abort during logging operation (buffer over)
CR3206 Device/trigger registration error
CR3207 Write error
CR3208 Specified size, end of write
CR3209 Run out of memory error
3-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 133 2012/03/15 17:25:29

• Detailed descriptions of errors

The following describes errors in detail.
CR3204
This alarm indicates that there was a write in the RUN mode during logging.
Though logging continues, there is the risk that the Memory Card can no longer be
accessed during the write in the RUN mode. So, the CPU internal buffer will fill up.
3
There is the risk that the CPU buffer might overflow, logging is temporarily
MEMORY CARD
discontinued, and accurate logging no longer possible.
CR3205
Logging data is transferred to buffer memory for temporary storage in the CPU, and
written to Memory Card from this buffer memory. When a large volume of data is
logged at high speed, writing to the Memory Card can no longer keep up, and a buffer
overflow occurs.
At this time, the CPU automatically turns CR3205 ON to temporarily discontinue
logging. (CR3203 stays ON.) Note, however, that writing to Memory Card is
performed continuously.
It sometimes takes several hundreds of msec to write to Memory Card depending on
the volume of data, number of files on the Memory Card, and other factors. Pay
attention to the logging interval.
When the user resets CR3205, logging is restarted, and logged data starts to be
stored in the CPU's internal buffer. For this reason, data that has been logged once
in the buffer cannot be overwritten until it is written to Memory Card.
Logging can also be temporarily discontinued by forcibly turning CR3205 by a ladder

program, for example.
CR3206
This control relay turns ON when the registration data in CM2600 to 2671 is in error.
CR3203 turns OFF when this error occurs.
CR3207
This control relay turns ON when writing to the Memory Card is not possible.
A probable cause is a Memory Card error, so check the Memory Card using a disk
scan or other tool.
CR3208
This control relay turns ON when data has been recorded to the capacity determined
by CM2672 when there is little free space left on the Memory Card.
Logging automatically ends (CR3203 turns OFF) when CR3208 turns ON.
Data up to before the overflow occurred is written as logging data.
CR3209
This control relay turns ON when there is little free space on the Memory Card.
Logging is not performed (CR3203 turns OFF) when CR3209 turns ON.
3-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 134 2012/03/15 17:25:29

Sample Program
0001 • Registration of logging device
01000 MOV.D
3 0002 #0000111000 CM2600 Relay 11000 to 11015
Logging device
registration 1
MEMORY CARD
MOV.D
0003 #0000200000 CM2602 CR0000 to 0015
Logging device
registration 2
MOV.D
0004 #0000300015 CM2604 DM00015
Logging device
registration 3
MOV.D
0005 #0000401480 CM2606 CM1480
Logging device
registration4
MOV.D
0006 #0000401481 CM2608 CM1481
Logging device
registration 5
MOV.D
0007 #0000500010 CM2610 TM010
Registration of devices to be logged

Logging device
registration 6
MOV.D
0008 #0000600005 CM2612 C005 (current value)
Logging device
registration 7
MOV.D
0009 #0000700005 CM2614 C005 (setting value)
Logging device
registration 8
MOV.D
0010 #0000800010 CM2616 T010 (current value)
Logging device
registration 9
MOV.D
0011 #0000900010 CM2618 T010 (setting value)
Logging device
registration 10
MOV.D
0012 #0001000000 CM2620 CTH0
Logging device
registration 11
MOV.D
0013 #0001100000 CM2622 CTC0
Logging device
registration 12
MOV.D
0014 #0001200000 CM2624 Digital trimmer 0
Logging device
registration 13
0015 • Registration of number of

logging devices
01000 MOV
0016 #00013 CM2671 Number of logging
devices13
Number of
logging devices
0017 • Selection of trigger content
3-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 135 2012/03/15 17:25:29

01000 CR3200 CR3201

0018 SET RES Trigger method time
Trigger Trigger designation
3
method method
designation designation
01000 MOV
0019 $FFFF CM2664 Year
MEMORY CARD
Not specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0020 $FFFF CM2665 Month
Setting of data load at 00 minutes every hour

Not specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0021 $FFFF CM2666 Day
Not specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0022 $FFFF CM2667 Hr
Not specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0023 #00000 CM2668 Min
00 specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0024 $FFFF CM2669 Sec
Not specified
Trigger
conditions
MOV
0025 $FFFF CM2670 Day of week
Not specified
Trigger
conditions
0026 • Setting of time stamp

addition
01000 CR3202
0027 SET Time stamp ON
Trigger
method
designation
0028 • Setting of Memory
Card stored content
01000 MOV
0029 #00000 CM2672 Upper limit not set
Memory
Card
contents
0030 • Logging start
01000 CR3203
0031 SET Start logging
Start
logging
0032 • Logging stop
01001 CR3203
0033 RES End logging
0034 END
00036
3-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 136 2012/03/15 17:25:29

■ Logging data example
Logging device (1)

Date Time (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
2001/01/07, 23 : 35 : 15, 0000H, 0000H, 00000, 00000, 00000, 00000, 0000000010, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000
2001/01/07, 23 : 36 : 15, 0000H, 0000H, 00000, 00000, 00000, 00000, 0000000010, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000
3 2001/01/07, 23 : 37 : 15, 0100H, 0000H, 00000, 00000, 00000, 00000, 0000000010, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000, 0000000000
Word devices (DM, CM, T, C, TM) are logged in decimal

MEMORY CARD
annotation.
Bit devices (RLY, CR) are logged in Hex annotation.
0100H→ OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
The folder "Logging" is generated in the Memory Card's root directory, and logging
data is saved to the file "Log**.csv" inside that folder.
An unused number starting from 00 is assigned to "**" as the file name.
Up to 100 files from Log00.csv to Log99.csv can be generated.
• Bit devices RLY and CR are logged appended with H (Hex) in channel (16 points)
units.
• 16-bit word devices DM, CM and TM are logged in decimal in 1-word (16 bits)
units.
• 32-bit word devices T, C, CTH and TRM are logged in decimal in 2-word (32 bits)
units.
3-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 137 2012/03/15 17:25:29

4
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the procedures for making programs, basic
knowledge regarding device configuration, relay assignments and
other information, and special functions and extended ladder lan-
guage for setting and checking KV-700 operation. Be sure to read the
descriptions in this chapter before you start making programs.
For a detailed description of instructions, see "Instruction Reference
Manual."
4-1 Before You Start Programming ......................................... 4-2
4-2 User Memory ....................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Device Configuration .......................................................... 4-6
4-4 Extended Ladder ...............................................................4-25
4-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 138 2012/03/15 17:25:29

4-1 Before You Start Programming

This section describes KV-700 operation and information you ought to know in
advance before you start programming.
Flow of Operation from Installation to Actual Operation

The following briefly describes programming procedures, available functions, and
4 setting items.
In the following example, a "self-holding circuit" is programmed as the KV-700
program.
PROGRAMMING
Installation
Study details of operation.

Figure (1) is called the self-hold circuit, and operates as follows:
Fig.(1)
Push-button switch PB1:ON PB1 is a normally open contact switch.
Push-button switch PB2:OFF Pilot lamp (PL) lights. PB2 is a normally closed contact switch.
Even if PB1 turns OFF PB1 PB2
Push-button switch PB1:OFF Pilot lamp (PL) lights.
Push-button switch PB2:OFF The state is held.
Push-button switch PB1:OFF When PB2 turns OFF
Push-button switch PB2:ON Pilot lamp (PL) goes out.
Time chart RL
ON
PB1 contact
OFF
ON
PB2 contact
OFF
ON
PL OFF PL
Next, write the program so that the same operation as this circuit can be controlled by the PLC.
Study the program.

The self-hold circuit is as shown in Figure (1) when expressed by relay symbols.
Study which contacts on the KV these pushbutton switches and pilot lamps are to be connected to. (Table (1))
When there are many I/O devices to be used for control, also study additional units.
Circuit (1) Table (1)
RL I/O Device Element Element (device No.)
PB1 PB2 Push-button switch PB1(contact a) Input relay (0000)
RL Relay (coil)
Push-button switch PB2(contact b) Input relay (0001)
Relay (contact)
RL Relay RL Internal relay (1000)
PL
Relay (contact) Pilot lamp PL Output coil (0500)
Pilot lamp
Write the program.

Edit the program using Ladder Support Software KV BUILDER, the program writing tool.
Ladder diagram Coding list
0000 0001
1000
LD 0000
OR 1000
1000 ANB 0001
OUT 1000
1000
0500
LD 1000
OUT 0500
END
Transfer program to confirm operation.

Transfer the program you have written to the KV-700 and run to check operation of an actual device.
Actual operation
4-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 139 2012/03/15 17:25:29

About Scan Time

■ Scan time
The KV-700 repeatedly executes ladder programs as follows according to the
sequence circuit.
Input processing Read the ON/OFF state of all input terminals to input
memory before program execution.
Program execution
Read the ON/OFF state of each element (internal auxiliary
relays, timers/counters, etc.) and perform arithmetic
4
operations on these states. The operation results are
PROGRAMMING
written to output memory.
Output processing Output the content of output memory to output terminals.
The time required for complete sequential execution of the ladder program is called
the "scan time" (or "cycle time").
The scan time changes according to the length of the user program or the type of
instructions that are in use in the ladder program.
■ About input response delay

On the KV-700, an input response delay caused by the scan time in addition to the
I/O processing time is present. This is because the input state cannot be read
outside of the input processing time. When the state of the input has changed after
input processing, the content of that input can be read at the next scan.
In the figure below, (1) and (2) can be read but (3) cannot.
Input signal (1) (2) (3)

ON
OFF
Read Read
Output processing
Output processing
Output processing
Output processing
Output processing
Input processing
Input processing
Input processing
Input processing
Input processing
Program Program Program Program

execution execution execution execution
Scan time Scan time
[Tip]
The minimum and maximum values for the I/O response time are calculated as
follows:
Maximum value: Input time constant + scan time x 2 + output response delay
Minimum value: Input time constant + scan time + output response delay
Note: • Even if the input time constant is set to a short value, inputs sometimes fails
to be captured due to the HSP instruction or the setting of control relay
CR2305 and control memory CM1620 unless the signal is longer than the
scan time.
• The INT instruction is not reliant on the scan time.
• The minimum scan time is 100 µs (in case of CPU Unit only).
4-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 140 2012/03/15 17:25:29

4-2 User Memory
4-2 User Memory

This section describes the size of programs that can be made on the KV-700.
Program Size
The KV-700 can store programs of about 16,000 steps (about 16,000 instructions) in
standard internal memory. When extended memory (OP-42138) is mounted, about
4 32,000 (about 32,000 instructions) can be stored.

The size of program that can be stored and the number of programmed instructions
varies according to the total number of bytes (program size) of the instructions used,
PROGRAMMING
and the number of bytes (object size) of the objects (internal executable data) compiled
internally on the KV-700.
For details on the number of bytes of each instruction and object sizes, read the
"Instruction Reference Manual."
■ Maximum program size

The KV-700 can write a program of about 16,000 steps (about 32,000 steps when
memory is extended). The size of available memory is calculated as follows:
• Total number of instruction bytes ≤ 80,000 bytes (160,000 bytes when
memory is extended)
(program size)
• Total number of instruction objects ≤190,000 bytes (380,000 bytes when
memory is extended)
(object size)
For example, to calculate the number of writable steps from memory used for
instructions
80,000 bytes ÷ 5 bytes (average number of bytes for each instruction) = 16,000
steps's worth
Note: If either of the total number of bytes used for instructions in the program or the
total number of bytes used for objects exceeds the capacity, the program
cannot be written or executed.
■ Calculating the number of bytes used

The total number of bytes used in this program is calculated as in the following table:
00000 #00020
T000
00500 T000 00500
Rung No. Instruction Operand Number of Bytes Number of Objects

00000 LD 00000 4 10
00001 OR 0050 4 6
00002 TMR 000#00020 4 6
00003 ANB T 000 4 6
00004 OUT 00500 4 12
Total 20 bytes 40 bytes
4-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 141 2012/03/15 17:25:29

4-2 User Memory
[Tip]
When the ladder program is transferred to the KV-700, object memory use (%) is
displayed on the KV BUILDER's screen.
PROGRAMMING
[Tip]
When a ladder program currently being edited is converted on the KV BUILDER,
the number of instructions used is displayed under the line No. (CON, MPS and
other instructions are counted in the number of instructions.)
4-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 142 2012/03/15 17:25:29

4-3 Device Configuration

A "device" is a general term for a relay or register, for example, that regarded by an
instruction as targeted for processing. This section describes devices that can be used
by the KV-700 and presents general applications for that device.
List of Devices
4 ■ Relays
Relay No. Regular Use High-speed Use
PROGRAMMING
0000
0001 Interrupt input
0002 INT0 to INT3
0003 Input relays
0004 (direct inputtable area) High-speed counter 0 A phase input
0005 High-speed counter 1
0006 High-speed counter 0 B phase input
0008 High-speed counter 0 Preset input
0010 to 0415 Reserved for system
0500
0501 Output relays For pulse output
0502 (direct outputtable area)
0503
0504 to 0915 Internal auxiliary relays
1000 to 59915 Input relays/output relays/internal auxiliary relays
[Tip]
Relays 1000 to 59915 can be held even after a power interruption by setting the
MEMSW instruction.
About Relay Nos.

Relay Nos. are configured as follows. Set the channel No. on Unit Editor. Refer to
the "KV BUILDER User's Manual."
Contact No.
Channel No. (00 to 15)
12515
Device No.
The device No. is a relay No. that is obtained by assigning the number of relays
occupied by each unit starting from 00000.
4-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 143 2012/03/15 17:25:29

Input Relays
ON/OFF signals from external input devices are captured by input relays.
Note: • Input relays function as contacts in the program. They cannot be used as
relay coils (outputs).
• No restrictions apply to the type of contact (a or b), order in which relay Nos.
are used, and the number of relays used.
4
PROGRAMMING
● Hardware inputs (not reliant on scan time)
• High-speed counter instructions With input relays 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,
0008 and 0009 for CTH0 and CTH1, the input
response becomes maximum 40 kHz/single-
phase (at 24 V) and 30 kHz/2-phase (at 24 V).
(Also, set the time constant.)
• INT instruction 0000 to 0003
Signals longer than the input time constant can
be captured regardless of the scan time.
"About the Input Time Constant" page 11-4

For details of the "HSP Instruction," "INT Instruction" and "High-speed Counter
Instruction," refer to the "Instruction Reference Manual."
Note: • When CR2305 is turned ON, the input time constant of all input relays on
the CPU Unit is specified. "About the Input Time Constant" page 11-4
• The input time constant specified by data memory CM1620 is set by the up
edge of CR2035. To change the input time constant, you must change data
memory CM1620, and then turn CR2305 OFF then back ON again.
• When CR2305 is programmed at the same time as the HSP instruction, the
HSP instruction is given priority.
• Inputtable signals are not reliant on the scan time only in the case of high-
speed counter inputs or when the INT instruction is programmed.
4-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 144 2012/03/15 17:25:29

Output Relays
Output relays output the result of program execution in either of two formats, relay or
transistor.
Note: • Output relays function as contacts and relay coils in the program.
• No restrictions apply to the type of contact (a or b), order of relays, and the
number of relays used.
4
PROGRAMMING
■ Output operation time
• Transistor output
OFF→ON 50 µs or less (10 µs or less for 500 to 503)
ON→OFF 250 µs or less (10 µs or less for 500 to 503, and 100 µs or less for
other KV-700 outputs)
• Relay output
OFF→ON 10 ms or less
ON→OFF 10 ms or less
Transistor output type KV-B16TA

KV-C32TA
Relay output type KV-B16RA
4-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 145 2012/03/15 17:25:29

Internal Auxiliary Relays

In the case of a relay circuit, if two or more of the same relay contacts are used within
the circuit, you may sometimes need to use multiple-pole relays for the number of times
that the relay contacts are used. Though internal auxiliary relays are relays that
function on ladder programs, they eliminate this kind of trouble with relay circuits, and
simplify circuit design.
Note: • Internal auxiliary relays function as contacts and relay coils in the program.
• No restrictions apply to the type of contact (a or b), order of relays, and the
4
number of relays used.
PROGRAMMING
■ Internal auxiliary relay hold function
All relays turn OFF when the state changes to an operation stopped state due to
switching of the operation mode or turning the power OFF. When operation is
resumed, relays stay OFF except relays whose input condition is ON. However,
hold ON/OFF can be set to internal auxiliary relays by the memory switch
(MEMSW).
When hold is set to ON, the previous ON/OFF state is memorized even after the
power is turned OFF.
For details on how to set the memory switch, refer to "MEMSW instruction" (page
3-8) in the "Instruction Reference Manual."
Application example of hold function: Lift rise/fall control

Set hold to relays 1000 and 1001.
The direction of lift operation is reversed by contact with the limit switches at the
upper and lower limits.
Even if the power is turned OFF during a rise operation, the lift will start to rise (or
fall) again after the power is turned ON again.
MEMSW1
$0001
00000 00001 01000
Upper LS 01000 #00010

T000
(00000)
00001 00000 01001
01001 #00010
T001
Lower LS T000 00501 00500

(00001) Fall
(00500) T001 00500 00501
END
Rise
ENDH
(00501)
4-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 146 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Control Relays
Control relays each hold their own unique functions. Effective use of control relays can
simplify programs and increase control capabilities.
Note: • A control relay of the same number can be used repeatedly in a single
program.
• Though read-only control relays can be used as contacts, do not use them
4 for output.
PROGRAMMING
For details on read-only relays, see "Control Relay Lists" (page 4-11).
■ Explanations
CR2002 Always ON CR2007 OFF only for 1 scan at start
When an output relay is turned ON by of operation
CR2002, CR2002 can be used as "output This is used when a signal is required
during operation." after a fixed period of time (one scan time)
CR2002 HSP
has elapsed after start of operations. It is
00000 also used for initial reset processing at the
CR2002 00000 start of operation.
LDA
ON continues after one scan.
DM0000
STA
01000 CR2007 #00100
C005
00000
The input time constant of 00000 is set to
10 µs. The current value of C005 is cleared
The ON/OFF data of 000ch is transferred (restored to "0") at start of operation.
to DM0000.
CR2008 ON only for 1 scan at start
CR2003 Always OFF of operation
Conversely to CR2002, this is used at This is used for initial reset processing at
locations that do not need to be turned start of operation.
ON. For example, it is inserted in DW OFF continues after one scan.
(down) input when an up-down counter is 00000 SFT
used only at the "up" setting. D
1100
01000
CLK
CR2004 10 ms cycle CR2008
1115
RES
CR2005 100 ms cycle
CR2006 1S cycle
All internal auxiliary relays currently used
With each of these control relays, the time by the shift instruction are turned OFF at
ratio is ON:OFF=1:1. the start of operation.
(Accordingly, the ON time of CR2005 is
CR2008 #00000
0.05 seconds/pulse.) LDA
Note, however, that the time ratio is reli- DM0000

STA
ant on the scan time, so an error of the
number of scan times occurs.
The value of DM0000 is cleared (restored
• When this control relay is combined
to "0") at start of operation.
with an output relay, an "intermittent
output" can be made.
• When CR2006 is used as the count CR2305 Set input time constant of
input for a counter, it can be used as a CPU
long-time timer. When CR2305 is set to ON, the input time
01000 #03600
constant of the Basic Unit can be deter-
C000
CR2006
mined by the value of CM1620. "Input
C000 01000 Time Constant" (page 11-4).
For details on how to use other control
relays, read the "Instruction Refer-
01000 turns ON every hour.
ence Manual" (page 7-1).
4-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 147 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Control Relay Lists

With control relays (CR0000 to CR3999), you can check the operation state of the CPU Unit, set input time constants,
set high-speed counters, and make other settings.
Attribute
Device No. R: Read only Function
Blank: R/W
CR0000 Reserved for system
:
CR0715 4
PROGRAMMING
:
CR0915
:
CR1715
:
CR1813
CR1814 Cam switch function, absolute/incremental ON: Absolute
OFF: Incremental
CR1815 Cam switch function, cam switch function stopped when turn ON
and OFF during operation
:
CR2001
CR2002 R ON at all times
CR2003 R OFF at all times
CR2004 R 10 ms clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2006 R 1s clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2009 ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
CR2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
CR2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
CR2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
:
CR2015
4-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 148 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CR2100 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
ON: Execute.
CR2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
Operation when OFF:
ON:
Do not execute.
Disable output.
CR2104 highspeed counter Disable/enable direct output to 00500. OFF: Enable output.
ON: Execute.
4
CR2105 comparator CTC0 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 00500. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2106 Turn ON direct output to 00500. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2107 Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter
PROGRAMMING
ON: Execute.
OFF: Do not execute.
comparator CTC0 turns ON.
ON: Disable output.
CR2108 Operation when Disable/enable direct output to 00500. OFF: Enable output.
ON: Execute.
CR2109 highspeed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00500. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2110 comparator CTC1 is ON Turn ON direct output to 00500.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
CR2111 Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2112 Automatically clear CTH0 when high-speed counter comparator CTC1 is ON. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2113 Single-phase 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses

High-speed counter
W/out direction W/ direction
CTH0 count input mode
CR2114 CR2113 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
selection.
CR2114 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
CR2115 CR2115 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Execute.
CR2203 Operation when Automatically clear CTH1. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2205 comparator CTC2 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 00501.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
comparator CTC2 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.

CR2209 highspeed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00501.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
comparator CTC3 is ON ON: Execute.
ON: Execute.
Single-phase 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
CR2213 High-speed counter
selection.
ON: Execute.
CR2300 Disable external outputs OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2301 Disable external input refreshing OFF: Do not execute.

ON: Enabled
CR2303 Fixed scan time operation OFF: Disabled
CR2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
CR2305 Set input time constant of all CPU Unit inputs. ON: Set.
OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
(Determine referring to CM1620 when ON.)
CR2306 R ON at backup battery error
:
CR2315
4-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 149 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CR2400 CTH0 external signal preset
CR2400 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2401 CR2401 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
CR2402 CTH0 ring counter OFF: Do not use.

4
PROGRAMMING
ON: Use.

:
CR2413
ON: Execute.
CR2414 Specified frequency pulse output OFF: Do not execute.
CR2415 Specified frequency pulse output, error

ON: Execute.
CR2500 Frequency counter, start of operation OFF: Do not execute.
CR2501 Frequency counter, Single-phase, Single-phase, 2-phase 1X 2 pulses

input source setting w/out direction w/ direction
CR2502 CR2501 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2502 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: rpm
CR2503 Frequency counter, Hz/rpm switching OFF: Hz
ON: Use.
CR2504 Frequency counter, user function for updating rpm by single rotation OFF: Do not use.

:
CR2507
ON: Execute.
CR2508 Cam switch, start of operation OFF: Do not execute.
CR2509 Cam switch, output response impossible warning (generated when output does not track during
cam switch operation)
CR2510 R Cam switch, error
:
CR2615
CR2700 INT0 interrupt polarity Up edge Down edge Both edges

Up edge Down edge Both edges

CR2704 INT2 interrupt polarity


:
CR2715
CR2800 Serial communications, send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
CR2801 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
CR2802 R Serial communications, text data download error
4-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 150 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CR2803 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
CR2804 Serial communications, start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
ON: Perform.
CR2805 Serial communications, receive text data in word units OFF: Do not perform.
ON: Perform.
CR2806 Serial communications, send text data in word units OFF: Do not perform.

:
4 CR2813
ON: Execute.
CR2814 Suppress zero during execution of DASC instruction (all suffixes) OFF: Do not execute.
PROGRAMMING
ON: Execute.
CR2815 Omit + sign during execution of DASC.S and DASC.L. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2900 Access window, display user message 1 OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.

:
CR2915
CR3000 X-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3001 X-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3002 X-axis, origin sensor input
CR3003 X-axis, stop sensor input
CR3004 R X-axis, zero return in operation
CR3005 X-axis, zero return completed
CR3007 X-axis, error/clear error
CR3008 X-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3009 X-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3010 X-axis, start driver operation
CR3011 X-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3012 X-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
:
CR3015
CR3100 Y-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3101 Y-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3102 Y-axis, origin sensor input
CR3103 Y-axis, stop sensor input
CR3104 R Y-axis, zero return in operation
CR3105 Y-axis, zero return completed
CR3107 Y-axis, error/clear error
CR3108 Y-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3109 Y-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3110 Y-axis, start driver operation
CR3111 Y-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3112 Y-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
:
CR3115
4-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 151 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CR3200 Logging function, trigger setting
CR3201
CR3202 Logging function, time stamp ON
CR3203 Logging function, start
CR3204 Logging function, write during operation
4
CR3205 Logging function, CPU buffer overflow
CR3206 Logging function, registered device error
CR3207 Logging function, write error
PROGRAMMING
CR3208 Logging function, MMC data overflow
CR3209 Logging function, MMC insufficient free space
CR3210 Logging function, logging execution in progress
:
CR3215
CR3300 Alarm relay Alarm 0
: :
CR3415 Alarm 31
CR3500 R Turn ON if one of alarm relays CR3300 to CR3415 is ON.
ON: Leave history.
CR3501 Leave history when alarm relay state changes to OFF from ON. OFF: Do not leave history.

:
CR3513
CR3514 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
CR3515 R HKEY instruction, end of scan
CR3600 R HKEY instruction information storage area
:
CR3615
CR3700 Operation panel KV-D30, F1 (customized switch 1)
CR3704 Operation panel KV-D30, LED1 (customized lamp 1)
CR3708 Operation panel KV-D30, green backlight (lights when ON)
CR3709 Operation panel KV-D30, red backlight (lights when ON)
ON: Japanese
CR3710 Operation panel KV-D30, system message display OFF: English
ON: Sound.
CR3711 Operation panel KV-D30, sound buzzer OFF: Turn off.
ON: Positive display
CR3712 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting OFF: Negative display
ON: Enabled
CR3713 Operation panel KV-D30, enable alarm interrupt OFF: Disabled
CR3714 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching

(Switch to page of CM0401 value is forcibly turned OFF by up edge.)
ON: Disabled
CR3715 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching by "▲" "▼" keys disabled OFF: Enabled
CR3800 Operation panel KV-D30, output 0 ON when panel is ON

:
CR3915
4-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 152 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Timers/Counters
Timers/counters can be set on the program, and their outputs can be used as contacts. (No restrictions
apply to a/b contacts or the order in which timers/counters are programmed.)
The same number cannot be used on timers/counters. T005 and C005 cannot be assigned in a single
program.
■ Timers/counters
4 Name Contact Coil (instruction) Number of
Timers/Counters
PROGRAMMING
Timer Timer (0.1 s timer) T000 to T511 TMR000 to 511

High-speed timer (0.01 s timer) TMH000 to 511
High-speed 1 ms timer (0.001 s timer) TMS000 to 511 Total 512
Up-down timer UDT000 to 511
Counter Counter C000 to C511 C000 to 511
Up-down counter UDC000 to 511
■ Explanations
Timer
• With 0.1 second timers (MTR) or high-speed 1 ms timers (TMS), the number when these timers are
used as contacts becomes Tnnn in both cases. Note, however, that with instructions used when
setting timers, numbers become as follows:
Timers: TMR nnn #ddddd
High-speed timers: TMH nnn #ddddd
High-speed 1 ms timers: TMS nnn #ddddd
Up-down timers: UDT nnn #ddddd (nnn: timer No., ddddd: timer setting value)
• The same timer No. cannot be assigned to TMR nnn and TMH nnn, and TMS nnn and UDT nnn in
a single program.
• When operation is stopped, all timers are reset, and the current value equals the setting value. The
current value of UDTs is held.
Counters
• With counters (C) or up-down counters (UDC), the number when these counters are used as contacts
becomes Cnnn in both cases. Note, however, that with instructions used when setting counters,
numbers become as follows:
Counters: C nnn #ddddd
Up-down counters: UDC nnn #ddddd
• The same number cannot be assigned to counters and up-down counters in a single program.
• All counters memorize the previous value also after operation is stopped.
For details of the "TMR Instruction," "TMH Instruction," "TMS Instruction," "UDT Instruction," "C
Instruction" and "UDC Instruction," refer to the "Instruction Reference Manual."
High-speed counters/ high-speed counter comparators

The KV-700 is provided with two 32-bit high-speed counters (CTH0, CTH1) having an input response
of 40 kHz/single-phase (at 24 V) and 30 kHz/2-phase (at 24 V), and four high-speed counter
comparators (CTC0, 1, 2, 3).
For details on high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, see "Chapter 6 HIGH-
SPEED COUNTERS" (page 6-1).
4-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 153 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Control Memory
With control memory (CM0000 to CM39999), you can set various special CPU Unit functions.
Control memory reserved for the system cannot be used.
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM0000 1st line display device setting
CM0001 1st line display device setting 4
CM0002 2nd line display device setting
PROGRAMMING
CM0004 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display device setting
page 0
CM0005 3rd line display device setting
CM0006 4th line display device setting
CM0008 Reserved for system
CM0009
CM0010 Page 1, display device setting
: Operation panel KV-D30 :
page 19
CM0199
CM0200 1st line display attribute setting
CM0202 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0204 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
page 0
CM0205 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0206 4th line display attribute setting
CM0208 Template 1 setting
4-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 154 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM0210 Page 1, display attribute setting
4 CM0393
Operation panel KV-D30
2nd line display attribute setting
page 19
PROGRAMMING

CM0400 Operation panel KV-D30, move enable/disable setting
CM0401 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching setting
CM0402 Operation panel KV-D30, current display page
:
CM0409
CM0410 Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
:
CM0415
:
CM0699
CM0700 R Read from calendar (year)
CM0701 R Read from calendar (month)
CM0702 R Read from calendar (day)
CM0703 R Read from calendar (hour)
CM0704 R Read from calendar (minute)
CM0705 R Read from calendar (second)
CM0706 R Read from calendar (day of week)
:
CM0719
CM0720 R Scan time measurement value (Average value of each tens scans is entered to this memory.) (in
0.1 ms units)
CM0721 Fixed scan time operation setting value (in 1 ms units)
CM0722 R Scan time (in 1 ms units) when the setting value is exceeded during fixed scan time operation is
entered to this memory.
:
CM0999
CM1000 Number of received text data
CM1001 R Received text data 1
: :
CM1099 Received text data 99
4-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 155 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1100 Number of sent text data
CM1101 R Received sent data 1
: :
CM1199 Received sent data 99
:
CM1399
CM1400 Cam switch function, set leading output relay No.
4
CM1401 Cam switch function, comparator value in multi-stage compare mode
PROGRAMMING
CM1402 Cam switch function, number of pulses in cycle of device input to CTH0
CM1403 Cam switch function, absolute type input address
CM1404 R Cam switch function, current angle
CM1405 R Cam switch function, error No.
:
CM1409
CM1410 Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output relay ON/OFF
CM1411
CM1412 Cam switch function, : angle setting value for turning output +1 relay ON/OFF
: :
CM1471 angle setting value for turning output +30 relay ON/OFF
CM1472 Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output +31 relay ON/OFF
CM1473
:
CM1479
CM1480 R Frequency counter function, frequency measurement results (Hz/rpm)
CM1481 R
CM1482 Frequency counter function, measurement cycle (ms)
CM1483 Frequency counter function, average number of measurements
:
CM1489
CM1490 Specified frequency pulse output function, set frequency (Hz)
CM1491
:
CM1499
CM1500 R Reserved for system
:
CM1531
:
CM1563
4-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 156 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
:
CM1569
:
4 CM1577
:
PROGRAMMING
CM1599
CM1600 CTH0 ring counter upper limit value
CM1601
CM1603
CM1604 CTH0 preset input
CM1605
CM1607
CM1609
CM1610 R Input capture at INT0 generation
CM1611 R
CM1613 R
CM1615 R
CM1617 R
CM1619
CM1620 Input time constant setting ( "Input Time Constant Selection Function" page 11-4)
:
CM1699
CM1700 Digital trimmer 0 upper limit value
CM1701
CM1703
CM1705
CM1707
CM1709
CM1711
4-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 157 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1713
CM1715
:
CM1719 4
CM1720 Access window, user message 1
PROGRAMMING
CM1721 Access window, user message 2 (max. 32 characters)
:
CM1737
CM1738 Access window, operation disabled setting
:
CM1999
CM2000 X-axis, I/O setting
CM2001 X-axis, sensor enable
CM2002 X-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2003
CM2005
CM2006 X-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2007 X-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2008 X-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2009
CM2010 X-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2011 X-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2012 X-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2013
CM2014 X-axis, change current value setting value
CM2015
CM2016 X-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2017
CM2019 X-axis, M code
CM2020 R X-axis, output pulse current value
CM2021 R
CM2022 R X-axis, output frequency current value
CM2023 R
CM2024 X-axis, error code
CM2025 X-axis, operation point No.
:
CM2029
4-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 158 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM2030 Y-axis, I/O setting
CM2031 Y-axis, sensor enable
CM2032 Y-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2033
4
CM2035
CM2036 Y-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2037 Y-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
PROGRAMMING
CM2038 Y-axis, zero return: operation frequency

CM2039
CM2040 Y-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2041 Y-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2042 Y-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2043
CM2044 Y-axis, change current value setting value
CM2045
CM2046 Y-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2047
CM2049 Y-axis, M code
CM2050 R Y-axis, output pulse current value
CM2051 R
CM2052 R Y-axis, output frequency current value
CM2053 R
CM2054 Y-axis, error code
CM2055 Y-axis, operation point No.
:
CM2059
CM2060 Target value/travel
CM2061 Startup frequency
CM2062 Acceleration/deceleration time
CM2063 Operation frequency
CPU positioning function
CM2064
Point parameter 0
CM2065 Operation mode
CM2066 Number of specified stop sensor pulses
CM2068
CM2069
CM2070 CPU positioning function Point parameter 1
: :
CM2369 Point parameter 30
4-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 159 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM2374
Point parameter 31
4
PROGRAMMING
CM2378
CM2379
:
CM2599
CM2600 Logging function, device type 0
CM2601
: :
CM2661 device type 30
CM2663
CM2664 Logging function, trigger selection details 0
: :
CM2670 trigger selection details 6
CM2671 Logging function, number of registered devices
CM2672 Logging function, Memory Card storage capacity
:
CM3999
4-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 160 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Temporary Data Memory

This data memory is for temporary storage. When arithmetic instructions are used, this
memory is also used for temporarily storing data for arithmetic operations or the results
of arithmetic operations.
TM No. Application
TM000 For arithmetic operations
TM001
4 TM002
TM003
TM0004 to TM511 User area (for indirect specification)
PROGRAMMING
Note: • Temporary data memory is initialized when the power is turned ON.
• TM00, TM01, TM02, and TM03 are used by the MUL, DIV and ROOT
instructions, so do not use these for other instructions. "Instruction
Reference Manual"
Data Memory
Data memories are 16-bit word devices that can be freely used by the user.
The content of data memories is held after a power interruption. "Power Interruption
Hold Function" (page 11-5)
Standard
DM00000 to DM19999
When memory is expanded

DM00000 to DM39999
4-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 161 2012/03/15 17:25:30

4-4 Extended Ladder
4-4 Extended Ladder

This section describes the extended ladder language exclusive to Keyence.
Features of the Extended Ladder Language

"Extended ladder" is a programming system that was especially developed for the
purpose of reducing the number of man-hours used in program design, testing,
operation, and maintenance.
With conventional ladder languages, output instructions could be written only at the
4
right side of the ladder diagram. However, with extended ladder language, they can be
PROGRAMMING
written at all positions except the left edge, thus enabling programs such as the one
shown below to be written.
Input/output circuit
(conventional ladder language) (extended ladder language)
Only input circuit Only output Only Input/output Only

can be written. circuit can input circuit circuits can output circuit
be written. can be be mixed. can be
incorporated. incorporated.
Multiple instructions connected on a single rung
Instructions that can be written on

a single rung of the ladder extend
from left to right.
Many instructions can be connected.
Branches from output coils

Branches can be input only from Branches can also be input from
input contacts. output coils.
Number of rungs in ladder program

can be seen in a single rung.
3 rungs in ladder diagram
4-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 162 2012/03/15 17:25:30

4-4 Extended Ladder
Advantages of the Extended Ladder Language

Fewer ladder rungs
Input and output instructions can be mixed and programmed on the same rung, which
reduces the number of rungs in the ladder program. The content of the ladder program
to be executed can also be understood at a glance.
[Example]
4 The content of DM0000 turns 500 ON at the same time as 1000
turns 501 ON at the same time as 2000
PROGRAMMING
turns 502 ON at the same time as 3000
CR2002 DM0000 CR2002 DM0000 #01000 CR2010 00500

LDA LDA CMP
#01000 #02000 CR2010 00501

CMP CMP
CR2010 00500 #03000 CR2010 00502

CMP
CR2002 #02000
CMP In conventional ladder languages, it was difficult to tell
at a glance what the program executed. With extended
CR2010 00501
ladder language, you can tell at a glance.
CR2002 #03000
CMP
CR2010 00502
Clear processing order

Ladder symbols can be arranged in processing order, which makes it easier to
understand the flow of the program. This also makes program maintenance much
easier.
[Example]
When the Start switch is turned ON, the indicator lights for three seconds, the buzzer
sounds for two seconds, and motor operation is started.
00000 01100 01100 01000 When the start switch (00000) turns ON, the lamp
DIFU SET (00500) lights and timer 0 starts to operate.
01000 00500 #00030 T000 01001 When timer 0 turns ON 3 seconds later, the lamp
STG T000 JMP goes out, the buzzer (00501) sounds, and timer 1
starts to operate.
01001 00501 #00020 T001 01002
STG T001 JMP When timer 1 turns ON 2 seconds later, the buzzer
stops, and motor (00502) operation starts.
01002 00502 00000
STG ENDS When the start switch (00000) turns OFF, the motor
stops, and devices are reset.
4-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 163 2012/03/15 17:25:30

4-4 Extended Ladder
00000 01000 00000 01000 01000 01001

DIFU DIFU SET
01000 T000 #00010 01001 00500 #00010 T000 01002

T000 STG T000 JMP
01001 01001 01002 00501 #00020 T001 01003

STG T001 JMP
T002 01003 00500 00501 #00030 T002 01001

STG T002 JMP
T000 T001 #00020 4

T001 As shown above, the program can be made to execute in
PROGRAMMING
the desired order, and even beginners new to relay
01002 01002 sequences can understand the content of processing if an
extended ladder is used.
T001 T002 #00030 Double coils can also be used by combining the STG
T002 instruction in the program.
01003 01003
01001 00500
01003
01002 00501
01003
[Tip]
If you use the extended ladder language, the number of rungs in the ladder diagram
can be reduced. This, however, does not mean that the number of mnemonics is
reduced.
(regular ladder language) (extended ladder language)
00000 00500 00000 00500 00501
00501
LD 00000 LD 00000
OUT 00500 OUT 00500
OUT 00501 CON
OUT 00501
Connection instruction CON increases.
(This does not affect the scan time.)
4-27
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 164 2012/03/15 17:25:30

4-4 Extended Ladder
4
PROGRAMMING
4-28
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 165 2012/03/15 17:25:30

5
INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPTS
The interrupt processing function is a function for executing an
interrupt program when there is a request (an interrupt cause is
generated) from an external input or a high-speed comparator during
operation of the KV-700.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt causes and I/O during
interrupt processing.
5-1 Interrupt Processing ...........................................................5-2
5-2 Direct Input/Output .............................................................5-6
5-3 Sample Interrupt Programs ............................................... 5-7
5-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 166 2012/03/15 17:25:30

5-1 Interrupt Processing

This section describes interrupt processing.
For a details of instructions, see "Instruction Reference Manual."
What Is "Interrupt Processing?"

■ Outline of interrupt processing
Normally, on a PLC, execution of a ladder sequence program proceeds by
repeatedly executing input processing, program execution and output processing.
Accordingly, signals shorter than the scan time cannot be input.
5 If the interrupt processing function is used, processing can be executed at the
moment that an interrupt occurs independently of the scan time.
INTERRUPTS
When an interrupt occurs, program execution is temporarily suspended at that

moment in time, and the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt cause is
executed. When execution of the interrupt program ends, processing of the
suspended program is resumed.
For details on the scan time, read "Fixed Scan Time Operation Function" (page
11-2).
Input processing
Direct input
Interrupt input processing
generated (00000 to 0009)
Execution
Scan time
Program of
execution interrupt
processing
Return to
instruction following Direct output
interrupt generation processing
(00500 to 00503)
Output processing
■ About direct input/output

During interrupt processing, the direct input and direct output functions can be
used. "Direct input" is an input mode that allows the input states of input relays
00000 to 00009 to be captured during execution of the interrupt program. "Direct
output" is an output mode that allows the ON/OFF states of output relays 00500
to 00503 to be output during execution of the interrupt program.
These functions can be used by merely using direct input/output compatible
devices in the interrupt program by the SET and RES instructions.
5-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 167 2012/03/15 17:25:30

■ Execution of interrupts
The interrupt instruction "INT" is used for executing interrupts. At the start of operation, interrupts are
prohibited, so to execute the "INT" operation, the enable interrupt instruction "EI" must be executed. Also, to
shorten the input time constant, the HSP instruction (10µs) must be executed or the input time constant must
be set at data memory CM1620 and CR2305 set to ON.
For details on the input time constant, read "Input Time Constant Selection Function" (page 11-4).
CR2008
CR2008 #00000 CR2305 EI
EI DW SET or
CM1620 CR2002 HSP
00000
INTERRUPTS
Types of Interrupts
There are two types of interrupts, "externally input interrupts" and "interrupts from high-speed counter
comparators." The following describes these types of interrupts.
Externally input interrupts
Interrupts are executed by input relays 0000 to 0003. Set which polarity (up edge or down edge) is to be taken
as the interrupt cause by the control relays.
Interrupts from high-speed counter comparators
Interrupt processing is executed when the current value of a high-speed counter CTH and the setting value of
a high-speed counter comparator CTC become the same value.
■ Setting the polarity of externally input interrupts

Set which polarity (up edge or down edge) is to be taken as the interrupt cause by the control relays.
When INT0:CR2700,2701, INT1:CR2702,2703, INT2:CR2704,2705, and INT3:CR2706,2707 respectively
are set, the polarity of the interrupts can be changed as follows.
Interrupt Type Relay No. State Relay No. State Operation

INT0 CR2700 OFF CR2701 OFF Interrupt generated at up edge.
(input 0000) ON OFF
OFF ON Interrupt generated at down edge.
ON ON Interrupt generated both up edge and down edge
(input 0001) ON OFF
(input 0002) ON OFF
(input 0003) ON OFF
Note: Set ON/OFF of the special auxiliary relays by the SET/RES instructions.
5-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 168 2012/03/15 17:25:30

■ Input capture
External interrupt causes are each provided with an input capture function. This
function is for acquiring to control memory the current value of a high-speed counter
when an interrupt is generated. The current value of high-speed counters is
automatically transferred to CM1610 to CM1617 when an interrupt is generated
even if this function is not set.
External Input Cause Description

At INT0 generation CTH0 → CM1610 (lower), CM1611 (upper)
5 At INT3 generation CTH1 → CM1616 (lower), CM1617 (upper)

INTERRUPTS
Note: • Set ON/OFF of the special auxiliary relays by the SET/RES instructions.
• The input capture execution timing is reliant on the interrupt polarity setting
that is set at CR2700 to CR2707.
Interrupt Priority
When two more interrupts are generated successively, the first generated interrupt is
given priority.
When interrupts are generated simultaneously, the order of priority is as follows:
00000>00001>00002>00003>CTC2>CTC3>CTC0>CTC1
Note: • Other interrupts are prohibited during execution of interrupts. (Interrupts

can also be nested by programming the EI instruction within the interrupt
routine.)
• When there is another interrupt during execution of an interrupt, interrupts
can be memorized down to a nesting level of eight, and processing is
executed according to the order of priority after the interrupt ends. Note,
however, that input of the same interrupt is not allowed.
5-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 169 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Interrupt Program
The interrupt program is executed when an interrupt is generated.
To execute the interrupt program, the enable interrupt "EI" instruction must be
executed.
Also, to temporarily disable interrupts, execute the disable interrupt "DI" instruction.
When interrupts are disabled, interrupts are not processed even if they are generated,
and are put on hold until interrupts are next enabled.
"Instruction Reference Manual" page 5-54
Example of interrupt program
CR2008
EI The interrupt program cannot be executed unless the EI instruction
5
is executed.
INTERRUPTS
HSP Input time constant must be set short at HSP (10 µs) and CR2305
00000
must be turned ON.
END
INT
00000
Insert the interrupt program between "END" and "ENDH".
RETI
ENDH
Note: • To shorten the input time constant, the HSP instruction (10 µs) must be
executed or the input time constant must be set at data memory CM1620
and CR2305 set to ON.
• For details on the input time constant, read "Input Time Constant Selection
Function" ( page 11-4).
• Do not use the OUT and OUTB instructions within the interrupt program.
Use the SET and RES instructions.
Instructions not allowed in interrupt programs

The following instructions are not allowed in the interrupt program. Refer to
"Instruction Reference Manual."
@xxxx instruction ALT ANF ANP C DIFD DIFU ENDS
FLIK HKEY ITVL JMP LDF LDP LDT OFDL
ONDL ORF ORP SFT SHOT STG TMH TMR
TMS UDC UDT W-DE W-OFF W-ON W-UE
5-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 170 2012/03/15 17:25:30

5-2 Direct Input/Output
5-2 Direct Input/Output

This section describes direct input and direct output.
Direct Input
The direct input function can be used during interrupt processing. "Direct input" is an
input mode that allows the input states of input relays to be captured during execution
of the interrupt program.
Only input relays 00000 to 00009 can be captured by direct input.
5 CR2008
EI
• The HSP instruction must be executed, or CR2305
CR2002 HSP
set to ON and the input time constant set to 10 ∝s.
INTERRUPTS
00000
HSP
00005 • Input information that has been obtained by direct
01000 0500 input is valid only during the interrupt program, and
must be made to via the internal auxiliary relays.
END
INT
00000
00005 01000
SET
RETI
ENDH
Direct Output
"Direct output" is an output mode that allows the ON/OFF states of output relays to be
output during execution of the interrupt program. Only output relays 00500 to 00503
can be output by direct input.
CR2008
EI
• Direct output does not influence the scan time.
CR2002 HSP
00000
• The SET and RES instructions are used when
HSP
00001 outputting by direct output.
END
INT
00000
CR2002 00500
SET
RETI
INT
00001
CR2002 00501
SET
RETI
ENDH
5-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 171 2012/03/15 17:25:30

5-3 Sample Interrupt Programs

This section presents sample programs that use interrupt processing.
Example of Interrupt Application

■ Outline
A minute pulse shorter than the scan is converted to pulse of a fixed width using the
interrupt function and is then output.
Scan
5
ON
INTERRUPTS
Input 00000
OFF
ON
Output 00500 ON ON ON
OFF
1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.
■ Ladder diagram
• The minute pulse that is input by input relay 00000 is converted to a pulse having
an ON width of one second from output relay 00500.
• Output relay 00500 turns ON for one second from the up edge of input relay
00000.
CR2008
0001 EI • Interrupt is enabled when
power is started up.
CR2002 HSP
0002 00000 • The input time constant of
input 0000 is set to 10 µs.
00500 #00010 T0000 00500
0003 T000 RES • Output 00500 turns OFF
when output 00500
END turns ON for 1 sec.
0004
INT
0005 00000 • Output 00500 turns ON
when input 0000 is
CR2002 00500 input.
0006 SET
RETI
0007
ENDH
0008
5-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 172 2012/03/15 17:25:30

Example of Application of an Interrupt Using a High-speed Counter

■ Outline
Output relay ON/OFF is controlled by the input value of a high-speed counter from
an input relay and by ON/OFF of another input relay.
Application example:
Filling a container pills
Scan
Sensor
ON
Input 00004
5
OFF
ON
Input 00000
INTERRUPTS
OFF
ON
Output 00500 ON
OFF
■ Ladder diagram
• When the high-speed counter input value from input relay 00004 becomes 10000,
output relay 00500 turns ON.
• When input relay 00000 turns ON, output relay 00500 turns OFF.
• When the power is started up,

interrupt is enabled, high-speed
CR2008 CR2103 CTH0
0001 EI SET RES counter 0 is automatically reset,
and high-speed counter 0 is reset.
CR2002 HSP
0002 00004 • Input time constant of input
00004 is set to 10 µs.
CR2002 CTH0
0003 00004 • High-speed counter 0, setting
value 10000 of input 00004
#10000
0004 CTC0
00000 00500
0005 RES • Output 00500 turns OFF
when input 00000 turns ON.
END
0006
INT
0007 CTC0 • When the high-speed
counter input value becomes
CR2002 00500 10000, an interrupt is executed,
0008 SET and output 00500 turns ON.
RETI
0009
ENDH
0010
5-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 173 2012/03/15 17:25:30

6-1 High-speed Counters
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS 6
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
This chapter describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter
comparators that enable high-speed pulse measurement and pulse
output independent of scan time.
6-1 High-speed Counters ......................................................... 6-2
6-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 174 2012/03/15 17:25:30


This section briefly describes and presents the specifications of the high-speed
counters and high-speed counter comparators provided on the KV-700.
Outline of High-speed Counters

High-speed counters, high-speed counter comparators
High-speed counters are counters (response frequency (40 kHz/single-phase, 30 kHz/
2-phase (at 24 V))) for measuring high-speed signals that cannot be measured by
counter instructions C and UDC. High-speed counter comparators are devices for
specifying the setting values of high-speed counters, and turn ON when the setting
value matches the current value. As high-speed counters are processed in the
hardware, they can operate at high speed independent of the scan.
6
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
■ Configuration of high-speed counters, high-speed comparators

The KV-700 series is provided with two high-speed counters, and high-speed
comparators and exclusive internal clocks for each of these high-speed counters.
High-speed counter block diagram
Preset input 00008
32-bit high-speed CTH0 input capture *1

Count input function
counter 0
A phase 00004 External input CM1610, CM1611 (INT00000)
CTH0
(B phase 00006) 00004 CM1612, CM1613 (INT00001)
(00006)
Internal clock
CR2100 (1.0 µs) Control circuit 2
00500 *
CR2101 (10.0 µs) CH0 setting value
CR2102 (100.0 µs) High-speed counter (direct clock pulse)
Direct clock pulse input comparator Interrupt function
00501 (internally wired) CTC0 INT CTC0
CTC1 INT CTC1
32-bit high-speed CTH0 input capture *1

Count input function
counter 1
Direct clock pulse input CM1614, CM1615 (INT00002)
CTH1
00500 (internally wired) CM1616, CM1617 (INT00003)
Internal clock 2
CR2200 (1.0 µs) Control circuit 00501 *
CR2201 (10.0 µs) (direct clock pulse)
CR2202 (100.0 µs) CH0 setting value
High-speed counter
A phase 00005 External input comparator Interrupt function
00005 CTC2
(B phase 00007) (00007)
INT CTC2
CTC3 INT CTC3
Preset input 00009
*1 "Input capture function" page 5-4

*2 "Direct Clock Pulse Output" page 11-7
6-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 175 2012/03/15 17:25:31

List of control devices for CTH0

Relay No. Description ON OFF
CR2100 CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1.0 µs) — —
CR2103 When CTC0 is ON, CTH0 auto clear Execute. Do not execute.
CR2104 When CTC0 is ON, direct output (00500) Disable output. Enable output.
CR2105 When CTC0 is ON, direct output (00500) OFF Execute. Do not execute.
CR2106 When CTC0 is ON, direct output (00500) ON Execute. Do not execute.
CR2107 When CTC0 is ON, direct output (00500) ON/OFF reversal Execute. Do not execute.
CR2111 When CTC1 is ON, direct output (00500) ON/OFF reversal Execute. Do not execute. 6
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
Single-phase, Single-phase, 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
CR2113 CTH0 count input OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
CR2114 method selection OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
CR2115 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

CR2400 External signal preset OFF ON OFF ON
At ON At OFF
CR2402 Ring counter use by CTH0 Execute. Do not execute.
Device No. Description

CM1600 CTH0 ring counter upper limit value (lower)
CM1601 CTH0 ring counter upper limit value (upper)
CM1604 CTH0 preset input value (lower)
CM1605 CTH0 preset input value (upper)
[Tip]
The initial state of CR2104 and CR2108 is ON. Otherwise, these devices are OFF.
Note: • To turn a control relay ON, use the SET instruction.

• To turn a control relay OFF, use the RES instruction.
6-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 176 2012/03/15 17:25:31

List of control devices for CTH1

6 CR2211 When CTC3 is ON, direct output (00500) ON/OFF reversal Execute. Do not execute.
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
Single-phase, Single-phase, 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses

CR2213 CTH1 count input OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
CR2214 method selection OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

CR2404 External signal preset OFF ON OFF ON
At ON At OFF
CR2404 Ring counter use by CTH1 Execute. Do not execute.
Device No. Description

CM1602 CTH1 ring counter upper limit value (lower)
CM1603 CTH1 ring counter upper limit value (upper)
CM1606 CTH1 preset input value (lower)
CM1607 CTH1 preset input value (upper)
[Tip]
The initial state of CR2204 and CR2208 is ON. Otherwise, these devices are OFF.
Note: • To turn a control relay ON, use the SET instruction.

• To turn a control relay OFF, use the RES instruction.
6-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 177 2012/03/15 17:25:31

High-speed Counter Specifications

■ Specifications
Setting value range: 32 bits (0 to 4294967295)
Response frequency: 40 kHz/single-phase (at 24 V), 30 kHz/2-phase (24 V)
Pulse input system: 2-phase (phase difference) input possible
Number of channels: 2
■ Count input types

High-speed counters have the following three count inputs. The A phase of the input
to count is specified as the operand.
(1) External input
A phase B phase Preset (reset) input 6
CTH0 00004 00006 0008
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
CTH1 00005 00007 0009
Short externally input signals are counted. Single-phase, phase difference and 2-
pulse can be input.
The count method is set by control relays.
For details on preset (reset) inputs, see "Preset Function" (page 6-13).
[Example]
CTH0
Count of external input 00004 00004
(2) Internal clock input

1.0 µs 10.0 µs 100.0 µs
CTH0 CR2100 CR2101 CR2102
CTH1 CR2200 CR2201 CR2202
The internal clock is counted. As the time can be measured from the count value,
this input can be used as a high-precision timer.
[Example]
CTH0
Count of internal clock (1.0 µs) CR2100
by CTH0
(3) Direct clock pulse input

Direct Clock Pulse
CTH0 00501
CTH1 00500
Pulses output by the direct clock pulse function can be counted without being wired
externally.
See "Direct Clock Pulse Output" page 11-7.
[Example]
CTH0
Direct from 00501 00501
6-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 178 2012/03/15 17:25:31

■ Current value (CTH)

The current values of the high-speed counters are stored in CTH0 and CTH1,
respectively.
When the value has increased beyond 4294967295, the counter overflows, and
when the value has fallen below 0, the counter underflows. Counter values are held
even if a power interruption occurs. To clear current values set MEMSW.
See Instruction Reference Manual "MEMSW Instruction" page 3-8.
■ Setting value (CTC)

The setting values of high-speed counters are set in high-speed counter compara-
tors CTC0 to CTC3.
Setting values can be set within the range 0 to 4294967295. A CTC turns ON when
6 the setting value matches the current value.
Set CTC OFF by the RES instruction. Setting values are automatically reset when
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
an interrupt is applied by CTC.

High-speed Counter High-speed Counter Comparator
CTH0 CTC0
CTC1
CTH1 CTC2
CTC3
[Example] CTH0
00004
Setting of CTC0 and CTC1
#00100
CTC 0
#100000
CTC 1
Note: CTCs do not turn ON when the current value is rewritten with the same
value as the CTC.
CTCs turn ON only when the current value has equaled CTC after a count
up or count down.
■ Reading/changing current values, rewriting setting values

(1) Reading current values
The current value is read by the LDA or MOV instruction.
Instruction Reference Manual "LDA Instruction" page 4-6
Instruction Reference Manual "MOV Instruction" page 4-14
When the current value is 0 to CTH0 DM00000

LDA.D STA.D
4294967295
[Example]
To store the current value of CTH0 MOV.D
CTH0 DM00000
to data memory DM00000/
DM00001
CTH0 DM00000
When the current value is 0 to LDA STA
65535
[Example]
MOV
To store the current value of CTH0 CTH0 DM00000
to data memory DM00000
6-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 179 2012/03/15 17:25:31

(2) Changing the current value (CTH)

The current value is changed by the MOV instruction.
When changing to 0 to 4294967295

[Example]
To change the current value of MOV.D
#100000 CTH0
CTH0 to 100000

[Example] MOV
To change the current value of #00100 CTH0
CTH0 to 100
6
Note: • Current values are overwritten as 32-bit data even if they are changed by
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
the MOV.U instruction.
• When the current value has been changed to a value greater than the CTC
to which an automatic reset is specified, the current value is changed to
"value of CTC - 1". The current value cannot be changed to a value greater
than the CTC to which an automatic reset is specified.
(3) Changing the setting value (CTC)

The setting value is changed by the STA or MOV instruction.
Instruction Reference Manual "STA Instruction" page 4-8

[Example]
#100000 CTC0
To change the value of CTC0 to LDA.D STA.D
100000
MOV.D
#100000 CTC0
When changing to 0 to 65535 #00100 CTC0

[Example] LDA STA
To change the current value of
CTC0 to 100 MOV
#00100 CTC0
Note: Setting values are overwritten as 32-bit data even if they are changed by the
MOV.U instruction.
6-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 180 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Setting Count Input

■ External input setting
The following count methods are available for counting external inputs.
CTH0 count input method

Single-phase Phase Difference 2 pulses
W/out W/ 1X 2X 4X
direction direction
CR2113 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
6 CTH1 count input method

Single-phase Phase Difference 2 pulses
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
W/out W/ 1X 2X 4X
direction direction
CR2213 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Important: Do not set to combinations other than those described in the above
tables.
(1) Single-phase
Set this when counting single-phase pulses.
W/out direction The up edge of the A phase is counted.

The B phase can be used as regular input. (Counter operation is
not influenced.)
W/ direction The count is incremented at the up edge of the A phase when the
B phase is OFF.
The count is decremented at the up edge of the A phase when the
B phase is ON.

ON ON
(A phase) 00004 (A phase) 00004
OFF OFF
ON ON
(B phase) 00006 (B phase) 00006
OFF OFF
(counter value) CTH0 (counter value) CTH0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
6-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 181 2012/03/15 17:25:31

(2) Phase difference

Set this when counting the phase difference.
1X The count is incremented at the up edge of the A phase when the B phase is OFF.
The count is decremented at the down edge of the A phase when the B phase is OFF.
ON
(A phase)
0004
OFF
ON
(B phase)
0006 OFF
(counter value)
CTH0
0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0
6
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
The count is decremented at the up edge of the A phase when the B phase is ON.
The count is incremented at the down edge of the A phase when the B phase is ON.
ON
(A phase)
0004 OFF
ON
(B phase)
0006 OFF
(counter value)
CTH0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
The count is decremented at the up edge of the A phase when the B phase is ON.
The count is incremented at the down edge of the A phase when the B phase is ON.
The count is decremented at the up edge of the B phase when the A phase is OFF.
The count is incremented at the down edge of the B phase when the A phase is OFF.
The count is incremented at the up edge of the B phase when the A phase is ON.
The count is decremented at the down edge of the B phase when the A phase is ON.
ON
(A phase)
0004 OFF
ON
(B phase)
0006 OFF
(counter value)
CTH0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 182 2012/03/15 17:25:31

(3) 2-pulse
The pulse that is input in 2-pulse method is counted.
The pulse is incremented at the up edge of the A phase, and decremented at the
up edge of the B phase.
ON
(A phase)
0004 OFF
ON
(B phase)
0006 OFF
(counter value)
CTH0
0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0
6
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
■ Internal clock input setting

When counting the internal clock, specify the following control relays to the operand.
1.0 µs 10.0 µs 100.0 µs
CTH0 CR2100 CR2101 CR2102
CTH1 CR2200 CR2201 CR2202
The A and B phases can be used as regular input. (Counter operation is not
influenced.)
■ Direct clock pulse input

When counting the direct clock pulse, specify the following control relays to the
operand.
Direct Clock Pulse
CTH0 00501
CTH1 00500
The A and B phases can be used as regular input. (Counter operation is not
influenced.)
6-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 183 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Reset Method
Clearing the current value of a high-speed counter is called a "reset."
There are four reset methods:
Reset by RES instruction
Reset by execution condition OFF
Automatic reset by a count up
Reset by external input
■ Reset by RES instruction

The counter is reset by "RES CTH." The counter is reset at the moment that the RES
instruction is executed.
6
Scan
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
CTH current value
"RES CTH" execution
[Example]
CTH0
Reset by RES instruction RES
■ Reset by execution condition OFF

The counter is reset by turning the CTH instruction execution condition OFF.
Scan
Execution condition
CTH current value
CTH instruction execution
[Example]
Execution condition CTH0
Reset by execution condition OFF 00004
The current value is reset
when execution condition turns OFF.
6-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 184 2012/03/15 17:25:31

■ Automatic reset by a count up

The counter is automatically reset when the current value reaches the setting value.
This automatic reset is set in control relays.
High-speed High-speed Relay No. Operation
Counter Counter
Comparator
CTH0 CTC0 CR2103 If control relays CR2103 and CR2112
are turned ON in advance, the current
value of CTH0 is cleared when the
CTC1 CR2112 preset value of CTH0 becomes the
same as the setting values of CTC0
and CTC1.
CTH1 CTC2 CR2203 If control relays CR2203 and CR2212
are turned ON in advance, the current
6 CTC3 CR2212
value of CTH1 is cleared when the
preset value of CTH1 becomes the
same as the setting values of CTC2
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
and CTC3.
Scan
CTH
CTH=CTC
* The counter is reset when CTH=CTC.
Note: When the current value has been changed to a value greater than CTC to
which an automatic reset is specified, the current value is changed to
"value CTC - 1". The current value cannot be changed to a value greater
than the CTC to which an automatic reset is specified.
CR2008 CR2103 CR2203

SET SET
■ Reset by external input

The preset function is used to reset the current value.
Set the preset value to "0" to execute the preset.
Instruction Reference Manual "Preset Function" page 5-80
* The current value is reset when the external reset input turns ON.
Scan
External reset input
CTH
[Tip]
With resets by "execution condition OFF" or the "RES instruction," a delay of one
scan maximum until the reset is performed occurs. With resets by "automatic reset
by a count up" or "external input," the reset is performed without the scan time being
influenced.
6-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 185 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Preset Function
The preset function changes the current value of the high-speed counter to the preset
value. The current value is changed by external input.
High-speed Preset Input Preset Value Storage Destination
Counter Upper Lower
CTH0 00008 CM1605 CM1604
CTH1 00009 CM1607 CM1606
Set the preset execution condition in control relays.

High-speed CR2400 CR2401 Operation
Counter
CTH0 OFF OFF External reset disabled
ON OFF At up edge of input 00008 6
OFF ON At down edge of input 00008
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
ON ON Reset for duration that input 00008 is On
High-speed CR2404 CR2405 Operation

Counter
CTH1 OFF OFF External reset disabled
ON OFF At up edge of input 00009
OFF ON At down edge of input 00009
ON ON Reset for duration that input 00009 is On
When the preset value is set to "0" and the preset is executed, the preset can be used
as a reset for the high-speed counters.
[Example]
To reset at the up edge of 00008 CR2008 CR2400 CR2401 #00000 CM1604
(high-speed counter reset), the set- SET RES LDA.D STA.D
ting for presetting CTH0 to "0"
6-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 186 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Comparator Match Output

This function directly turns output relays ON/OFF when the value (setting value) of the comparator matches
the current value. Set this function in control relays.
CTH0 setting
6 CR2110 When CTC1 is ON, direct output (00500) ON Execute. Do not execute.
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
CTH1 setting
Set this function to "direct output enabled" and "output ON" when CTC is ON.
This function is output without being influenced by the scan time.
To set this function to OFF, write a program for setting this function to OFF.
6-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 187 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Ring Counter Function

A "ring counter" is a function for setting the upper limit of a high-speed counter to any
desired value. A ring counter operates when the operation enable relay (CR) is ON.
Regular high-speed counters overflow when the count up exceeds 4294967295, and
the count returns to 0. When these counters count down from 0, they overflow, and the
count becomes 4294967295.
However, when a ring counter is set, the value when the counter underflows becomes
the preset upper limit value. When the counter overflows from the upper limit value, the
count returns to 0.
Regular Ring counter
Overflow Overflow
4294967295 0 Upper limit value 0 6

Underflow Underflow
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
4294967294 1 Upper limit value -1 1
2 2
4 3 4 3
Ring counters are set in control relays and control memory.
High-speed Enable Upper Limit Value

Counter Operation Relay Upper Lower
CTH0 CR2402 CM1601 CM1600
CTH1 CR2406 CM1603 CM1602
[Example]
Ring counter setting for upper limit CR2008 #100000 CM1600
LDA.D STA.D
value 100000 for CTH0
CR2402
SET
Note: • When the current value of the high-speed counter has been changed to a
value greater than the upper limit value of the ring counter, the current value
is changed to the upper limit value. The current value cannot be changed
to a value greater than the upper limit value.
• When the upper limit value is set to a value smaller than the current value,
the current value equals the upper limit value. (at END processing)
6-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 188 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Extended Functions
High-speed counters have the following three extended functions in addition to regular high-speed
counting. These functions use the high-speed counter.
Note that extended functions cannot be used in combination with regular high-speed counting.
(1) Specified frequency pulse output function

This function sets any frequency and outputs this as a pulse.
This enables motor speed control. This function cannot be used in combination with CTH1.
(2) Frequency counter function
6 This function measures the frequency of rotating bodies, for example.

This function cannot be used in combination with CTH0.
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS
(3) Cam switch function

This function performs cam control on a PLC. When an incremental encoder is used, this function
cannot be used in combination with CTH0.
The frequency counter function cannot be used in combination with the cam switch function
(incremental encoder).
Though extended functions can be used in combination, some combinations are not possible.
The following table summarizes the restrictions applied to combinations of extended functions.
Function High-speed High-speed Specified Frequency Cam switch Cam switch
counter counter frequency counter (absolute) (incremental)
CTH0 CTH1 pulse output
High-speed — X X
counter
CTH0
High-speed — X
counter
CTH1
Specified X —
frequency
pulse output
Frequency X — X
counter
Cam switch — X
(absolute)
Cam switch X X X —
(incremental)
For details of extended functions, see "Chapter 7 FREQUENCY COUNTERS" and "Chapter 8
CAM SWITCHES."
6-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 189 2012/03/15 17:25:31

FREQUENCY COUNTERS
This chapter describes how high-speed counter functions can be
used for frequency counters. 7
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
7-1 Frequency Counters ...........................................................7-2
7-2 Specified Frequency Pulse Output ................................... 7-5
7-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 190 2012/03/15 17:25:31

7-1 Frequency Counters

With the KV-700, you can select between the frequency counter function and use as a tachometer
for frequency counters.
Frequency Counter Functions

Internally, operation is started by using CTH0 to turn control relay CR2500 ON, and the measure-
ment results (Hz/rpm) are output to control memories CM1480 and CM1481. Input 0004 is used for
the A phrase or pulse input, and input 0006 is used for the B phase, direction input or pulse input.
When single-phase, w/out direction is set, input 0006 is ignored.
The frequency counter functions cannot be used simultaneously with CTH0 on the ladder program
and the cam switch function (incremental).
■ Devices used by the frequency counter
7 Control relays
Control Memory Description
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
CR2500 Frequency counter operation ON: Execute. OFF: Do not execute.

CR2501* 1
OFF Signle-phase, ON Signle-phase, OFF ON
2-phase 1X 2 pulses
CR2502*1 OFF W/out direction OFF W/ direction ON ON
CR2503 Frequency counter (Hz)/tachometer (rpm) selection
ON: Tachometer OFF: Frequency counter
CR2504 Selection of tachometer (rpm) measurement method
ON: Measure from time of a single rotation OFF: Measure from pulse interval
*1 For details on count methods, see " High-speed counters" (page 6-8).
When CR2504 is turned ON, the speed of rotation (rpm) can be measured even on rotating bodies
that are not capable of inputting pulses at equal intervals.
Control memories
Control Memory Description
CM1480 Measurement result (lower)
CM1481 Measurement result (upper)
CM1482 Number of pulses per rotation (when tachometer rpm is selected) 0 to 65535
CM1483 Average processing scan count (0 to 65535). However, when 0, the count is set to
100 scan average.
Measurement results are stored to CM1480 and CM1481 (32 bits) with a sign (2's complement).
■ Data update cycle

The frequency update cycle is as follows. Note, however, that the update cycle will become less
than "scan time x CM1483 (average processing scan count)".
• When the frequency counter function is used (CR2503 OFF)
The frequency is updated at each pulse interval. As the measurement unit is Hz, "0Hz" is
displayed when there is no pulse input for one second.
• When the tachometer function is used (CR2503 ON)
When CR2504 is OFF, the pulse interval is measured at each pulse input to calculate the speed
of rotation (rpm). If the pulse interval is one second or more, the speed becomes 0 rpm.
When CR2504 is ON, the speed of rotation (rpm) is calculated at each rotation (each number
of pulses set at CM1482). If a single rotation takes 1.5 seconds or more, the speed becomes
0 rpm.
7-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 191 2012/03/15 17:25:31

■ Flow of processing
• When the frequency counter (Hz) is used (CR2503 OFF)
The time between external input pulses set at control relays CR2501 and CR2502
is measured continuously.
↓
The frequency is calculated from the time between pulses by END processing.
Frequency (Hz) = 1/time between pulses
↓
The measurement results are stored to CM1480 and CM1481.
• When the tachometer (rpm) is used, CR2503 is ON, and CR2504 is OFF
The time between external input pulses set at control relays CR2501 and CR2502
is measured continuously.
↓
7
The speed of rotation is calculated from the time between pulses and the number
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
of pulses per single rotation set to CM1482 by END processing.
Speed of rotation (rpm) = 60/(time between pulses x number of pulses per
single rotation)
↓
• When the tachometer (rpm) is used, CR2503 is ON, and CR2504 is ON

The number of external input pulses set at control relays CR2501 and CR2502
is counted, the time when this number becomes equal to the number of pulses
specified at CM1482 is continuously measured.
↓
The speed of rotation is calculated from the time between the specified number
of pulses by END processing.
Speed of rotation (rpm) = 60/(time taken for one rotation)
↓
Note: • When the frequency counter function is used, the HSP instruction or control
relays must be used to set the input time constant to 10µs. (Measurement
is possible to 40 kHz/single-phase (at 24 V), 30 kHz/2-phase (24 V). At 5
V, see page 1-8.)
• The frequency counter cannot be used when CTH0 is programmed in the
ladder.
• Do not manipulate control relays relating to CTH0, CTC0, CTC1, and the
cam switch function (incremental type).
• The CTH0 and cam switch function (incremental type) cannot be used
when the frequency counter is used.
7-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 192 2012/03/15 17:25:31

At encoder input A phase 0004, B phase 0006

[Example]
To store the frequency (Hz) to CR2002 HSP
DM0000 and DM0001 0004
HSP
0006
CR2002 CR2501 CR2502 CR2503

RES SET RES
00000 CR2500
CR2002 MOV.D
CM1480 DM00000
END
ENDH
7
At encoder input A phase 0004, B phase 0006, number of pulses per rotation 256
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
[Example]
To store the speed of rotation (rpm) CR2002 HSP
to DM0000 and DM0001 0004
HSP
0006
CR2002 CR2501 CR2502 CR2503 CR2504 #00256

RES SET SET SET DW
CM1482
00000 CR2500
CR2002 MOV.D
CM1480 DM00000
END
ENDH
7-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 193 2012/03/15 17:25:31

7-2 Specified Frequency Pulse Output

This section describes the specified frequency output function.
Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function

Internally, CTH1 is used to output the pulse of frequency (Hz) specified at control
memories CM1490 and CM1491 from output relay 0501. When the output frequency
value is written to CM1490 and CM1491, and control relay CR2414 is turned ON, pulse
output is started. The output pulse duty is about 50%.
This function cannot be used simultaneously with CTH1 on the ladder program.
■ Devices used by the specified frequency pulse output

Control relays
Special Auxiliary Relay Description
CR2414 Specified frequency pulse output
ON: Execute. OFF: Do not execute.
7
Forcibly turned OFF when an error occurs.
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
CR2415 Specified frequency pulse output error flag
Turns ON when CM1490 and CM1491 is other than 0 to
100,000.
Control memories
Data Memory Description
CM1490, 1491 Specified frequency pulse output Write setting value
(lower) (upper)
■ Setting method
• Set the output frequency (Hz) to CM1490 and CM1491. The output frequency can
be set within the range 0 Hz to 100 kHz (0 to 100000).
• Pulse output is performed for the duration that control relay CR2414 is ON. When
CR2414 turns OFF, pulse output is turned OFF.
• When a frequency that is not compatible with pulse output is specified, the control
relay CR2415 error relay is activated, to turn control relay CR2414 OFF and stop
pule output.
Note: Output stop/start and frequency change processing are executed at the end
of each scan.
Important: When the specified frequency pulse output function is used, CTH1 and
control relays CR2200 to CR2215 cannot be used.
7-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 194 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Specified frequency pulse output

[Example]
To output pulse from 501 according CR2002 MOV.D
to the values set to DM0000 and DM00000 CM1490
DM0001 00000 CR2414

SET
END
ENDH
Synchronized control
[Example]
At encoder input A phase 0004, B CR2008 CR2501 CR2502 CR2503 CR2500 CR2414
7
RES SET RES SET SET
phase 0006
CR2002 MOV.D
Synchronous control is made pos- CM1480 CM1490
FREQUENCY COUNTERS
sible by combining the frequency

counter function and specified fre- END
quency pulse output function.

ENDH
7-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 195 2012/03/15 17:25:31

8-1 Cam Switch Function
CAM SWITCHES
This chapter describes how high-speed counter functions can be
used for cam switch functions.
CAM SWITCHES
8-1 Cam Switch Function ......................................................... 8-2
8-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 196 2012/03/15 17:25:31


This section describes the cam switch function.
Cam Switch Function

The cam switch function has two modes: a cam switch mode for connecting an encoder, and a multi-level
comparator mode (16-bit) for comparing data memory values to multiple levels. In the cam switch mode,
an incremental type and an absolute type (gray code) encoder can be used.
When the cam switch mode is used, use the HSP instruction or the control relays to set the input time
constant to 10 µs.
If a wrong setting value is set to the control memory, a setting error will occur, CR2510 will turn ON, and
the error No. will be stored to the CM1405.
Set control relay CR2508 (operation start relay) as a differential type.
■ Cam switch function device specifications

Control relays
Attribute
8 Device No. R: Read only
Blank: R/W
Function
CAM SWITCHES
CR1814 Selection of incremental type/absolute type encoder

ON: Absolute (gray code)
OFF: Incremental
CR1815 In operation relay (operation stops when OFF)
CR2508 Operation start relay
CR2509 R Output response relay*
CR2510 R Setup error relay. Error No. is entered to CM1405.
* This control relay turns ON when the cam switch output ON/OFF time is shorter than the scan time,
and a response to the output was not possible.
Control memories
• When an absolute encoder is connected (when CR1814 is ON), also set CM1403.
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1400 Specifies the leading output relay No.*
CM1401 Comparison value in multi-level comparator mode
CM1402 Resolution of a single cycle of connected encoder. Specify "#65535" when the
multi-level comparator mode is used.
CM1403 Specifies the leading input relay No. when an absolute type encoder is used*
CM1404 R Current angle (stored in 0.1 degree units)
CM1405 R Error No.
:
CM1409
CM1410 Angle setting value where output relay +0 turns ON
CM1411 Angle setting value where output relay +0 turns OFF
: :
* Specify the leading relay No. of the channel.
8-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 197 2012/03/15 17:25:31

The following describes error Nos. and their details.

CM1405 Details of error Nos.
No. Item Description
1 Leading input relay The value of the leading input relay No. (CM1403) when setting use of the absolute
specification error encoder (CR1814 ON) in the cam switch mode is wrong. Specify the leading relay
No. of the channel on the input relay.
2 Leading output relay The value in the leading output relay No. (CM1400) specification is wrong.
specification error Specify the leading channel No. on the output relay.
3 Angle setting error The value of the angle setting value (CM1410 to CM1473) exceeds the range 0
to 3599.
4 Resolution setting The value of the resolution setting (CM1402) when setting use of the absolute
error encoder (CR1814 ON) is wrong. "0" was set when using an incremental encoder.
5 CTH0 in use High-speed counter No.0 (CTH0) is already in use in the ladder program.
6 Frequency counter in The frequency counter function is in use at the same time.
use
When "absolute" is selected, values other than those determined for the number of pulses per cycle that
are stored in CM1402 result in an error.
Specify one of the following.
Available resolutions: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768 8
CAM SWITCHES
Note: • When an incremental encoder is used, CTH0 cannot be used.
• When the cam switch function is used, 32 relays are occupied regardless of whether the relay is used or
not starting with the relay No. specified by CM1400, and the relays cannot be used for other applications.
• When the cam switch function (incremental type) is used, CTH0 and the frequency counter function cannot
be used as the input terminal is used as a cam switch.
• The cam switch function cannot be used when CTH0 is programmed in the ladder for an incremental type
encoder.
• Do not manipulate control relays relating to CTH0, CTC0, CTC1, and the frequency counter function when
an incremental type encoder is used.
• When the cam switch function starts to operate, the scan time is extended by a maximum of 5 ms.
• The state of the cam switch function in operation relay CR1815 is held even if the mode is changed (RUN
to PROG or PROG to RUN) or the power is turned OFF.
• The relay ON/OFF state is checked or updated by END processing.
• When an incremental encoder is used in the cam switch mode, and the encoder operated while the power
was OFF, a deviation will occur for the duration from when the power is turned ON up to input of the next
Z phase.
• Counting of encoder pulses is not performed while the power is OFF in the incremental cam switch
mode.
(Counting is performed even in the PROG mode when the power is ON.)
Important: When an incremental encoder is used in the cam switch mode, and the encoder operated while the
power was OFF, a deviation will occur for the duration from when the power is turned ON up to input
of the next Z phase.
■ Cam switch operation chart

↑↓
↓: Cam switch operation is executed according to
ladder program.
Operation
start relay ↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed automatically by
CR2508 KV-700.
In operation Description: When the operation start relay CR2508 turns
relay ON, KV-700 recognizes this to automatically turn
CR1815
the operation start relay CR2508 OFF, and turns the
Cam switch
Stop Execution Stop
"in operation" relay CR1815 ON to set the cam
function
switch function execution mode.
When the "in operation" relay CR1815 is turned
OFF, the cam switch function is stopped.
8-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 198 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Cam Switch Mode (absolute encoder)

Connect an absolute encoder to virtually execute cam operation.
32 (bit 5), 64 (bit 6), 128 (bit 7), 256 (bit 8), 512 (bit 9), 1024 (bit 10), 2048 (bit 11), 4096 (bit 12), 8192 (bit
13), 16384 (bit 14), and 32768 (bit 15) resolution gray codes can be used on absolute encoders. Specify
the resolution at CM1402.
Specify the absolute encoder's leading input relay No. at CM1403. (0th bit is connected to the leading
relay.)
Specify the leading relay No. to be output for cam switch output in CM1400. The 32 relays starting from
the relay specified by CM1400 are reserved for output, and so must not be used for other applications.
Be sure to specify the leading relay No. of each channel to CM1400 and CM1403. For example, when
connecting to channel 300, specify "30000", and when connecting to channel 500, specify "50000".
Each of the output relays turn ON/OFF once at each rotation. Note, however, that when multiple ON/OFF
switching is required in a single rotation, each of the relays is ORed on the ladder program.
■ Devices used in the cam switch mode (absolute)

Control relays
8 Device No.
Attribute
R: Read only Function
CAM SWITCHES
Blank: R/W
OFF: Incremental
CR2509 R Output response relay
Control memories
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1400 Leading output relay No.*1
CM1402 Resolution of a single rotation of connected encoder*2
CM1403 Leading connected input relay No. of absolute encoder
CM1404 R Current angle (stored in 0.1 degree units)
CM1405 R Error No.
CM1410 Angle setting value (0.1 degree units) where output relay +0 turns ON *3
CM1411 Angle setting value (0.1 degree units) where output relay +0 turns OFF *3
: :
*1: Specify the leading relay No. of the channel.

*2: Specify one of 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768.
*3: Specify in range 0 to 3599.
8-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 199 2012/03/15 17:25:31

■ How to specify items in the cam switch function

1. Specify the leading relay No. to be output for cam switch output in CM1400.
Be sure to specify the leading relay No. of the channel as the relay No. to be specified.
[Example] 50000, 60100
X 50010, 60105
2. Specify the number of pulses for a single rotation of the connected encoder in CM1402.
Specify from the following number of pulses (resolution):
32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768
3. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 3599 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 1st relay turns ON in CM1410.
4. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 3599 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 1st relay turns OFF in CM1411.
5. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 3599 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 2nd relay turns ON in CM1412.
6. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 3599 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 2nd relay turns OFF in CM1413.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the number of relays (maximum 32) to be used.
8. Turn control relay CR2508 ON.
When the cam switch function enters the execution mode, CR2508 automatically turns OFF, and CR1815 turns
ON.
9. To stop operation, turn CR1815 OFF.
Operation
↑↓
↓: Cam switch operation is executed according to
start relay ladder program.
CR2508
In operation
↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed automatically by 8
relay
KV-700.
CAM SWITCHES
CR1815
Description: When the operation start relay CR2508 turns
Cam switch
Stop Execution Stop ON, KV-700 recognizes this to automatically turn
function
the operation start relay CR2508 OFF, and turns the
"in operation" relay CR1815 ON to set the cam
switch function execution mode.
[Example] In the case of an absolute encoder
Example of resolution 256 set to a single rotation of the connected encoder
CR2002 #10000 #00256 #31000 CR1814 Set the input time constant of the Input Unit to which the
DW DW DW SET encoder is connected to 25 µsec on Unit Editor.
CM1400 CM1402 CM1403
CR2002 #00100 #00200
DW DW No.10000 is turned ON at 10.0 to 20.0 degrees.
CM1410 CM1411
#00300 #00400
CM1412 CM1413
#00500 #00600
CM1414 CM1415
#00700 #00800
CM1416 CM1417
#00900 #01000
CM1418 CM1419
#01100 #01200
CM1420 CM1421
00000 CR2508
SET
00001 CR1815
RES
10000 30000
10001 30001
10002 30002
10003 30003
10004 30004
10005 30005
END
ENDH
8-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 200 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Cam Switch Mode (incremental encoder)

Connect an incremental encoder to virtually execute cam operation.
Connect an incremental encoder to CTH0, and count the number of pulses in the 2X mode, Connect input
0004 (A phase), input 0006 (B phase) and input 0008 (Z phase). When the count reaches the specified
angle, the relay is turned ON/OFF.
32 continuous relays are controlled by the cam switch function. Specify the leading relay at CM1400. Note,
however, that when multiple ON/OFF switching is required in a single rotation, each of the relays is ORed
on the ladder program.
Specify the leading relay No. to be output for cam switch output in CM1400. The 32 relays starting from
the relay specified by CM1400 are reserved for output, and so must not be used for other applications.
■ Devices used in the cam switch mode (incremental)

Control relays
Attribute
Blank: R/W
8 ON: Absolute (gray code)
OFF: Incremental
CAM SWITCHES

Control memories
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1402 Number of pulses for a single rotation of connected encoder x 2
CM1404 R Current angle
CM1405 R Error No.
CM1410 Angle setting value where output relay +0 turns ON*2 (0.1 degree units)
CM1411 Angle setting value where output relay +0 turns OFF*2 (0.1 degree units)
: :
*1: Specify the leading relay No. of the channel

[Example] 50000, 60000
X 50010, 60005
2. Specify the "number of pulses for a single rotation of the connected encoder x 2" in CM1402.
3. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 65534 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 1st relay turns ON in
CM1410.
8-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 201 2012/03/15 17:25:31

4. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 65534 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 1st relay turns OFF in
CM1411.
5. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 65534 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 2nd relay turns ON in
CM1412.
6. Specify the angle (within range 0 to 65534 in 0.1 degree units) at which the 2nd relay turns OFF in
CM1413.
When the cam switch function enters the execution mode, CR2508 automatically turns OFF, and
CR1815 turns ON.
↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed according to
Operation
CR2508
↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed automati-
In operation
relay cally by KV-700.
CR1815
Description: When the operation start relay CR2508
Cam switch
turns ON, KV-700 recognizes this to automati-
8
function Stop Execution Stop
cally turn the operation start relay CR2508
OFF, and turns the "in operation" relay CR1815
CAM SWITCHES
ON to set the cam switch function execution
mode.
[Example] In the case of an incremental encoder

Example of resolution 720 set to a single rotation of the connected encoder
CR2002 #30000 #01440 CR1814

DW DW RES
CM1400 CM1402
CR2002 #00100 #00200
CM1410 CM1411
#00300 #00400
CM1412 CM1413
#00500 #00600
CM1414 CM1415
#00700 #00800
CM1416 CM1417
#00900 #01000
CM1418 CM1419
#01100 #01200
CM1420 CM1421
00000 CR2508
SET
00001 CR1815
RES
10000 30000
10001 30001
10002 30002
10003 30003
10004 30004
10005 30005
END
8-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 202 2012/03/15 17:25:31

Multi-level Comparator Mode

The cam switch function can be partially changed to enable multi-level comparator operation.
The cam switch function can be used as a multi-level comparator by using the value entered at CM1401
instead of the encoder value of the cam switch function.
■ Devices used by the multi-level comparator

Control relays
Attribute
Blank: R/W
OFF: Incremental
8
Control memories
CAM SWITCHES
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1401 Comparison value in multi-level comparator mode
CM1402 Number of pulses for a single rotation of connected encoder*2
CM1405 R Error No.
CM1410 Setting value where output relay +0 turns ON*3
CM1411 Setting value where output relay +0 turns OFF*3
: :
*1: Specify the leading relay No. of the channel.
*2: To use the cam switch function in the multi-level comparator mode, enter "#65535".

[Example] 50000, 60000
X 50010, 60005
2. Enter the value to be compared in CM1401 and "65535" in CM1402.
By entering "65535", the cam switch function enters the multi-level comparator mode.
3. Specify the value (within range 0 to 65534) at which the 1st relay turns ON in CM1410.
4. Specify the value (within range 0 to 65534) at which the 1st relay turns OFF in CM1411.
5. Specify the value (within range 0 to 65534) at which the 2nd relay turns ON in CM1412.
6. Specify the value (within range 0 to 65534) at which the 2nd relay turns OFF in CM1413.
8-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 203 2012/03/15 17:25:32


When the cam switch function enters the execution mode, CR2508 automatically turns OFF, and
CR1815 turns ON.
↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed according to
Operation
CR2508
↑ ↓: Cam switch operation is executed automati-
In operation
relay cally by KV-700.
CR1815
Description: When the operation start relay CR2508
Cam switch
function Stop Execution Stop turns ON, KV-700 recognizes this to automati-
cally turn the operation start relay CR2508
OFF, and turns the "in operation" relay CR1815
ON to set the cam switch function execution
mode.
8
[Example] In the case of a multi-level comparator
CAM SWITCHES
Example where the value of DM00000 is compared with the setting value to turn the output
ON/OFF
CR2002 #10000 #65535 CR1814
DW DW RES
CM1400 CM1402
CR2002 #00100 #00200
DW DW No.30000 is turned ON by #100 to 200.
CM1410 CM1411
#00300 #00400
CM1412 CM1413
#00500 #00600
CM1414 CM1415
#00700 #00800
CM1416 CM1417
#00900 #01000
CM1418 CM1419
#01100 #01200
CM1420 CM1421
CR2002 MOV
DM00000 CM1401
00000 CR2508
SET
00001 CR1815
RES
10000 30000
10001 30001
10002 30002
10003 30003
10004 30004
10005 30005
END
8-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 204 2012/03/15 17:25:32

8
CAM SWITCHES
8-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 205 2012/03/15 17:25:32

9-1 About Positioning/Speed Control
MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL)

This chapter describes functions for outputting pulses to a stepping
motor or a servo motor, and for controlling positioning.
9-1 About Positioning/Speed Control ..................................... 9-2

9
9-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing Instructions ........ 9-4

9-3 Other Positioning Devices ............................................... 9-19
9-4 Positioning Instructions ...................................................9-27
9-5 Positioning Control Reference Examples ...................... 9-36
9-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 206 2012/03/15 17:25:32


The KV-700 CPU Unit has a pulse output function for positioning and speed control.
This function enables you to control stepping motors and pulse type AC servo motors.
This section describes how to use this function.
Outline of Positioning/Speed Control

The KV-700 CPU Unit can output pulses to output relays without being influenced by
the scan time. These pulses are used to perform positioning/speed control on two axes
in a trapezoidal control system.
■ Trapezoidal control
"Trapezoidal control" is an output function represented by a timing chart comprising
the startup speed, run speed and acceleration/deceleration times that forms a
trapezoid as shown below. Trapezoidal control is automatically performed if the
pulse frequency, startup speed, run speed and acceleration/deceleration times are
set in advance.
Frequency (Hz)
Target value/travel amount (number of output pulses)
9 Run speed
Start speed
(stop speed)
Time (ms)
Acceleration Deceleration
time time
■ Parameter setup
Settings such as startup speed, run speed, and acceleration/deceleration time that
are set for trapezoidal control are called "parameters." Set parameters using KV
BUILDER's "Edit CPU positioning parameters" function.
Parameter setup flow

Set up parameters on KV BUILDER.
(1) Initial parameter setup
Make a ladder program using positioning in-

(2) Programming of ladder program
structions.
When the ladder program is executed, posi-

(3) Execution of ladder program tioning control is started according to the
parameters set at (1).
The content of parameters can be directly
No Change parameter
settings during ladder program changed by the DW instruction, etc. without
execution? using KV BUILDER.
Yes
Change parameters
9-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 207 2012/03/15 17:25:32

There are two types of parameters: point parameters and system parameters.
Point parameters
These parameters are the basic parameters for trapezoidal control as they set
movement destination points (positions), run/startup speed, and acceleration/decel-
eration time.
"Point Parameters" page 9-4
System parameters
These parameters are for setting sensor input, pulse output, comparators, and zero
return/jog operation.
"System Parameters [I/O Setup]" page 9-9
"System Parameters [Comparator Setup]" page 9-13
"System parameters [Zero Return/Jog]" page 9-15
■ Main functions
• Point parameters for 32 points can be set in advance on KV BUILDER.
If more than 32 points are set, the ladder program overwrites the contents of
control memory (CM). 9

"Positioning Control Exceeding 32 Points" page 9-43
• You can choose from two control modes: positioning control and speed control.
Both incremental values and absolute values can be set for target values/travel
amounts.
"Operation mode" page 9-5
• Pulses can be output to two axes and each of their frequencies can be set within
the range to 50 Hz to 100 KHz.
• Both 1 pulse mode and 2 pulse mode are supported as pulse output modes.
Select the output mode best suited to the type of motor driver that is connected.
"Output mode selection" page 9-12
• Pulse output is started by the PLSX and PLSY instructions.
Pulse output can be performed just by executing the PLSX and PLSY instructions
if parameters are set in advance on KV BUILDER.
• Zero return can be performed by the ORGX and ORGY instructions.
• Jog operation can be performed by the JOGX and JOGY instructions.
[Tip]
Parameters are stored in control memories CM2000 to CM2379. So, a ladder
program for 1000 or more positioning points can be made by rewriting the content
of control memory.
"Positioning Control Exceeding 32 Points" page 9-43
Note: The above functions are set using KV BUILDER’s "Edit CPU positioning
parameters" function.
9-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 208 2012/03/15 17:25:32

9-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing Instructions

This section describes how to set up parameters and execute instructions.
Parameter Setup
Set parameters at "Edit CPU positioning parameters" on KV BUILDER.
1 Select {Tool (T)} from Menu.
2 Select {Edit CPU positioning parameters (I)} from the pulldown menu.
The dialog box is displayed.
(Shortcut key is 3, and shortcut icon is )

9 (The menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button can also be selected from
Menu.)
Point Parameters (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1)
Name of Function Setting Range Default See

Page
(1) No. 0 to 31 9-5
(2) Operation mode Positioning (incremental) Positioning 9-5
Positioning (absolute) (incremental)
Speed control CW
Speed control CCW
(3) Target value/travel -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 9-6
(4) Startup speed 50 to 65535 200 9-7
(5) Acceleration/decelera- 0 to 4000 500 9-7
tion time
(6) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000 9-7
(7) Stop sensor use ON/OFF OFF 9-8
(8) Stop sensor pulses 0 to 65535 0 9-8
Once parameters are set, they are stored to CM (control memory) on the CPU. Point
parameters are used for both X- and Y-axes.
"Device Lists [Point parameters]" page 9-25
9-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 209 2012/03/15 17:25:32

No. Setting storage

location
0 .... CM2060 to CM2067

1 .... CM2070 to CM2077
2 .... CM2080 to CM2087
3 .... CM2090 to CM2097
...
...
When you mark the checkbox,

the display switches to that for the stor-
age location as shown on the right.
No.
0 to 31
Point Nos. are used as operands for the PLSX and PLSY instructions.
Execution condition 01
PLSX
When the above ladder rung is executed, pulses are generated according to the point
parameter of point No.1.
Operation mode 9
With position control, axes are made to travel to the target value (i.e. by a specified

travel amount) to the position where the workpiece is placed.
With speed control, axes are made to travel in the direction in which the workpiece is
specified until the stop sensor turns ON.
Positioning (incremental)
In this mode, positioning is controlled by incremental values.
Specify the distance from the current position of the workpiece to its travel destination
as the travel amount. For example, to move a workpiece at position A in the figure below
to position B, set the travel amount to "+100". Next, to move the workpiece from position
B to position C, set "+200". Finally, to return the workpiece from position C to position
B, set "-200".
A B C
+100 +200
-200
Coordinates
0 (origin) 100 200 300
Positioning (absolute)
In this mode, positioning is controlled by absolute values.
Specify the distance from the origin to the workpiece travel destination as the target
value. For example, to move a workpiece at position A in the figure below to position
B, set the target value to "+100". Next, to move the workpiece from position B to position
C, set "+300". Finally, to return the workpiece from position C to position B, set "+100".
A B C
100 300
100
Coordinates
0 (origin) 100 200 300
9-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 210 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Speed control CW
Pulses are continuously output in the CW (clockwise) direction at the specified speed
regardless of the number of output pulses.
Speed
CW
Time
CCW
Speed control CCW

Pulses are continuously output in the CCW (counterclockwise) direction at the
specified speed regardless of the number of output pulses.
CW
Time
CCW
Speed
Parameter storage location: This parameter is stored as follows to bits 0 and 1 of CM2066
+ (point No. x 10)
9 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit1 Bit0 Description

00000000000000 0 0 Positioning (incremental)
0 1 Positioning (absolute)
1 0 Speed control CW
1 1 Speed control CCW
Target value/travel amount

The position of the travel destination is called the "target value" (or travel amount).
When positioning (absolute) is selected as the operation mode, this setting becomes
the "target value." When positioning (incremental) is selected as the operation mode,
this setting becomes the "travel amount." The target value and travel cannot be set
when speed control CW/CCW are selected as the operation mode.
Frequency (Hz)
Run speed
Start speed
(stop speed)
Time (ms)
time time
Setting range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Parameter storage location: CM2061 + (point No. x 10) • CM2060 + (point No. x 10)
Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits
9-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 211 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Startup speed
When positioning control is performed, set the output pulse speed at startup. This
setting is for ensuring smooth start of motor operation.
Setting range: 50 to 65535 (pulses per second) (Note, that the start speed
must be set lower than the run speed.)
Parameter storage location: CM2062 + (point No. x 10)
Acceleration/deceleration time
Acceleration time: This is the time it takes for startup speed to reach run speed.
Setting a smaller value results in more sudden acceleration and a
shorter travel time.
Deceleration time: This is the time it takes for run speed to reach stop speed. Setting
a smaller value results in more sudden deceleration and a shorter
travel time.
On the KV-700, the acceleration time and deceleration time are set to the same values.
Setting range: 0 to 4000 (msec) Speed

When "0" is specified, ac-
celeration and deceleration Run speed
9
change as shown in the fig-

ure on the right.
0 Time

An error occurs when the acceleration/deceleration time is set
to "0" and the operation frequency is a value greater than
65535.
Run speed
When positioning control is performed, set the speed at which pulses are output to the
motor during operation.
Setting range: 50 to 100000 (pulses per second) (Note, that the run speed
must be set to the start speed or greater.)
Parameter storage location: CM2065 + (point No. x 10) • ( CM2064 + (point No. x 10)
Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits
Note: Operation is as shown in the following chart when the startup speed is set the
same as the run speed.
Speed
Run (startup) speed
0 Time
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration times are ignored.
9-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 212 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Use of stop sensor

Set use of the stop sensor.
OFF ...................... The stop sensor is not used.
ON ........................ Pulse output stops after the number of pulses set at Specified
number of stop sensor pulses below are output.
Parameter storage location: This parameter is stored as follows to bit 4 ofCM2066 + (point
No. x 10).
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit4 Description
00000000000 0000
0 Do not use stop sensor.
1 Use stop sensor.
Specified number of stop sensor pulses

When Use of stop sensor above is set to "ON", pulse output stops after the number of
pulses set here are output.
Speed Stop sensor input ON

Deceleration
9
Specified number
of pulses
When the specified number of pulses is set to "0", pulse output stops immediately when
stop sensor input turns ON.
The deceleration time is ignored.
Immediate stop
When the specified number of pulses is set to "65535" (maximum value), the motor
decelerates from the moment that stop sensor input turns ON, and pulse output stops
after the deceleration time has elapsed.

Deceleration time
Setting range: 0 to 65535

9-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 213 2012/03/15 17:25:32

System Parameters [I/O Setup]
(1)
Storage location
device name
(3)
(1)
(5)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(11)
Storage location
device name
9
Name of Function Setting Range Default See Page

(1) Axis X-axis, Y-axis — —
Input setting X-axis [CM2000/2001]
(IN000 to IN003 setting) Y-axis [CM2030/2031]
(2) Home sensor X-axis CR3002 CR3002 9-10
IN000 to IN003
Y-axis CR3102 CR3102 9-10
IN000 to IN003
(3) Home sensor polarity X-axis NO/NC NO 9-10
Y-axis NO/NC NO 9-10
(4) Stop sensor X-axis CR3003 CR3003 9-10
IN000 to IN003
Y-axis CR3103 CR3103 9-10
IN000 to IN003
(5) Stop sensor polarity X-axis NO/NC NO 9-10
(6) Limit switch CW X-axis CR3000 (fixed) CR3000 9-11
Y-axis CR3100 (fixed) CR3100 9-11
(7) Limit switch CW polarity X-axis NO/NC NO 9-11
(8) Limit switch CCW X-axis CR3001 (fixed) CR3001 9-11
Y-axis CR3101 (fixed) CR3101 9-11
(9) Limit switch CCW polarity X-axis NO/NC NO 9-11
Output setting
(10) Output mode selection 1 pulse output, 2 pulse output 1 pulse output 9-12
(11) Zero return direction CCW, CW CCW 9-12
9-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 214 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Home sensor
The "home" is the position that is used as the reference for position control. A home
sensor is installed at the position defined as the axis origin.
CR3002 (CR3102) ......... Sets CR3002 (X-axis) and CR3102 (Y-axis) as the home
sensor.
IN000 to IN003 ............... Sets input relays 00000 to 00003 as the home sensor.
NO/NC ............................ Sets the home sensor input logic.
When IN000 to IN003 have been set, zero return is performed taking the preset input
as the home sensor input.
To use inputs other than IN000 to IN003 as the home sensor input, set this parameter
to CR3002 (CR3102), and turn CR3002 (CR3102) ON and OFF by the ladder program.
[Example]
When using input relay 30000 as the X- 30000 CR3002
axis home sensor input
9 Parameter storage location: This parameter is stored to CM2000 and CM2001.
CM2000 setting: " I/O setting details" page 9-23

CM2001 setting: " Sensor enable details" page 9-24
Stop sensor
If a moving object moves to the stop sensor during operation and causes the stop
sensor to turn ON, the workpiece decelerates to a stop from that position, or
decelerates to a stop after moving by a predetermined distance (specified number of
stop sensor pulses).
CR3003 (CR3103) ......... Sets CR3003 (X-axis) and CR3103 (Y-axis) as the stop
sensor.
IN000 to IN003 ............... Sets input relays 00000 to 00003 as the stop sensor.
NO/NC ............................ Sets the stop sensor input logic.
When IN000 to IN003 have been set, workpiece movement stops taking the preset
input as the stop sensor input.
To use inputs other than IN000 to IN003 as the stop sensor input, set this parameter
to CR3003 (CR3103), and turn CR3003 (CR3103) ON and OFF by the ladder program.
[Example]
When using input relay 30001 as the X- 30001 CR3003
axis stop sensor input
Parameter storage location: This parameter is stored to CM2000 and CM2001.
CM2000 setting: " I/O setting details" page 9-23
CM2001 setting: " Sensor enable details" page 9-24
9-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 215 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Limit switch CW/Limit switch CCW

Limit switches are installed at both ends of the axis along which moving objects and
the workpiece can move.
NO/NC ............................ Set limit switch input logic.
The limit switch installed at the end of CW travel is called "limit switch CW."
CW movement
CCW CW
Forward rotation (current coordinate increment direction)

Stop sensor
Limit switch CW
The limit switch installed at the end of CCW travel is called "limit switch CCW."
CCW movement
CCW CW
Reverse rotation (current coordinate decrement direction)

Stop sensor
Limit switch CCW
This is fixed to CR3000 (CR3100) and CR3001 (CR3101).

Turn CR3000 (CR3100) and CR3001 (CR3101) ON and OFF by input relays 9
connected to actual limit switches.

Parameter storage location: This parameter is stored as follows:
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Axis Storage Location Bit10 Description
0000000000000000
X CM2001 0 CW limit SW NO
Y CM2031 1 CW limit SW NC
Bit11 Description
0 CCW limit SW NO
1 CCW limit SW NC
[Example]
When using the X-axis CW limit switch for 30002 CR3000
use connected to input relay 30002, and
the CCW limit switch for use connected to
30003 CR3001
input relay 30003
When a limit switch is turned ON, a limit error occurs, and pulse output is stopped.
Remove the cause of the error, and reset error relays CR3007/CR3107 to clear the
error.
• For safety's sake, be sure to use NC (normally closed) type limit switches. If NO
CAUTION (normally open) type limit switches are used, the limit switch may not operate if a line
break occurs, which may cause a hazard.
• When installation of positioning devices is completed, be sure to check that the limit
switches function properly.
• Allow sufficient travel allowance for the limit switch detection dog to prevent the
workpiece from overtraveling the limit switch when the motor makes an emergency
stop.
9-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 216 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Output mode selection

Select the output mode. Select from 00500 and 00501 for the X-axis, and from 00502
and 00503 for the Y-axis.
1 pulse output ............... Sets the output mode to 1 pulse output.

2 pulse output ............... Sets the output mode to 2 pulse output.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0000000000000000
X CM2000 0 1 pulse mode
Y CM2030 1 2 pulse mode
[Connection example]
1 axis connection
1 pulse output 2 pulse output
X-axis Pulse X-axis X-axis Forward rotation pulse X-axis

000500 000500
driver
driver
Motor
Motor
Direction of rotation Reverse rotation pulse
000501 000501
9 2 axis connection
1 pulse output 2 pulse output
X-axis X-axis X-axis X-axis

Pulse Forward rotation pulse

000500 000500
driver
driver
Motor
Motor
000501 000501
Y-axis Pulse Y-axis Y-axis Forward rotation pulse Y-axis

000502 000502
driver
driver
Motor
Motor
000503 000503
Zero return direction

Specifies the start direction for zero return.
CW ................................. Starts zero return in the CW direction.

CCW ............................... Starts zero return in the CCW direction.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0000000000000000
X CM2000 0 CCW
Y CM2030 1 CW
For details on zero return, see "Zero return locus" page 9-16.
For details on CW/CCW directions, see "Limit switch CW/Limit switch CCW" page 9-11.
9-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 217 2012/03/15 17:25:32

System Parameters [Comparator Setup]
(1)
(2)
(3) Storage location
device name
(4)
(5)
Name of Function Setting range Default See page

9

Comparator 0
(2) Function Disabled Disabled 9-14
Comparator stop sensor
CW software limit switch
CCW software limit switch
(3) Set value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 9-14
Comparator 1
(4) Function Disabled Disabled 9-14
Comparator stop sensor
CW software limit switch
CCW software limit switch
(5) Set value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 9-14
About comparator
During positioning control or speed control, the pulse that is output is counted as the
"current value." This current value can be compared with the setting values of (3) and
(5), and the same operation as that specified at (2) and (4) can be performed when
these values match.
9-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 218 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Function selection
Disabled ........................ No operation is performed according to the comparator
number.
Stop sensor .................. The same operation as input by the stop sensor is per-
formed.
Limit switch CW ........... The same operation as input by limit switch CW is per-
formed.
Limit switch CCW ......... The same operation as input by limit switch CCW is per-
formed.

Comparator 0
Axis Storage Location Operation at Current
Bit5 Bit4 Position Comparator 0
X CM2000 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Match
Y CM2030 0000000000000000
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Used as stop sensor
1 0 Used as CW limit switch
1 1 Used as CCW limit switch
Comparator 1
9 Axis Storage Location

Bit5 Bit4
Operation at Current
Position Comparator 1
X CM2000 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Match
Y CM2030 0000000000000000
0 0 Disabled
* When comparator 0 is set when the same function is set on comparators 0 and 1,
comparator 1 becomes invalid.
Set value
Set the value (comparator value) to be used for comparing the output pulse with the
"current value."
Setting range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Parameter storage location: X-axis Comparator 0 = CM2003/CM2002
Comparator 1 = CM2005/CM2004
Y-axis Comparator 0 = CM2033/CM2032
Comparator 1 = CM2035/CM2034
9-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 219 2012/03/15 17:25:32

System Parameters [Zero Return/Jog]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Storage location
(5) device name
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Name of Function Setting Range Default See Page

9

Zero return
(2) Start speed 50 to 65535 200 9-17
(3) Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 4000 500 9-17
(4) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000 9-17
Jog
(5) Start speed 50 to 65535 200 9-17
(6) Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 4000 500 9-17
(7) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000 9-17
CM defaults for changing setting values
(8) Change current values -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 9-18
(9) Change run speed 50 to 100000 0 9-18
About zero return

"Zero return" is the operation of physically returning a workpiece to its origin after it has
been moved. If a power interruption occurs during positioning, or an axis is manually
moved while the power is turned OFF, the actual position of the workpiece will no longer
match the position of the workpiece stored internally on KV-700.
Performing a zero return matches the internally stored current value to the actual
origin.
9-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 220 2012/03/15 17:25:32

■ Zero return locus

The locus of the axes during zero return varies as follows according to the position
of the axes when zero return is started. Even if either of the limit switches has turned
ON, unrestricted zero return is possible if the error has been cleared.
[Zero return direction] CW [Zero return direction] CCW

Start point Forward: CW from origin Start point Forward: CW from origin
CW
speed
Origin Start point

CCW Origin Start point CW CCW CW
Home return start speed [Home return

CCW start speed]
speed [Home return speed]
Origin sensor Origin sensor [Home return acceleration speed]

Start point Reverse: CCW from origin Start point Reverse: CCW from origin
Start point Origin

CCW Origin CW CCW CW
9 Start point
Origin sensor Origin sensor

Start point Origin

Start point
Wide origin sensor Wide origin sensor

Start point Within home sensor Start point Within home sensor
detection range detection range
Start point Origin

CCW Origin CW CCW Start point CW
9-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 221 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Start speed
Set the output pulse speed at startup for zero return and jog operation.
Setting range: 50 to 65535 (pulses per second) (Note, that the start speed
must be set lower than the run speed.)
Parameter storage location: Axis Storage Axis Storage
Location Location
Zero X CM2006 Jog X CM2010
return Y CM2036 operation Y CM2040
Acceleration/deceleration time
Acceleration time: This is the time it takes for start speed to reach zero return/jog run
speed. Setting a smaller value results in sudden acceleration and
a shorter travel time.
Deceleration time: This is the time is takes for zero return/jog run speed to each start
speed. Setting a smaller value results in sudden deceleration and
a shorter travel time.
On the KV-700, the acceleration time and deceleration time are set to the same values.
9
Setting range: 0 to 4000

Location Location
Zero X CM2007 Jog X CM2011
return Y CM2037 operation Y CM2041
Run speed
Set the number of pulses to be output to the motor during zero return and jog operation.
Note: Operation is as shown in the following chart when the start speed is set the
same as the run speed.
Speed
Run (startup) speed
0 Time
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration times are ignored.
Setting range: 50 to 100000 (2 words)

Location Location
Zero X CM2009 (upper)/ Jog X CM2013 (upper)/
return CM2008 (lower) operation CM2012 (lower)
Y CM2039 (upper)/ Y CM2043 (upper)/
CM2038 (lower) CM2042 (upper)
9-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 222 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Current value change setting (default setting)

During positioning control or speed control, the pulse that is output is counted as the
"current value."
When the current value change request relay turns ON during operation (level is
detected), the current value is changed to the value stored to control memory.
With the current value change setting, set the default to be stored to control memory.
Axis Corresponding Current Value No. of Control Memory for Storing

Change Request Relay Setting Value
X CR3011 CM2014, CM2015
Y CR3111 CM2044, CM2045
Run speed change setting value (default setting)

During speed control operation, operation is performed by the value (speed) set as the
run speed.
When the run speed change request relay turns ON during speed control operation
(level is detected), the run speed is changed to the value stored to control memory.
9 With the run speed change setting, set the default to be stored to control memory.
Axis Corresponding Run Speed Change No. of Control Memory for Storing
Request Relay Setting Value
X CR3012 CM2016, CM2017
Y CR3112 CM2046, CM2047
The acceleration speed is the same as the currently executing point No. setting.
9-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 223 2012/03/15 17:25:32

9-3 Other Positioning Devices

This section describes devices that are useful in positioning control other than control
relays used in the parameter setup.
Control Relays for Positioning Control

Zero return in progress [X-axis: CR3004, Y-axis: CR3104]
This control relay turns ON during zero return operation, and turns OFF when zero
return operation ends.
"Operation Timing Charts" page 9-21
Zero return completed [X-axis: CR3005, Y-axis: CR3105]

This control relay is set when zero return is completed, and is reset at the next pulse
output.
Error/clear error [X-axis: CR3007, Y-axis: CR3107]

This control relay turns ON when an error occurs. The error No. is stored to CM2024
(X-axis) and CM2054 (Y-axis).
9

The error state can be cleared by forcibly resetting this control relay by the ladder
program.
Warning/clear warning [X-axis: CR3008, Y-axis: CR3108]

This control relay turns ON when a warning occurs.
The warning state can be cleared by forcibly resetting this control relay by the ladder
program.
Pulse output in progress/emergency stop [X-axis: CR3009, Y-axis: CR3109]

This control relay turns ON during pulse output.
The emergency stop instruction is issued to generate an error state by forcibly resetting
this control relay by the ladder program.
Start of driver operation [X-axis: CR3010, Y-axis: CR3110]

Operation at the point No. currently stored to CM2025 (X-axis) and CM2055 (Y-axis)
is started at the up edge of this control relay.
This control relay turns ON during pulse output.
* Driver operation can be started without operating this relay by executing the PLSX
and PLSY instructions.
9-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 224 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Current value change request [X-axis: CR3011, Y-axis: CR3111]

The current value is changed (only when pulse output is stopped) when this control
relay turns ON.
The value to be changed must be stored in the control relay in advance.
"Current value change setting (default setting)" page 9-18
Operation Relay No. Control Memory for Storing Value to Change

X-axis current value CR3011 CM2014/CM2015
change request
Y-axis current value CR3111 CM2044/CM2045
change request
Run speed change request [X-axis: CR3012, Y-axis: CR3112]

The run speed is changed when this control relay turns ON during speed control.
The value to be changed must be stored in the control relay in advance.
"Run speed change setting value (default setting)" page 9-18
Operation Relay No. Control Memory for Storing Value to Change

X-axis run speed
9
CR3012 CM2016/CM2017
change request
Y-axis run speed CR3112 CM2046/CM2047
change request
Control Memories for Positioning Control

Operation point parameter No. (M code) [X-axis: CM2019, Y-axis: CM2049]
The point No. at which operation is started when the PLSX/PLSY, JOGX/JOGY, or
ORGX/ORGY instructions have been executed is stored to this control memory.
"1001" is stored when the JOG instruction is executed; "1000" is stored when the ORG
instruction is executed; and "65535" is stored when an error occurs.
Absolute management current position (PLS) [X-axis: CM2020/2021, Y-axis: CM2050/CM2051]

The current position is stored to this control memory.
Operation current speed [X-axis: CM2022/2023, Y-axis: CM2052/CM2053]

The current speed (Hz) is stored to this control memory.
Error code [X-axis: CM2024, Y-axis: CM2054]

The error code is stored to this control memory.
"Error Code" page 9-26
Specified point No. [X-axis: CM2025, Y-axis: CM2055]

This control memory is used in combination with TCHX/TCHY or CR3010/CR3110.
9-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 225 2012/03/15 17:25:32

X-axis Y-axis Description Attribute Number of

R: Read only Words
Blank: R/W
CM2019 CM2049 Operation point parameter No. (M code) 1
CM2020 CM2050 Absolute management current position (PLS) R 2
CM2021 CM2051
Status
CM2022 CM2052 Operation current speed 2

CM2023 CM2053
CM2024 CM2054 Error code 1
CM2025 CM2055 Specified point No. (for TCHX, TCHY, for X-axis: CR3010, Y-axis: 1
CR3110)
Operation Timing Charts

(1) (2) (3) (4)
Execution of PLSX0 instruction
Execution of PLSX1 instruction
Execution of ORGX instruction
Execution of JOG instruction

Emergency stop CR3009
9
during pulse output

*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
M code (in operation No.) CM2019
Zero return in progress CR3004
Zero return completed CR3005
(1) Executing the PLSX0 instruction starts pulse output, turns ON the pulse output in progress relay
CR3009, and writes operation point No.0 to CM2019.
(2) Executing the PLSX1 instruction starts pulse output, turns ON the pulse output in progress relay
CR3009, and writes operation point No.1 to CM2019.
(3) Executing the ORGX instruction starts zero return, turns ON the pulse output in progress relay
CR3009 and zero return in progress relay CR3004, and writes 1000 (zero return code) to CM2019.
(4) Executing the JOG instruction starts jog operation turns ON the pulse output in progress relay
CR3009, turns OFF the zero return completed relay CR3005, and writes 1001 (jog operation code)
to CM2019.
9-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 226 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Device Lists
System parameters and statuses
X-axis Y-axis Description Attribute Number of

R: Read only Words
Blank: R/W
CM2000 CM2030 I/O setting Home and stop sensor assignments 1
Sensor detection and operation settings
at comparator match
Output mode (1 pulse/ 2 pulses)
CM2001 CM2031 Sensor enable Origin/stop/limit switch enable selection 1
Origin/stop/limit switch polarity selection
CM2002 CM2032 Current value Software limits and frequency switching 2
CM2003 CM2033 comparator 0 timing in speed control mode
CM2004 CM2034 Current value 2
System Parameters
CM2005 CM2035 comparator 1

CM2006 CM2036 Zero return 1
CM2007 CM2037 Start speed setting 1
CM2008 CM2038 Acceleration/deceleration time setting 2
CM2009 CM2039 Run speed setting
CM2010 CM2040 Jog operation 1
9 CM2011 CM2041 Start speed setting 1
CM2012 CM2042 Acceleration/deceleration time setting 2
CM2013 CM2043 Run speed setting

CM2014 CM2044 Current value change setting value 2
CM2015 CM2045 Change by CR3011 for X-axis and by CR3111 for Y-axis
CM2016 CM2046 Run speed change setting value 2
CM2017 CM2047 Change by CR3012 for X-axis and by CR3112 for Y-axis
CM2019 CM2049 Operation point parameter No. 1
CM2020 CM2050 Absolute management current position (PLS) R 2
CM2021 CM2051 * Can be changed by current value change request.
Status
CM2022 CM2052 Operation current speed 2

CM2023 CM2053
CM2024 CM2054 Error code 1
CM2025 CM2055 Specified point No. (for TCHX, TCHY, for X-axis: CR3010, Y-axis: 1
CR3110)
9-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 227 2012/03/15 17:25:32

■ I/O setting details

The following information is stored to CM2000:
• Relationship between inputs IN000 to IN003 and home sensors/stop sensors

• Zero return start direction
• Pulse output mode
• Operation mode at comparator match
There is no particular need to be conscious of this information on the ladder

program when setting parameters on KV BUILDER.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CM2000 (X-axis) CM2030 (Y-axis)

Bit0 Output Mode Selection
0 1 pulse output
1 2 pulse output
Bit1 Zero Return Direction

0 CCW
1 CW
Bit5 Bit4 Operation at Current Position Comparator 0 Match 9

0 0 Not used

Bit7 Bit6 Operation at Current Position Comparator 1 Match

0 0 Not used
Bit9 Bit8 IN0000 Input Setting

0 0 Not used as stop/home sensor
0 1 Used as stop sensor input
1 0 Used as home sensor input
1 1 Setting prohibited*



* Do not set to "1.1".
9-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 228 2012/03/15 17:25:32

■ Sensor enable details

Home sensor, stop sensor, limit switch input polarities and use enable settings are
stored to CM2001.
There is no particular need to be aware of this information on the ladder program
when setting parameters on KV BUILDER.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CM2001 (X-axis) CM2031 (Y-axis)

Bit0 Home Sensor Enable
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Bit1 Stop Sensor Enable

0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Bit2 CW Limit Switch Enable*1

0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Bit3 CCW Limit Switch Enable*1

0 Disabled
1 Enabled
9 Bit8
0
Home Sensor Polarity
NO (normally open: A contact)
1 NC (normally open: B contact)
Bit9 Stop Sensor Polarity

0 NO (normally open: A contact)
Bit10 CW Limit Switch Polarity

Bit11 CCW Limit Switch Polarity

*1 CW Limit Switch Enable/CCW Limit Switch Enable

Limit switch input is not accepted when this bit is not set to "1" (enabled).
This bit needs to be set to "1" (enabled) when this setting has a higher priority than
other limit switch related settings, and the limit switch is assigned by the current
position comparator setting.
These parameters are automatically set to "enabled" when parameters are set on
KV BUILDER.
9-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 229 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Point parameters
No. Common to Description Attribute Number of

X-/Y-axes R: Read only Words
Blank: R/W
0 CM2060 Target value/travel amount 2
CM2061
CM2062 Startup speed 1
CM2063 Acceleration/deceleration time 1
CM2064 Run speed 2
CM2065
CM2066 Operation mode setting (use of stop sensor) 1
CM2067 Number of specified stop sensor pulses 1
1 CM2070 to 2077 Same as point parameter 0
: :
31 CM2370 to 2377
Control relays
X-axes Y-axes Description Attribute

R: Read only
Blank: R/W 9
CR3000 CR3100 Limit switch CW Fixed use

CR3001 CR3101 Limit switch CCW Fixed use
CR3002 CR3102 Home sensor input Used set by parameters
CR3003 CR3103 Stop sensor input Used set by parameters
CR3004 CR3104 Zero return in progress R
CR3005 CR3105 Zero return completed ON at zero return completion,
OFF at next pulse output
CR3006 CR3106 Reserved for system —
CR3007 CR3107 Error/clear error
CR3008 CR3108 Warning/clear warning Current value overflow
CR3009 CR3109 Pulse output in progress/emergency Emergency stop by forced reset
stop
CR3010 CR3110 Start of driver operation Start of pulse output, for CM2025 and
CM2055
CR3011 CR3111 Current value change request For current value change (during pulse stop
in progress)
CR3012 CR3112 Run speed change request For speed change (during speed control)
9-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 230 2012/03/15 17:25:32

Errors/warnings
Error Code Operation Description

(X-axis: CM2024, Y-axis: CM2054)
Error 10 Stop Start frequency value is smaller than setting range.
11 Stop Operation frequency value is smaller than setting range.
12 Stop Operation frequency value is greater than setting range.
13 Stop Start frequency value is greater than operation fre-
quency.
14 Stop Acceleration/deceleration time value is greater than
setting range.
15 Stop Run speed is 65536 or greater when the acceleration/
deceleration time is zero.
20 Stop An attempt was made to start absolute position travel
from an outside absolute position management range
state.
21 Stop Value of CM2025 (2055) when an attempt is made to
travel by CR3010 (3110) is out of range.
30 Stop Emergency stop input causes a stop.
31 Stop Limit SW (CW) input causes a stop.
32 Stop Limit SW (CCW) input causes a stop.
33 Stop Travel to CW (CCW) causes detection by CCW (CW)
9 90 Stop
limit switch.
System error
9-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 231 2012/03/15 17:25:33

9-4 Positioning Instructions

Positioning Instructions Lists
There are eight positioning instructions.
Instruction Mnemonic Description of Operation See Page

Trapezoidal control PLSX Starts trapezoidal control on X-axis. 9-28
X-axis
Trapezoidal control PLSY Starts trapezoidal control on Y-axis. 9-28
Y-axis
Jog operation X-axis JOGX Executes jog operation on X-axis. 9-30
Jog operation Y-axis JOGY Executes jog operation on Y-axis. 9-30
Zero return X-axis ORGX Starts zero return on X-axis. 9-32
Zero return Y -axis ORGY Starts zero return on Y-axis. 9-32
Teaching X-axis TCHX Captures current value of X-axis. 9-34
Teaching Y-axis TCHY Captures current value of Y-axis. 9-34
Positioning instructions are executed according to parameters preset on KV BUILDER.
(1) Initial parameter setup

Set up parameters on KV BUILDER.
9

Make a ladder program using positioning in-
(2) Programming of ladder program
structions.
When the ladder program is executed, posi-

(3) Execution of ladder program tioning control is started according to the pa-
rameters set at (1).
Change parameter
The content of control memory can be directly
No
settings during ladder program rewritten by the LD instruction, etc. without
execution? using KV BUILDER to change the contents of
parameters.
Yes
Change parameters
For details on how to operate KV BUILDER, refer to "Edit CPU Point Parameters"
in the KV BUILDER User's Manual.
9-27
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 232 2012/03/15 17:25:33

PLSX PLSX Trapezoidal control X-axis Starts X-axis trapezoidal control.
PLSY PLSY Trapezoidal control Y-axis Starts Y-axis trapezoidal control.
Ladder diagram
Execution condition S
PLSX
Execution condition S
PLSY
S : Specify the point parameter No. (0 to 31).
Description of Operation
The pulse is output by the point parameter setting specified by S at the up edge of
the execution condition.
Frequency (Hz)
Run
9
speed
Start speed
(stop speed)
Time (ms)
time time
The pulse output in progress flags CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) turn ON
during point operation, and turn OFF when point operation ends. The currently
operating point parameter No. is stored to CM2025 (X-axis) and CM2055 (Y-axis).
To perform an emergency stop, turn CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) OFF.
When an emergency stop has been made, the emergency stop error occurs, error code
30 is stored to CM2024 (X-axis) and CM2054 (Y-axis), the pulse output in progress
flags turn OFF, and the error flags CR3007 (X-axis) and CR3107 (Y-axis) turn ON.
Pay attention to the following points in the positioning mode:

CAUTION
• New operations cannot be started during pulse output. If you attempt to execute the
PLSX and PLSY instructions during pulse output, these instructions will be ignored.
(These instructions will not be executed even after the currently executing pulse
output is completed.)
• When an error has occurred, instructions will not be accepted and will be ignored.
• The pulse output in progress flags CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) turn ON
during execution of the PLSX instruction, and turn OFF by initial END processing
after pulse output.
• In the case of parameters to which the number of output pulses is set to "0", the pulse
output in progress flags will not turn ON and warnings will not be generated.
• Current position information is not guaranteed when pulse output has stopped due
to an emergency stop.
9-28
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 233 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Execution Timing
PLSX and PLSY are executed when their execution conditions turn ON. PLSX and
PLSY can also be used in interrupt routines.
"Program Example High-speed Execution" in "Speed Control Reference Ex-
amples"
Scan
ON
Execution
condition OFF
PLSX, PLSY Execute Execute
Sample Program
Pulse is output by the setting of point parameter No.00 at the up edge of input relay
00000.
00000 00
PLSX
9-29
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 234 2012/03/15 17:25:33

JOGX
JOGX CW
CCW
High
Jog operation X-axis Starts X-axis jog operation.
JOGY
JOGY
CW
CCW Jog operation Y-axis Starts Y-axis jog operation.
High
Ladder diagram Entry method

CW signal JOGX
CW
CCW signal
CCW
High signal
High
CW signal JOGY
CW
CCW signal
CCW
High signal
High
Acceleration/deceleration time and run speed in jog operation are set using the
parameter setup functions of KV BUILDER.
9 Description of Operation
Pulse output is started at the start speed when the CW or CCW signals turn ON.
Frequency (Hz)
CW/CCW High signal High signal CW/CCW

signal ON! ON! OFF! signal OFF!
Run
speed
Start speed
(stop speed)
Time (ms)
When the CW (or CCW) signal is ON and the High signal is ON, the start speed
accelerates to the run speed. When the High signal turns OFF, the run speed
decelerates to the start speed. If the CW (or CCW) signal turns OFF even if the High
signal turns ON, the run speed decelerates to the start speed and movement stops.
During operation, pulse output in progress flags CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis)
turn ON, and turn OFF when operation ends.
Axis movement within the operating ranges of the limit switches is possible even if a
limit error occurs.
To perform an emergency stop, turn CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) OFF.
When an emergency stop has been made, axis movement stops immediately. The
emergency stop error occurs, CR3007 (X-axis) and CR3107 (Y-axis) turn ON, error
code 30 is stored to CM2024 (X-axis) and CM2054 (Y-axis), and the pulse output in
progress flags turn OFF.
"1001" is stored to CM2019 (X-axis) and CM2049 (Y-axis) when jog operation is
performed.
9-30
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 235 2012/03/15 17:25:33

• New jog operations cannot be started during pulse output. (If you attempt to execute
CAUTION the JOGX and JOGY instructions during pulse output, these instructions will be
ignored.)
• When an error has occurred, instructions will not be accepted and will be ignored.
Execution Timing
The JOGX and JOGY instructions are calculated at each scan while the execution
conditions are ON.
Scan
ON
Execution
condition OFF
JOGX, JOGY Execute Execute
Sample Program
Jog operation is performed CW when input 00000 turns ON and CCW when input
00001 turns ON. Jog operation is performed at high speed when input 00002 turns ON 9
simultaneously with inputs 00000 and 00001.

00000 JOGX
CW
00001
CCW
00002
High
9-31
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 236 2012/03/15 17:25:33

ORGX ORGX Zero return X-axis Starts X-axis zero return.
ORGY ORGY Zero return Y-axis Starts Y-axis zero return.
Ladder diagram
Execution condition
ORGX
Execution condition
ORGY
Zero return operation starts when the execution condition turns ON.
During a zero return, zero return in progress flags CR3004 (X-axis) and CR3104 (Y-
axis), pulse output in progress flags CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) turn ON,
and "1000" is stored to CM2019 (X-axis) and CM2049 (Y-axis).
To cancel zero return (perform an emergency stop), turn pulse output in progress flags
CR3009 (X-axis) and CR3109 (Y-axis) OFF. When an emergency stop has been
made, the emergency stop error occurs, error code 30 is stored to CM2024 (X-axis)
and CM2054 (Y-axis), the pulse output in progress flags turn OFF, and the error flags
9 CR3007 (X-axis) and CR3107 (Y-axis) turn ON.
When zero return ends, the zero return in progress flags and pulse output in progress
flags turn OFF, the current value is reset to "0", and the zero return completed relays
CR3005 (X-axis) and CR3105 (Y-axis) turn ON.
• New operations cannot be started during zero return.

CAUTION
The next operation start instruction can be accepted after zero return has ended, or
an emergency stop error has been cleared after an emergency stop has been made.
• If input from the limit switch in the direction opposite to that of zero return turns ON
after zero return starts, a limit switch error occurs, and zero return is stopped.
• If both CW and CCW limit switch inputs both turn ON (not simultaneously but
sequentially) during a single zero return operation, a limit switch error occurs, and
zero return is stopped.
• Once limit switch input has been confirmed and inverted, the limit switch in the
execution advance direction is only checked.
Execution Timing
The JOGX and JOGY instructions are calculated at each scan while the execution
conditions are ON.
Scan
ON
Execution
condition OFF
ORGX, ORGY Execute Execute
Sample Program
00000
ORGX
00000
ORGY
9-32
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 237 2012/03/15 17:25:33


Start point Forward: CW from origin Start point Forward: CW from origin
CW
speed
Origin Start point

CCW Origin Start point CW CCW CW
Home return start speed [Home return

CCW start speed]
speed [Home return speed]
Origin sensor Origin sensor [Home return acceleration speed]

Start point Origin

Start point

9

Start point Origin
Start point
Wide origin sensor Wide origin sensor

Start point Within home sensor Start point Within home sensor
detection range detection range
Start point Origin

CCW Origin CW CCW Start point CW
9-33
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 238 2012/03/15 17:25:33

TCHX TCHX TCHX Teaching X-axis Captures the current X-axis position.
TCHY TCHY TCHY Teaching Y-axis Captures the current Y-axis position.
Ladder diagram
Execution condition
TCHX
Execution condition
TCHY
These instructions store the current values to the target values/travel amounts of the
specified point parameter Nos. at the up edge of the execution conditions.
(1) Store the point parameter No. to store the current value to as the target value/travel
amount to CM2025 (X-axis) and CM2055 (Y-axis) within the range 0 to 31.
• These instructions are ignored when the specified point No. is outside of the range
0 to 31.
(2) The position moved to by execution of the JOGX instruction becomes the current
value.
9 • Whether or not to operate current values as either absolute values or incremental
values conforms to the settings of the point parameter operation mode.
(3) When the TCHX and TCHY instruction execution condition turns ON, the current
value is stored to the target value/travel amount of the point parameter No. specified
at (1). Example) "0" is stored to CM2060 and CM2061, and "1" is stored to CM2070
and CM2071.
• The new target values/travel amounts can be confirmed using KV BUILDER.
[Example]
Store current values to the target value/travel amount of the point parameter No.
specified at CM2025 at the up edge of the execution conditions.
Example of TCHX instruction

To store the X-axis current value as the target value of point No.0.
• Store "10" to CM2025.
• Execute the TCHX instruction.
• The content (X-axis current values) of CM2020 and CM2021 are moved to
CM2060 and CM2061 (target value/travel amount of point No.0).
00000 #00000
DW TCHX
CM2025
Example of TCHY instruction

To store the Y-axis current value as the target value of point No.10
• Store "10" to CM2055.
• Execute the TCHY instruction.
• The content (X-axis current values) of CM2050 and CM2051 are moved to
CM2160 and CM2161 (target value/travel amount of point No.10).
00001 #00010
DW TCHY
CM2055
9-34
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 239 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Pay attention to the following points in the positioning mode:

CAUTION
• Point parameter Nos. stored to CM2025 outside the range 0 to 31 are ignored. Even
if a point parameter No. outside this range is set, this will not result in an error or a
warning.
• Point parameter Nos. are common to both the X- and Y-axes. Point parameter Nos.
set to the X- and Y-axes outside the range 0 to 31 are ignored. Even if a point
parameter No. outside this range is set, this will not result in an error or a warning.
• No operations are performed when an error occurs.
Execution Timing
The TCHX and TCHY instructions are executed at the up edge of the execution
conditions.
Scan
ON
Execution
condition OFF
TCHX, TCHY Execute Execute
Sample Program
9
Set the current value moved to by jog operation as the target value of point No.0.

00000 JOGX
CW
00001
CCW
00002
High
00003 #00000 CM2025
LDA STA TCHX
9-35
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 240 2012/03/15 17:25:33

9-5 Positioning Control Reference Examples

Positioning Control Reference Examples
■ Setting example
CPU input wiring Wiring to Expansion Input Unit

Input common COM
00000 Home sensor 30000 Zero return start input
00001 30001 JOG instruction CW
00002 30002 JOG instruction CCW
00003 30003 JOG high-speed instruction
00004 CW limit switch 30004
00005 CCW limit switch 30005
00006 30006
00007 30007
Stepping motor driver
00008 (2 pulse system)
30008
00009 30009
Twisted pair lead 30010 Point 0 movement instruction
+
CW
-
+ 30011 Point 1 movement instruction
CPU output wiring CCW
24 VDC -
30012 Point 2 movement instruction
Output common - + 30013 Point 3 movement instruction
00500
9 00501 FG
Stepping
30014
30015
Point 4 movement instruction
00502
motor
00503
1 Click the button on the KV BUILDER tool bar, and open the Edit CPU
Positioning Parameters window.
Select the button on the tool bar of the {Edit CPU Positioning Param-
eters} window.
2 Set the home sensor, stop sensor, limit switch input

connections and polarities.
Then, select the zero return start direction and the output
mode.
3 Set the zero return speed.

Set the jog operation speed.
4 Set the target coordinate to the point pa-

rameter.
9-36
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 241 2012/03/15 17:25:33

■ Program example
• Limit switch input
00004 CR3000
00005 CR3001
• Zero return programmed rung
30000
ORGX
• Jog operation programmed rung
30001 JOGX
CW
30002
CCW
30003
HIGH
• Positioning instruction programmed rung 9

30010 00

PLSX
30011 01
PLSX
30012 02
PLSX
30013 03
PLSX
30014 04
PLSX
END
ENDH
9-37
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 242 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Speed Control Reference Examples

■ Setting example
Select speed control for point No.0 in the parameter setup, and set the startup
speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and run speed.
The acceleration speed determined by this setting is also applied to the acceleration
speed that is applied to the change speed when the speed change request is
issued.
Set speed control when using the stop sensors.
Set the specified number of stop sensor pulses.
For details on setting 65535 for the specified number of stop sensor pulses, see
"Specified number of stop sensor pulses."
9
Set CR3003 at the stop sensor setting.
9-38
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 243 2012/03/15 17:25:33

■ Program example
Turn speed change request relay ON at the up edge of relay 30000, write setting value
"3000" to CM2016 and CM2017 (speed change setting value), and start pulse output
by the PLSX0 instruction.
Write "5000" to CM2016 and CM2017 (speed change setting value) at the up edge
of relay 30001.
of relay 30002.
of relay 30003.
Turn speed change request relay OFF at the up edge of relay 30004, turn ON stop
sensor input CR3003, and stop deceleration.
30000 #0000003000 CR3012 00

DW.D (SET) PLSX
CM2016
30001 #0000005000
DW.D
CM2016
30002 #0000006000
9
DW.D
CM2016

30003 #0000007000
DW.D
CM2016
30004 CR3012 CR3003

(RES)
END
ENDH
9-39
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 244 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Program Example Continuous Operation Reference Example

CPU Built-in Positioning Function
Continuous operation start instruction No.30000

Point 1 → 1-second stop → Point 2 → 1-second stop → Point 3 → 1 second → Point 0
30000 01
PLSX
01000 CM2019 #00100 02000 01000 02

= (ONDL) (RES) PLSX
#00001 02000
01000 CM2019 #00100 02001 01000 03

= (ONDL) (RES) PLSX
#00002 02001
01000 CM2019 #00100 02002 01000 00

= (ONDL) (RES) PLSX
#00003 02002
9 01000 CM2019
=
01000
(RES)
#00000
CR3009 CR3007 CM2019 01000

< (SET)
#00999
END
ENDH
9-40
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 245 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Program Example High-speed Execution

Positioning Reference Example
High-speed pulse output is started without being influenced by the scan time by
executing the PLSX instruction in the interrupt routine.
Start pulse output at the up edge of input 000.
CR2008
EI
HSP
00000
END
INT
00000
CR2002 00
PLSX
9

RETI
ENDH
9-41
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 246 2012/03/15 17:25:33

KV-10/16/24/40 Compatibility
On KV-10/16/24/40, pulse output is performed by writing each of the settings to the DMs
below, and turning output start relay 2310 ON.
0000 #00500 #10000 #03000 #00001 #34644 2310

DW DW DW DW DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
Start Run Accel Number of Number of
speed speed /decel time output output
pulses pulses
On KV-700, pulse output is basically performed by the PLSX and PLSY instructions.
However, CR3010, CR3009, and CM2025 are available so that ladder programs can be
made by the same programming method as on the KV-10/16/24/40.
CR3010 Output start relay

CR3009 Pulse output in progress/emergency stop relay
CM2025 Data storage location selection control memory (Specifies point param-
eter No.)
9 When CR3010 is turned ON, pulse output starts based upon the control memory that
stores the data of the point No. specified by CM2025.
00000 #00000 #01000 #00500 #50000 #00000 #10000 #00000 CR3010

DW DW DW DW DW DW DW
CM2025 CM2062 CM2063 CM2064 CM2065 CM2060 CM2061
Specified Start Accel/decel Run Run Number of Number of
point No. speed time speed speed output output
(lower) (upper) pulses pulses
(lower) (upper)
9-42
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 247 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Positioning Control Exceeding 32 Points

As the target values/travel amounts of each point are stored to control memories,
multiple points can be positioned by rewriting the contents of control memories in the
ladder program.
For example, the target value of point No. can be changed by rewriting the contents
of CM2060 and CM2061.
[Example]
00000 #0000010000 00
DW.D PLSX
CM2060
00001 #0000200000 00
DW.D PLSX
CM2060
00002 #0000600000 00
DW.D
CM2060
PLSX
9

9-43
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 248 2012/03/15 17:25:33

This page left intentionally blank
9
9-44
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 249 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4 Explanation of Commands and Responses
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
The KV-700 can be connected to external devices having an RS-
232C-compliant interface to perform communications.
This chapter describes communications specifications, connection
methods and communications methods.
10-1 Serial Communications Specifications .......................... 10-2
10-2 Serial Communications .................................................... 10-3
10-3 Commands/Responses List ............................................. 10-5

10
10-4 Explanation of Commands and Responses ................... 10-7
10-5 Sending/Receiving Text Data ........................................10-52
10-6 ASCII Code Table ............................................................ 10-56
10-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 250 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4 Serial
10-1 Explanation
Communications
of Commands
Specifications
and Responses
10-1 Serial Communications Specifications

This section describes the communications specifications of the RS-232C interface,
and how to connect to external devices.
Communications Specifications
The table on the right lists the
Item Specification
serial communications of the
Communications mode Full duplex
KV-700.
Transmission mode Start-stop
Set the communications con- Transmission port ASCII
ditions of serially connected
Baud rate 9600 bit/s
external devices matched to
the conditions in the table on Data length 8 bit
the right. Parity check Even
Stop bit length 1 bit
Data delimiter CR
Note: • Set the same communications specifications as those set to connected

external devices. Communications cannot be performed correctly if the
settings are different.
• For details on the settings of connected external devices, refer to the
Instruction Manual for the respective device.
10
How to Connect to the KV-700
To connect the KV-700 to an external device having an RS-232C terminal, use the
exclusive connector cable (straight: OP-26487, reverse: OP-96607) and D-Sub 9-pin
connector (OP-26486) or D-Sub 25-pin connector (OP-26485) to connect to the RS-
232C connector.
KEYENCE KV-700 A B
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
14 14
15 15
RUN
PROG
CARD SD RD USB
SERIAL
KV-700 External device having

an RS-232C terminal
Wiring diagram
RS-232C cable wiring is as follows. Be sure to connect to the KV-700 using the
exclusive connector cable.
PC side PC side
KV side (D-Sub 9-pin) KV side (D-Sub 25-pin)
RD 3 3 SD RD 3 2 SD
SD 5 2 RD SD 5 3 RD
+5V 1 4 DR +5V 1 6 DS
+5V 2 6 ER +5V 2 20 ER
SG 6 7 RS SG 6 4 RS
SG 4 8 CS SG 4 5 CS
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 SG 7 SG
KV Straight cable OP-26487 Straight cable OP-26487
Pin No. on unit + +
D-Sub 9-pin connector OP-26486 D-Sub 25-pin connector OP-26485
(cross wiring) (cross wiring)
Pin Nos.1 and 2 on the unit side are 5V power.
Pin Nos.4 and 6 on the unit side are ground.
[Tip]
When the connected device is defined as a modem, use cross cable OP-96607
instead of OP-26487.
10-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 251 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4 Explanation of 10-2
Commands
Serial Communications
and Responses
10-2 Serial Communications

The KV-700 can be connected to a PC so that the current values or setting values of
counters and timers stored on the KV-700, or the content of data memories can be read
or written.
Command Send Procedure

Follow the procedure below to send commands to the KV-700 from a PC.
Send Break signal. Initialize the buffer and baud rate settings for KV-700
communications.
Send communications
start command (CR). Start communications with KV-700.
Send command.
Send commands to the KV-700, and instruction operations.
Receive response.
Receive responses to commands, and confirm the responses.
Send communications
end command (CQ). End communications with KV-700.
Send Break signal

The Break signal is the signal that initializes the KV-700
communications buffer and baud rate settings. A Break SD
+V 100 ms or more 10
-V
signal of 100 ms or more is sent only once before
communications is started with the KV-700. Once com-
munications is established, the Break signal need not be
sent again.
The figure on the right illustrates how the Break signal is
sent.
Note: • To establish serial communications without turning the KV-700 OFF after
communications is established between KV-700 and KV BUILDER, the
Break signal must be sent again.
• When the Break signal cannot be sent to the PC, the communications setup
with the KV-700 can be initialized by turning the KV-700 OFF then back ON
again. Try establishing communications again.
• Allow at least 10 ms after sending the Break signal before you start
communications.
• If the duration between individual bytes of the command is one second or
more, a time-out will occur, and an error response will be returned.
10-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 252 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4
10-2 Explanation
Serial Communications
of Commands and Responses
■ Sending commands and receiving responses

Commands and responses are defined as follows in communications between the
KV-700 and the PC.
Command → A message to the KV-700 from a PC

Response → The response to the command (i.e. return message from
the KV-700 to the PC)
When a command is sent to the KV-700 from the PC, a response is returned to the
PC.
When writing a program that is controlled on a PC, program so that the response
is confirmed before the next command is sent.
Format of Commands and Responses

The following shows the format of commands and responses.
Command format
Conform to the following format when sending commands to the KV-700 from a PC.
C (carriage return) is the delimiter. The KV-700 ignores L (line feed), and recognizes
R F
text following L F as the next command.
10
Command C
R
or Command C L
R F
Response format
The KV-700 returns responses to commands according to the following format. When
writing programs on a PC, programs can be processed according to this response
format.
Response C L
R F
10-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 253 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4 Explanation
10-3
of Commands
Commands/Responses
and Responses
List
10-3 Commands/Responses List

This section provides a table of command and response (during normal operation and errors) that
are used for serial communications in the KV mode (host link) and errors.
"_" in the table indicates a space (20H).
Commands/Responses List
Function Command Response See page
Start of communications CR CC 10-7
End of communications CQ CF 10-7
Mode change Mn OK 10-8
Error clear ER OK 10-8
Error No. confirmation ?E ddd 10-9
Model query ?K dd 10-10
Operation mode confirmation ?M f 10-10
Counter RD_Cnnn f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd 10-11
Continuous counters RDS_Cnnn_n f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_‥ 10-11
High-speed counter RD_CTHn 0,dddddddddd,0000000000 10-13
Continuous high-speed counters RDS_CTHn_n 0,dddddddddd,0000000000_0,dddddddddd,0000000000_.. 10-14
High-speed counter comparator RD_CTCn f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd 10-15
Continuous high-speed counter RDS_CTCn_n f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_ .. 10-15
comparators
Timer RD_Tnnn f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd 10-17

10
Continuous timers RDS_Tnnn_n f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_f,dddddddddd,dddddddddd_ .. 10-17
Digital trimmer value RD_ATn dddddddddd 10-19
Continuous digital trimmer values RDS_ATn_n dddddddddd_dddddddddd_. . . . 10-20
Relay/control RD_nnnnn f 10-21
Read
Relay contact
RD_CRnnnn
Relay/control RDS_nnnnn_n f_f_. . . . 10-22
Continuous relay contacts
RDS_CRnnnn_n
Data memory/ RD_DMnnnnn ddddd 10-23
control memory
RD_CMnnnn
Data memory/ RDS_DMnnnnn_n ddddd_ddddd_ . . . . 10-23
continuous control memory
RDS_CMnnnn_n
Temporary data memory RD_TMnnn ddddd 10-24
Continuous temporary data memory RDS_TMnnn_n ddddd_ddddd_. . . . 10-25
Comment RDC_dev* Device comment (32 characters) 10-26
* dev:nnnnn, CRnnnn,
DMnnnnn, CMnnnn,
TMnnn, Tnnn, Cnnn, CTHn,
CTCn
10-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 254 2012/03/15 17:25:33

10-4
10-3 Explanation
Commands/Responses
of Commands
Listand Responses
Function Command Response See page

Registration of bit device MBS_dev* OK 10-27
monitor *dev:nnnnn, CRnnnn,
Tnnn, Cnnn, CTCn
Registration of word device MWS_dev* OK 10-28

monitor *dev:nnnnn, CRnnnn,
Read
DMnnnnn, CMnnnn,
TMnnn, TCnnn, TSnnn,
CCnnn, CSnnn, CTHn,
CTCn, ATn
Monitoring of registered bit devices MBR f_f_ . . . . 10-29

Monitoring of registered word devices MWR ddddd_ddddd_ . . . . 10-29
Counter current value WR_Cnnn_dddddddddd OK 10-30
Continuous counter current value WRS_Cnnn_n_dddddddddd_.. OK 10-30
Counter setting value WS_Cnnn_dddddddddd OK 10-31
Continuous counter setting value WSS_Cnnn_n_dddddddddd_.. OK 10-32
Set counter contact ST_Cnnn OK 10-33
Reset counter contact RS_Cnnn OK 10-33
High-speed counter WR_CTHn_dddddddddd OK 10-34
Continuous high-speed counters WRS_CTHn_n_dddddddddd_ .. OK 10-34
High-speed counter comparator WS_CTCn_dddddddddd OK 10-35
setting value
Continuous high-speed counter WSS_CTCn_n_dddddddddd_.. OK 10-36

comparator setting value
10 Reset high-speed counter RS_CTCn OK 10-37
comparator contacts
Timer current value WR_Tnnn_dddddddddd OK 10-38

Continuous timer current value ..
WRS_Tnnn_n_dddddddddd_ OK 10-38
Timer setting value WS_Tnnn_dddddddddd OK 10-39
Write
Continuous timer setting values WSS_Tnnn_n_dddddddddd_.. OK 10-40

Set timer contact ST_Tnnn OK 10-41
Reset timer contact RS_Tnnn OK 10-41
Set relay contact ST_nnnnn OK 10-42
Set continuous relay contacts STS_nnnnn_nn OK 10-42
Reset relay contact RS_nnnnn OK 10-43
Reset continuous relay contacts RSS_nnnnn_nn OK 10-43
Set control relay contacts ST_CRnnnn OK 10-44
STS_CR OK 10-44
Reset control relay contacts RS_CRnnnn OK 10-45
RSS_CR OK 10-45
Data memory/ WR_DMnnnnn_ddddd OK 10-46
control memory
WR_CMnnnn_ddddd
Data memory/ WRS_DMnnnnn_n_ddddd_.. OK 10-47
continuous control memory
WRS_CMnnnn_n_ddddd_ ..
Temporary data memory WR_TMnnn_ddddd OK 10-48
Continuous temporary data memory WRS_TMnnn_n_ddddd_.. OK 10-49
Time setting WRT yy m1 dd hh m2 ss w OK 10-50
10-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 255 2012/03/15 17:25:33


This section describes how to set each of the commands and the content of the
responses to each command.
CR Start communications
This command is sent when starting communications with the KV-700.
Other commands can be sent when the response to the communications start
command is returned normally.
■ Command
C R C
R
43H 52H
■ Response
C C C L
R F
43H 43H
CC: When the command is processed successfully, "CC" the code

indicating this is entered.
"Responses during an Error" page 10-51 10
CQ End communications
This command ends serial communications with the KV-700.
■ Command
C Q C
R
43H 51H
■ Response
C F C L
R F
43H 46H
CF: When the command is processed successfully, "CF" the code

If the command is not processed successfully, "E1" is entered.
"Responses during an Error" page 10-51
10-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 256 2012/03/15 17:25:33

Mn Change mode
This command switches the CPU Unit to the PROGRAM mode or the RUN mode.
■ Command
Mode C
M No. R
4DH
Mode No.: When "0" is specified, the CPU Unit switches to the PROGRAM
mode.
When "1" is specified, the CPU Unit switches to the RUN mode.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH
OK: When the command is processed successfully, "OK" the code

If the command is not processed successfully, "E1", "E2" or
"E5" is entered.
10
ER Clear error
This command cancels errors that are currently occurring on the CPU Unit.
■ Command
E R C
R
45H 52H
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

10-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 257 2012/03/15 17:25:33

?E Error No. confirmation

This command investigates errors or abnormalities that are currently occurring on the
CPU Unit. Confirm the details of the error by the error code.
"Error Message Lists" page A-15
■ Command
? E C
R
3FH 45H
■ Response
Error code C L
R F
Error code: The content of the error currently occurring on the CPU is
entered as an error No. (within three digits). If no errors are
occurring, the error code becomes "000".
For details on how to remedy errors, see "Appendices 2 Error Message Lists" (page
A-15).
10
10-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 258 2012/03/15 17:25:33

?K Model query
This command investigates the model of the PLC.
■ Command
? K C
R
3FH 4BH
■ Response
Model C L
R F
Model: The model of the PLC is entered at "Model" as a number. When

the PLC is a KV-700, "48" is entered, and when memory is
added on the KV-700, "49" is entered.
?M Operation mode confirmation

This command confirms the current operating mode of the CPU Unit.
10
■ Command
? M C
R
3FH 4DH
■ Response
Data CR LF
Data: The current mode of the CPU Unit is entered as a number. If the
CPU Unit is in the PROGRAM mode or the ladder is not
registered, "0" is entered. If the CPU Unit is in the RUN mode,
"1" is entered.
10-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 259 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_C Read counter

This counter reads the ON/OFF state, current value and setting value of counter or up-
down counter contacts.
■ Command
R D C Read No. C
R
52H 44H 20H 43H
Read No.: Specifies a No. (Cnnn) of the counter whose contact is to be

read. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
Data 1 , Data 2 , Data 3 C

R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1: The state (f) of the counter specified by the command is

entered. If the counter contact is OFF, "0" is entered, and "1" is
entered if the state is ON.
Data 2: The current value (dddddddddd) of the counter specified by the

command is entered. The range of values is 0000000000 to
10
4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the counter specified by the
4294967295 (decimal).
If the command is not processed successfully, "E0" or "E1" is

entered.
RDS_C Read continuous counters

This counter reads the ON/OFF state, current value and setting value of a specified
number of counters or up-down counter contacts.
■ Command
R D S C Read start No.

Read C
count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 43H 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the counters whose contacts are
to be read. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Read count: Specifies how many data items from the counter are to be read
starting from the "Read start No.". The number of data items
that can be read is 1 to 8.
10-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 260 2012/03/15 17:25:34

■ Response
Data 1 , Data 2 , Data 3

2CH 2CH 20H

2CH 2CH 20H
Data
3n-2
, Data 3n-1 , Data 3n C
R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1, 4, ..., 3n-2: The state (f) of the counter at "Read start No." specified by the
command is entered to data 1, and the state (f) of the next No.
counter at "Read start No." specified by the command is
entered to data 4. From here on, the state of counters is entered
in the same way in order from "Read start No." until the state (f)
of the counter for the "Number of reads" (nth) is read continu-
ously from "Read start No." specified by the command and is
output to data 3n-2. If the state of the counter contact is OFF,
"0" is entered, and "1" is entered if the state if ON.
Data 2, 5, ..., 3n-1: The current value (dddddddddd) of the counter at "Read start
No." specified by the command is entered to data 2, and the
current value (dddddddddd) of the next No. counter at "Read
start No." specified by the command is entered to data 5. From
here on, the current value of counters is entered in the same
10 way in order from "Read start No." until the current value
(dddddddddd) of the counter for the "Number of reads" (nth) is
read continuously from "Read start No." specified by the
command and is output to data 3n-1. The range of values is

0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3, 6, ..., 3n: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the counter at "Read start
setting value (dddddddddd) of the next No. counter at "Read
here on, the setting value of counters is entered in the same
way in order from "Read start No." until the setting value
(dddddddddd) of the counter for the "Number of reads" (nth) is
read continuously from "Read start No." specified by the
command and is output to data 3n. The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).

entered.
10-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 261 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_CTH Read high-speed counter

Reads the current value of the high-speed counter CTH.
■ Command
R D C T H Read C
No. R
52H 44H 20H 43H 54H 48H
Read No.: Specifies a No. (n) of the high-speed counter CTH whose
current value is to be read. Specify either the CTH0 and CTH1
as the No. of the high-speed counter.
■ Response

R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1: This value is fixed at "0".

Data 2: The current value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter
specified by the command is entered. The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3: This value is fixed at "0000000000".
10
entered.
10-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 262 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RDS_CTH Read continuous high-speed counters

Reads the current values of a specified number of high-speed counters CTH.
■ Command
Read Read C
R D S C T H start No. count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 43H 54H 48H 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (n) of the high-speed counters CTH
whose current values are to be read. Specify 0 or 1 as the No.
Read count: Specifies how many data items from the counter are to be read
that can be read is 1 or 2.
■ Response (with "Number of reads" set to "2")

2CH 2CH 20H

R
L
F
2CH 2CH
10
Data 1, 4: The value is fixed to "0" for both data 1 and data 4.
Data 2, 5: The current value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter at

"Read start No." specified by the command is entered to data
2, and the current value (dddddddddd) of the next No. counter
at "Read start No." specified by the command is entered to data
5. The range of values is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (deci-
mal).
Data 3, 6: The value is fixed to "0000000000" for both data 3 and data 6.

entered.
When "Number of reads" is set to "1", the response is only from
data 4 onwards.
10-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 263 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_CTC Read high-speed counter comparator

This command reads the ON/OFF state, current value and setting value of high-speed
counter comparator contacts.
■ Command
R D C T C Read C
No. R
52H 44H 20H 43H 54H 43H
Read No.: Specifies the No. (n) of the high-speed counter comparator
CTC whose setting value is to be read. Specify 0 or 3 as the No.
■ Response

R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1: The state (f) of the high-speed counter comparator specified by

the command is entered. If the high-speed counter comparator
contact is OFF, "0" is entered, and "1" is entered if the state is
ON.
Data 2: The current value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter

10
corresponding to the high-speed counter comparator specified
by the command is entered. The range of values is 0000000000
to 4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter

comparator specified by the command is entered. The range of
values is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
entered.
RDS_CTC Read continuous high-speed counter comparators

This command reads the ON/OFF states, current values and setting values of a
specified number of high-speed counter comparators.
■ Command
Read Read C
R D S C T C start No. count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 43H 54H 43H 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (n) of the high-speed counter compara-
tors CTC whose setting values are to be read. Specify 0 or 3 as
the No.
Read count: Specifies how many data items from the high-speed counter
comparator are to be read starting from the "Read start No.".
The number of data items that can be read is 1 to 4.
10-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 264 2012/03/15 17:25:34

■ Response

2CH 2CH 20H

2CH 2CH 20H
Data
3n-2 , Data 3n-1 , Data 3n C
R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1, 4, ..., 3n-2: The state (f) of the high-speed counter comparator at "Read
start No." specified by the command is entered to data 1, and
the state (f) of the next No. high-speed counter comparator at
"Read start No." specified by the command is entered to data
4. From here on, the state of high-speed counter comparators
is entered in the same way in order from "Read start No." until
the state (f) of the high-speed counter comparator for the
"Number of reads" (nth) is read continuously from "Read start
No." specified by the command and is output to data 3n-2. If the
state of the high-speed counter comparator contact is OFF, "0"
is entered, and "1" is entered if the state if ON.
Data 2, 5, ..., 3n-1: The current value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter
10 corresponding to the high-speed counter comparator at "Read

start No." specified by the command is entered to data 2, and
the current value (dddddddddd) of the next No. high-speed
counter corresponding to the high-speed counter comparator

5. From here on, the current value of high-speed counters
corresponding to high-speed counter comparators is entered in
the same way in order from "Read start No." until the current
value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter for the corre-
sponding high-speed counter comparator at "Number of reads"
(nth) is read continuously from "Read start No." specified by the
command and is output to data 3n-1. The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3, 6, ..., 3n: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter
comparator at "Read start No." specified by the command is
entered to data 3, and the setting value (dddddddddd) of the
next No. high-speed counter comparator at "Read start No."
specified by the command is entered to data 6. From here on,
the setting value of high-speed counter comparators is entered
in the same way in order from "Read start No." until the setting
value (dddddddddd) of the high-speed counter comparator for
the "Number of reads" (nth) is read continuously from "Read
start No." specified by the command and is output to data 3n.
The range of values is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).

entered.
10-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 265 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_T Read timer

This command reads the ON/OFF state, current value and setting value of timer
contacts.
■ Command
R D T Read No. C
R
52H 44H 20H 54H
Read No.: Specifies a No. (nnn) of the counter whose contact is to be read.
Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response

R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1: The state (f) of the timer specified by the command is entered.
If the timer contact is OFF, "0" is entered, and "1" is entered if
the state is ON.
Data 2: The current value (dddddddddd) of the timer specified by the

10
4294967295 (decimal).
Data 3: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the timer specified by the
4294967295 (decimal).

entered.
RDS_T Read continuous timers

This command reads the ON/OFF states, current values and setting values of a
specified number of timers.
■ Command
R D S T Read start No. Read C

count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 54H 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the timers whose contacts are
to be read. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Read count: Specifies how many data items from the timer are to be read
10-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 266 2012/03/15 17:25:34

■ Response

2CH 2CH 20H

2CH 2CH 20H
Data
3n-2 , Data 3n-1 , Data 3n C
R
L
F
2CH 2CH
Data 1, 4, ..., 3n-2: The state (f) of the timer at "Read start No." specified by the
command is entered to data 1, and the state (f) of the next No.
timer at "Read start No." specified by the command is entered
to data 4. From here on, the state of timers is entered in the
same way in order from "Read start No." until the state (f) of the
timer for the "Number of reads" (nth) is read continuously from
"Read start No." specified by the command and is output to data
3n-2. If the state of the timer contact is OFF, "0" is entered, and
"1" is entered if the state if ON.
Data 2, 5, ..., 3n-1: The current value (dddddddddd) of the timer at "Read start No."
specified by the command is entered to data 2, and the current
value (dddddddddd) of the next No. timer at "Read start No."
10 the current value of timers is entered in the same way in order
from "Read start No." until the current value (dddddddddd) of
the timer for the "Number of reads" (nth) is read continuously
from "Read start No." specified by the command and is output

to data 3n-1. The range of values is 0000000000 to 4294967295
(decimal).
Data 3, 6, ..., 3n: The setting value (dddddddddd) of the timer at "Read start No."
specified by the command is entered to data 3, and the setting
value (dddddddddd) of the next No. timer at "Read start No."
the setting value of timers is entered in the same way in order
from "Read start No." until the setting value (dddddddddd) of
the timer for the "Number of reads" (nth) is read continuously
from "Read start No." specified by the command and is output
to data 3n. The range of values is 0000000000 to 4294967295
(decimal).

entered.
10-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 267 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_AT Read digital trimmer

This command reads the digital trimmer value.
■ Command
R D A T Read C
No. R
52H 44H 20H 41H 54H
Read No.: Specifies a No. (ATn) of the digital trimmer whose value is to be
read. Specify the No. in the range 0 to 7.
■ Response
Data C L
R F
Data: The value (dddddddddd) of the digital trimmer specified by the

4294967295 (decimal).
entered.
10
10-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 268 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RDS_AT Read continuous digital trimmers

This command reads the values of a specified number of digital trimmers.
■ Command
Read
R D S A T start Read C
No. count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 41H 54H 20H
Read start No. Specifies the start No. (n) of the digital trimmers whose values
are to be read. Specify the No. in the range 0 to 7.
Read count Specifies how many data items from the digital trimmer are to
be read starting from the "Read start No.". The number of data
items that can be read is 1 or 8.
■ Response
Data 1 Data 2
20H 20H
Data n C L
R F
10 Data 1, 2 ...: The value (dddddddddd) of the digital trimmer at "Read start
value (dddddddddd) of the next No. digital trimmer at "Read

data 3 on, the values (dddddddddd) of the digital trimmers of
corresponding numbers is entered. The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
entered.
10-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 269 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD/RD_CR Read relay/control relay contact

This command reads the ON/OFF state of relays/control relay contacts.
■ Command
R D Read start No. C

R
52H 44H 20H
or
R D C R Read start No. C

R
52H 44H 20H 43H 52H
Read No.: Specifies a No. (nnnnn) of the relay or control relay whose
contact is to be read. Specify the relay No. in the range 00000
to 59915 or control relay No. in the range 0000 to 3915.
■ Response
Data CR LF
Data: The state (f) of the relay specified by the command is entered
at "data".
If the state of the relay contact is OFF, "0" is entered, and "1" is
10
entered if the state is ON.
entered.
10-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 270 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RDS/RDS_CR Read continuous relay/control relay contacts

This command reads the ON/OFF states of a specified number of relays/control relay
contacts.
■ Command
Read C
R D S Read start No. count R
52H 44H 20H 20H
or
Read C
R D S C R Read start No. count R
52H 44H 20H 43H 52H 20H
Read start No. Specifies the start No. (nnnnn) of the relay or control relay
whose contact is to be read. Specify the relay No. in the range
00000 to 59915 or control relay No. in the range 0000 to 3915.
Read count Specifies how many data items are to be read starting from the
"Read start No.". The number of data items that can be read is
1 or 8.
10 ■ Response
Data 1 Data 2 Data n C L

R F
20H 20H
Data 1, 2 ...: The state (f) of the relay at "Start read No." specified by the
command is entered at data 1, and the state (f) of the next No.
relay at "Read start No." specified by the command is entered
to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the state (f) of the relay of
corresponding Nos. is entered. If the state of each of the relay
is OFF, then "0" is entered, and "1" is entered if the state is "1".
entered.
10-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 271 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RD_DM/RD_CM Read data memory/control memory

This command reads the data of data memories/control memories.
■ Command
R D D M Read No. C
R
52H 44H 20H 44H 4DH
or
R D C M Read No. C
R
52H 44H 20H 43H 4DH
Read No.: Specifies a No. (nnnnn) of the data memory or control memory
whose data is to be read. Specify the data memory No. in the
range 00000 to 19999 (39999 when memory is added on) or
control memory No. in the range 0000 to 3999.
■ Response
Data C L
R F
Data: The data (ddddd) of the data memory or control memory

specified by the command is entered. The range of values is 10
00000 to 65535 (decimal).
entered.
RDS_DM/RDS_CM Read continuous data memories/control memories

This command reads the data of a specified number of data memories/control
memories.
■ Command
Read C
R D S D M Read start No. count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 44H 4DH 20H
or
Read C
R D S C M Read start No. count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 43H 4DH 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnnn) of the data memory or control
memory whose data is to be read. Specify the data memory No.
in the range 00000 to 19999 (39999 when memory is added on)
or control memory No. in the range 0000 to 3999.
Read count: Specifies how many data items whose data is to be read
10-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 272 2012/03/15 17:25:34

■ Response

R F
20H 20H
Data 1, 2 ...: The data (ddddd) at "Start read No." specified by the command
is entered at data 1, and the data (ddddd) of the next No. relay
2. From data 3 onwards, the data (ddddd) of corresponding
Nos. is entered. Each of the data ranges is 00000 to 65535
(decimal).
entered.
RD_TM Read temporary data memory

This command reads the data of temporary data memories.
■ Command
R D T M Read No. C
R
52H 44H 20H 54H 4DH
10
Read No.: Specifies a No. (nnn) of the temporary data memory whose
data is to be read. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
Data C L
R F
Data: The data (ddddd) of the temporary data memory specified by

the command is entered.
The data range is 00000 to 65535 (decimal).
entered.
10-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 273 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RDS_TM Read continuous temporary data memories

This command reads the data of a specified number of temporary data memories.
■ Command
R D S T M Read start No.

Read C
count R
52H 44H 53H 20H 54H 4DH 20H
Read start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of temporary data memories
whose data is to be read. Specify the No. in the range 000 to
511.
Read count: Specifies how many data items whose data is to be read
■ Response

R F
20H 20H
Data 1, 2 ...: The data (ddddd) at "Start read No." specified by the command
is entered at data 1, and the data (ddddd) of the next No. relay 10
2. From data 3 onwards, the data (ddddd) of corresponding
Nos. is entered. Each of the data ranges is 00000 to 65535
(decimal).
entered.
10-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 274 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RDC Read comment

This command reads the comment of a specified device.
■ Command
R D C Device name C
R
52H 44H 43H 20H
Device Name: Specifies the device whose comment is to be read. The

following table shows the devices whose comment can be read.
Device Name Specification Device No.(n) Range
Method
Relay nnnnn 00000 to 59915
Control relay CRnnn 0000 to 3915
Data memory DMnnnnn 00000 to 19999 (39999 when
memory is expanded)
Control memory CMnnnn 0000 to 3999
Temporary data memory TMnnn 000 to 511
Timer contact Tnnn 000 to 511
Counter contact Cnnn 000 to 511
High-speed counter CTHn 0 to 1
High-speed counter comparator CTCn 0 to 3
10
■ Response
Data C L
R F
Data: The comment of the device specified by the command is

entered. The length of comments is fixed at 32 characters. If the
comment is less than 32 characters long, the empty section is
filled with spaces (20H).
"E6" is entered.
10-26
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 275 2012/03/15 17:25:34

MBS Read monitor registration of bit devices

This command registers the specified device to the bit device registration table.
■ Command
M B S Device name 1 Device name 2 Device name n C

R
4DH 42H 53H 20H 20H 20H
Device Name: Specifies the device to be registered. Up to 16 devices can be

specified. The following table shows the devices that can be
registered.

Method
Relay nnnnn 00000 to 59915
Timer contact Tnnn 000 to 511
Counter contact Cnnn 000 to 511
■ Response
C L
10
O K R F
4FH 4BH
entered.
10-27
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 276 2012/03/15 17:25:34

MWS Read monitor registration of word devices

This command registers the specified device to the word device registration table.
■ Command
M W S Device name 1 Device name 2 Device name n C

R
4DH 57H 53H 20H 20H 20H
Device Name: Specifies the device to be registered. Up to 16 devices can be

specified. The following table shows the devices that can be
registered.
Method
Relay* nnnnn 00000 to 59915
Data memory DMnnnnn 00000 to 19999 (39999 when
memory is expanded)
Control memory CMnnnn 0000 to 3999
Temporary data memory TMnnn 000 to 511
Timer current value TCnnn 000 to 511
Timer setting value TSnnn 000 to 511
Counter current value CCnnn 000 to 511
10 Counter setting value

High-speed counter
CSnnn
CTHn
000 to 511
0 to 1

Digital trimmer ATn 0 to 7
* Relays and control relays are monitored on individual channels.

When specifying a device, be sure to specify the leading channel No.
An error will occur of you specify a No. other than the leading channel No.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-28
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 277 2012/03/15 17:25:34

MBR Read the monitor of registered bit devices

This command reads the device content of the bit device registration table.
■ Command
M B R C
R
4DH 42H 52H
■ Response

R F
20H 20H
Data 1, 2 ...: The monitor result of the devices currently registered to the bit
device registration table is entered. The monitor result is in the
same format as the response when a bit device such as a relay
is specified by the RDS command.
entered.
MWR Read the monitor of registered word devices 10

This command reads the device content of the word device registration table.
■ Command
M W R C
R
4DH 57H 52H
■ Response

R F
20H 20H
Data 1, 2 ...: The monitor result of the devices currently registered to the
word device registration table is entered. The monitor result is
in the same format as the response when a word device or
double-word device such as a data memory is specified by the
RDS command.
entered.
10-29
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 278 2012/03/15 17:25:34

WR_C Write counter current value

This command writes the current value of counters or up-down counters.
■ Command
W R C Write No. Data C

R
57H 52H 20H 43H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the counter whose current value is to
be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Data: Specifies the current value (dddddddddd) to be written to the

counter specified by "Write No.". The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10 "Responses during an Error" page 10-51
WRS_C Write continuous counter current values

This command writes the current values of a specified number of counters or up-down
counters.
■ Command
Write
W R S C Write start No. count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 54H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the counter whose current value
is to be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Write count: Specifies how many counters data is to be written to starting

from the "Write start No.". The number of data items that can be
written is 1 to 8.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the current value (dddddddddd) to write to the counter
specified by the "Write start No." to data 1, and specifies the
current value (dddddddddd) to write to the next No. counter at
"Write start No." to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the current
value (dddddddddd) to write to the corresponding No. is speci-
fied. The data range is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
10-30
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 279 2012/03/15 17:25:34

■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
WS_C Write counter setting values

This command writes the setting value of counters or up-down counters.
■ Command
W S C Write No. Data C

R
57H 53H 20H 43H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the counter whose setting value is to
be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511. 10
Data: Specifies the setting value (dddddddddd) to be written to the
counter specified by "Write No.". The range of values is
0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-31
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 280 2012/03/15 17:25:34

WSS_C Write continuous counter setting values

This command writes the setting values of a specified number of counters or up-down
counters.
■ Command
Write
W S S C Write start No. count Data 1
57H 53H 53H 20H 43H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the counter whose setting value
is to be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Write count: Specifies how many counters data is to be written to starting

from the "Write start No.". The number of data items that can be
written is 1 to 8.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the setting value (dddddddddd) to write to the counter
setting value (dddddddddd) to write to the next No. counter at
10 "Write start No." to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the setting
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-32
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 281 2012/03/15 17:25:34

ST_C Write counter contact set

This command forcibly sets counter contacts, and also sets the counter current value
to the same value as the setting value.
■ Command
S T C Forced change No. C

R
52H 53H 20H 43H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the counter whose contact is to be
forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
RS_C Write counter contact reset
This command forcibly turns counter contacts OFF, and sets counter current values
to "0".
■ Command
R S C Forced change No. CR

52H 53H 20H 43H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the counter whose contact is to be
forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-33
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 282 2012/03/15 17:25:34

WR_CTH Write high-speed counter

This command writes the current value of high-speed counters CTH.
■ Command
W R C T H Write
Data C
No. R
57H 52H 20H 43H 54H 48H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (n) of the high-speed counter CTH to write the
current value to. Specify 0 or 1 as the No.

high-speed counter specified by "Write No.". The range of
values is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH
10 indicating this is entered.

entered.
WRS_CTH Write continuous high-speed counters

This command writes the current values of a specified number of high-speed counters
CTH.
■ Command
Write Write
W R S C T H start No. count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 43H 54H 48H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 C
R
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (n) of the high-speed counters CTH to
write the current value to. Specify 0 or 1 as the No.
Write count: Specifies how many high-speed counters data is to be written

to starting from the "Write start No.". The number of data items
that can be written is 1 to 2.
10-34
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 283 2012/03/15 17:25:34

Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the current value (dddddddddd) to write to the high-
speed counter specified by the "Write start No." to data 1, and
specifies the current value (dddddddddd) to write to the next
No. high-speed counter at "Write start No." to data 2. The data
range is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal). When the
"Write count" is set to "1", data 2 is not required.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
WS_CTC Write high-speed counter comparator setting values

This command writes the setting value of high-speed counter comparators CTC.
■ Command
10
W S C T C Write
Data C
No. R
57H 53H 20H 43H 54H 43H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (n) of the high-speed counter CTC to write the
setting value to. Specify 0 to 3 as the No.

high-speed counter comparator specified by "Write No.". The
range of values is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-35
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 284 2012/03/15 17:25:34

WSS_CTC Write continuous high-speed counter comparator setting values

This command writes the setting values of a specified number of high-speed counter
comparators.
■ Command
Write Write
W S S C T C start No. count Data 1
57H 53H 53H 20H 43H 54H 43H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (n) of the high-speed counter compara-
tors CTC to write the setting value to. Specify 0 to 3 as the No.
Write count: Specifies how many high-speed counter comparators data is to

be written to starting from the "Write start No.". The number of
data items that can be written is 1 to 4.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the setting value (dddddddddd) to write to the high-
speed counter comparator specified by the "Write start No." to
data 1, and specifies the setting value (dddddddddd) to write to
10 the next No. high-speed counter comparator at "Write start No."
to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the setting value (dddddddddd)
to write to the corresponding No. is specified. The data range
is 0000000000 to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-36
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 285 2012/03/15 17:25:34

RS_CTC Write high-speed counter comparator contact reset

This command forcibly turns high-speed counter comparator contacts OFF.
■ Command
Forced
R S C T C change C
No. R
52H 53H 20H 43H 54H 43H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (n) of the high-speed counter comparator
CTC whose contact is to be forcibly turned OFF. Specify 0
or 3 as the No.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
10-37
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 286 2012/03/15 17:25:34

WR_T Write timer current value

This command writes the current value of timers.
■ Command
W R T Write No. Data C

R
57H 52H 20H 54H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the timer whose current value is to be
written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.

timer specified by "Write No.". The range of values is 0000000000
to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
WRS_T Write continuous timer current values

This command writes the current values of a specified number of timers.
■ Command
Write
W R S T Write start No count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 43H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the timer whose current value is
to be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Write count: Specifies how many timers data is to be written to starting from
the "Write start No.". The number of data items that can be
written is 1 to 8.
10-38
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 287 2012/03/15 17:25:35

Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the current value (dddddddddd) to write to the timer
current value (dddddddddd) to write to the next No. timer at
"Write start No." to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the current
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
WS_T Write timer setting value

This command writes the setting value of timers.
■ Command
10
W S T Write No. Data C
R
57H 53H 20H 54H 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the timer whose setting value is to be
written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.

timer specified by "Write No.". The range of values is 0000000000
to 4294967295 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-39
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 288 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WSS_T Write continuous timer setting values

This command writes the setting values of a specified number of timers.
■ Command
Write
W S S T Write start No. count Data 1
57H 53H 53H 20H 54H 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the timer whose setting value is
to be written. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Write count: Specifies how many timers data is to be written to starting from
written is 1 to 8.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the setting value (dddddddddd) to write to the timer
setting value (dddddddddd) to write to the next No. timer at
"Write start No." to data 2. From data 3 onwards, the setting
10 value (dddddddddd) to write to the corresponding No. is speci-
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

"E4" is entered.
10-40
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 289 2012/03/15 17:25:35

ST_T Write timer contact set

This command forcibly turns timer contacts ON, and sets timer current values to "0".
■ Command
S T T Forced change No. C

R
53H 54H 20H 54H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the timer whose contact is to be
forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
RS_T Write timer contact reset
This command forcibly turns timer contacts OFF, and also sets the timer current value
to the same value as the setting value.
■ Command
R S T Forced change No. C

R
52H 53H 20H 54H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the timer whose contact is to be
forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-41
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 290 2012/03/15 17:25:35

ST Write relay contact set

This command forcibly turns relay contacts ON.
■ Command
S T Forced change No. C

R
53H 54H 20H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the relay whose contact is to be
forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in the range 00000 to
59915.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
STS Write continuous relay contact sets
This command forcibly turns a specified number of relay contacts ON.
■ Command
Change C
S T S Forced change start No. count R
53H 54H 53H 20H 20H
Forced change start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnnn) of the relays whose
contacts are to be forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in
the range 00000 to 59915.
Change count: Specifies how many contacts are to be forcibly turned

ON starting from the "Forced change start No.". The
number of contacts that can be forcibly turned ON is 1 to
16.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-42
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 291 2012/03/15 17:25:35

RS Write relay contact reset

This command forcibly turns relay contacts OFF.
■ Command
R S Forced change No. C

R
52H 53H 20H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the relay whose contact is to be
forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No. in the range 00000 to
59915.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
RSS Write continuous relay contact resets
This command forcibly turns a specified number of relay contacts OFF.
■ Command
Change C
R S S Forced change start No. count R
52H 53H 53H 20H 20H
Forced change start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnnn) of the relays whose
contacts are to be forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No.
in the range 00000 to 59915.

OFF starting from the "Forced change start No.". The
number of contacts that can be forcibly turned OFF is 1
to 16.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-43
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 292 2012/03/15 17:25:35

ST_CR Write control relay contact set

This command forcibly turns control relay contacts ON.
■ Command
S T C R Forced change No. CR

53H 54H 20H 43H 52H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnnn) of the control relay whose contact
is to be forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in the range 0000
to 3915.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10 "Responses during an Error" page 10-51

STS_CR Write continuous control relay contact sets

This command forcibly turns a specified number of control relay contacts ON.
■ Command
Change C
S T S C R Forced change start No. count R
53H 54H 53H 20H 43H 52H 20H
Forced change start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnn) of the control relays whose
contacts are to be forcibly turned ON. Specify the No. in
the range 0000 to 3915.
Change count: Specifies how many contacts are to be forcibly turned ON

starting from the "Forced change start No.". The number
of contacts that can be forcibly turned ON is 1 to 16.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-44
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 293 2012/03/15 17:25:35

RS_CR Write control relay contact reset

This command forcibly turns control relay contacts OFF.
■ Command
R S C R Forced change No. CR

52H 53H 20H 43H 52H
Forced change No.: Specifies the No. (nnnn) of the control relay whose contact
is to be forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No. in the range
0000 to 3915.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10
RSS_CR Write continuous control relay contact resets
This command forcibly turns a specified number of control relay contacts OFF.
■ Command
Change C
R S S C R Forced change start No. count R
53H 54H 53H 20H 43H 52H 20H
Forced change start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnn) of the control relays whose
contacts are to be forcibly turned OFF. Specify the No.
in the range 0000 to 3915.

OFF starting from the "Forced change start No.". The
number of contacts that can be forcibly turned OFF is 1
to 16.
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-45
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 294 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WR_DM/WR_CM Write data memories/control memories

This command writes data to data memories/control memories.
■ Command
W R D M Write No. Data C

R
57H 52H 20H 44H 4DH 20H
or
W R C M Write No. Data C

R
57H 52H 20H 43H 4DH 20H
Write No.: Specifies a No. (nnnnn) of the data memory or control memory
to which data is to be written. Specify the data memory No. in
the range 00000 to 19999 (39999 when memory is added on)
or control memory No. in the range 0000 to 3999.
Data: Specifies the data (ddddd) to be written to the data memory

specified by "Write No.". The range of values is 00000 to 65535
(decimal).
10 ■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-46
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 295 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WRS_DM/WRS_CM Write continuous data memories/control memories

This command writes data to a specified number of data memories/control memories.
■ Command
Write
W R S D M Write start No. count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 44H 4DH 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
or
Write
W R S C M Write start No. count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 43H 4DH 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No.: Specifies the start No. (nnnnn) of the data memory or control
memory to which data is to be written. Specify the data memory
No. in the range 00000 to 19999 (39999 when memory is added
on) or control memory No. in the range 0000 to 3999.
Write count: Specifies how many data items are to be written to starting from 10
written is 1 to 8.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the data (ddddd) to write to the data memory or
control memory specified by the "Write start No." to data 1, and
specifies the data (ddddd) to write to the next No. data memory
or control memory at "Write start No." to data 2. From data 3
onwards, the data (ddddd) to write to the corresponding No. is
specified. The data range is 00000 to 65535 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-47
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 296 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WR_TM Write temporary data memory

This command writes data to temporary data memories.
■ Command
W R T M Write No. Data C

R
57H 52H 20H 54H 4DH 20H
Write No.: Specifies the No. (nnn) of the temporary data memory to write
data to. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Data: Specifies the data (ddddd) to be written to the temporary data

memory specified by "Write No.". The range of values is 00000
to 65535 (decimal).
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-48
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 297 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WRS_TM Write continuous temporary data memories

This command writes data to a specified number of temporary data memories.
■ Command
Write
W R S T M Write start No. count Data 1
57H 52H 53H 20H 54H 4DH 20H 20H 20H
Data 2 Data n C
R
20H
Write start No. Specifies the start No. (nnn) of the temporary data memory to
write data to. Specify the No. in the range 000 to 511.
Write count: Specifies how many temporary data memories data is to be

written to starting from the "Write start No.". The number of data
items that can be written is 1 to 8.
Data 1, 2 ...: Specifies the data (ddddd) to write to the temporary data
memory specified by the "Write start No." to data 1, and
specifies the data (ddddd) to write to the next No. temporary
data memory at "Write start No." to data 2. From data 3
onwards, the data (ddddd) to write to the corresponding No. is
specified. The data range is 00000 to 65535 (decimal).
10
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

entered.
10-49
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 298 2012/03/15 17:25:35

WRT Set time

This commands sets the time of the CPU Unit KV-700.
■ Command
W R T Data1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 CR

57H 52H 54H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H
Data 1: Enter the lower two digits of the year according to the Western
calendar. "00" is the year 2000. Enter a value in the range 0 to
99.
Data 2: Enter two digits for the month within the range 01 to 12.
Data 3: Enter two digits for the day within the range 01 to 31.
Data 4: Enter two digits for the hour within the range 00 to 23.
Data 5: Enter two digits for the minute within the range 00 to 59.
Data 6: Enter two digits for the second within the range 00 to 59.
Data 7: Enter one digit for the day of the week. The table below shows
the correspondence between day of the week and input value.
Input a value within the range 0 to 6.
Input value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 Day of the week Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat
■ Response
O K C L
R F
4FH 4BH

10-50
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 299 2012/03/15 17:25:35

Responses during an Error

If you send the wrong command or an error occurs on the CPU Unit, a response different from a regular
response is returned. The table below summarizes the content, cause and remedy to take for each of the
responses that are returned during an error.
Code Description Cause Remedy

E0 Device No. • The specified device No. exceeds the • Specify a No. in the pre-determined
error range. range.
• Timer, counter, CTH, and CTC Nos. not • Check the program, and specify the No.
specified in the program have been used in the program.
specified. • Register the monitor before you instruct
• A monitor read was performed even reading of a monitor.
though monitoring is not registered.
E1 Command • A common not supported by the KV-700 • Check the command, and send the
error was sent. correct command.
• The method for specifying the command "Explanation of Commands and
is wrong. Responses" page 10-7
• A command other than CR was sent • Sent CR to establish communications
before communications was established. before re-sending the command.
E2 Program not • The "M1 (switch to RUN mode)" was • Register the program to the CPU Unit,
registered sent without the program registered to and then send the command.
the CPU Unit.
• The "M1 (switch to RUN mode)" was • Set the RUN/PROG switch on the CPU
sent with the RUN/PROG switch on the Unit to RUN.
CPU Unit set to PROG.
E4 Write
protected
• An attempt was made to change the
setting values of a timer, counter or CTC
• Cancel the program write protection, and
then re-send the command.
10
in a write-protected program.
E5 Unit error • The "M1 (switch to RUN mode)" was • Cancel the error on the KV-700, elimi-
sent without the error on the KV-700 nate the cause of the error, and then re-
canceled. send the command.
E6 No comment • Comments are not registered to the • If necessary, register the comment to the
device selected by the "Read comment device.
RDC" command.
10-51
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 300 2012/03/15 17:25:35

10-4 Sending/Receiving
10-5 Explanation of Commands
Text Data
and Responses
10-5 Sending/Receiving Text Data

You can connect an external device having an RS-232C-compliant interface to the KV-700, and
batch-write continuous text data (99 bytes or less, or 198 bytes or less), or send text data in data
memories.
Receiving Text Data

■ Receive data format and internal data memories
The KV-700 writes text data of 99 bytes or less when CR2805 is OFF, and 198 bytes or less when
CR2805 is ON of text data between STX and ETX one byte at a time (two bytes at a time when
CR2085 is ON) in ASCII code to internal data memories CM1000 to CM1099.
CM1000 CM1001 CM1002 to CM1098 CM1099
When CR2805 is ON STX Number of Data 1, Data 3, data 4, Data 197, ETX
data bytes data 2 data 5 to data 198 data 198
When CR2805 is OFF STX Number of Data 1 Data 2, Data 99 ETX
data bytes data 3 to data 98
Receive data format

As the format of text data that is received on the KV-700, the 1st byte is STX(02H), the 2nd byte
onwards is the data, and the final byte is EXT(03H).
1st byte 2nd byte onwards Final byte
10 STX Text data (99 bytes or less, or 198 bytes or less) ETX
When CR2805 is OFF

Text data captured on the KV-700 is stored in ASCII code as follows to internal data
memories CM1000 to CM1099.
Data memory CM1000 CM1001 CM1002 CM1003 to CM1098 CM1099

No. Number of Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 to data 98 Data 99
data bytes
Number of data bytes
Receive data STX Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 99 ETX
Leading CM1000 Leading CM+1 Leading CM+2 Leading CM+3 Leading CM+99
Data memory (Number of data bytes)
15 00
Data memory
bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Upper 8 bits (00) Lower 8 bits (ASCII code)
10-52
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 301 2012/03/15 17:25:35

10-4 Explanation
10-5ofSending/Receiving
Commands and Responses
Text Data
When CR2805 is ON
"00" is written to the upper eight bits of the data memory, and text data is written to the
lower eight bits in ASCII code.
When CR2085 is ON, text data is stored 2 bytes at a time to a single control memory.

No. Number of Data 1, Data 3, Data 5 to data 196 Data 197,
data bytes data 2 data 4 data 198
Receive data STX Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 198 ETX
Leading CM1000 Leading CM+1 Leading CM+2 Leading CM+3 Leading CM+99
Data memory (Number of data bytes)
15 00
Data memory
bits 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Upper 8 bits (ASCII code) Lower 8 bits (ASCII code)
■ Operation of special auxiliary relays

With reception of text data, three special auxiliary relays turn ON for one scan only
during data capture or when an error occurs.
Relay No.
CR2801
Description
On for one scan only when text data is received
10
CR2802 On for one scan only when text data is received while CR2801 is
ON or CR2803 is ON
CR2803 On for one scan only when a text data receive error has oc-
curred
• When the Break signal cannot be sent to the PC, the communications
program can be initialized by turning the KV-700 OFF then back ON again.
Try establishing communications again.
communications.
• If an ETX is found in the read data of the text data, the data preceding the
ETX is transferred to data memory. Data following ETX is not captured.
• If a parity error occurs during text data reception, that text data will not be
transferred to data memory, and control relays CR2082 and CR2083 turn
ON for one scan only.
10-53
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 302 2012/03/15 17:25:35

10-4 Sending/Receiving
10-5 Explanation of Commands
Text Data
and Responses
Sending Text Data

The KV can send text data written in ASCII code to internal data memories in single
bytes at a time.
■ Send data format and internal data memory

Data to be sent must first be written to control memory in the following format.
When CR2806 is OFF

Write "00" to the upper eight bits of the control memory, and write text data to the lower
eight bits in ASCII code.

No. Number of Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 to data 98 Data 99
data bytes
15 00
Data memory
bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Upper 8 bits (00) Lower 8 bits (ASCII code)
Data memory Leading CM1000 Leading CM+1 Leading CM+2 Leading CM+3 Leading CM+99
10 Send data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 99

When CR2806 is ON
Write "00" to the upper eight bits of the control memory, and write text data to the lower
eight bits in ASCII code.

No. Number of Data 1, Data 3, Data 5 to data 196 Data 197,
data bytes data 2 data 4 data 198
15 00
Data memory
bits 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Upper 8 bits (ASCII code) Lower 8 bits (ASCII code)
Data memory Leading CM1000 Leading CM+1 Leading CM+2 Leading CM+3 Leading CM+99
Send data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 198
10-54
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 303 2012/03/15 17:25:35

10-4 Explanation
10-5ofSending/Receiving
Text Data
■ Operation of special auxiliary relays

The KV has two special auxiliary relays for transmission of text data. Text data and
the Break signal is sent according to the ON/OFF setting of these relays.
Relay No. Description

CR2804 Text data send start/cancel ON: send OFF: cancel
CR2800 Break signal send start/stop ON: send OFF: stop
• When the Break signal cannot be sent to the PC, the communications
program can be initialized by turning the KV-700 OFF then back ON again.
Try establishing communications again.
communications.
• To start sending text data, set CR2804.

CR2804 stays ON while text data is being sent.
CR2804 turns OFF automatically when transmission ends.
To forcibly cancel transmission of text data midway, reset CR2804 by RES
CR2804.
• The Break signal is sent for the duration that CR2800 is ON.
The SET and RES, or OUT and OUB instructions are used to control the Break 10
signal.
The communications program on the KV-700 itself is initialized after the Break
signal is sent.
0001 . Send BREAK signal 1S

CR2008 T000 CR2800
0002
CR2800 #10
0003 T000
0004 . Send byte unit setting

CR2008 CR2805
0005 RES
0006 . Send text data"STX KEYENCE ETX"

00000 #00009 $0002 $004B $0045 $0059 $0045 $004E $0043
0007 DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW
CM1100 CM1101 CM1102 CM1103 CM1104 CM1105 CM1106 CM1107
0008
$0045 $00003 CR2804

0009 DW DW SET
CM1108 CM1109
0010 . Receive text data

CR2801 CM1000 CM1001 CM1002 CM1003 CM1004 CM1005 CM1006 CM1007
0011 LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA • 11th rung is the
ladder program for
CR2803 T001 00500
0012 the reception monitor.
00500 #30
0013 T001
0014
END
0015
ENDH
0016
0017
10-55
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 304 2012/03/15 17:25:35

10-4
10-6 Explanation
ASCII Code of
Table
10-6 ASCII Code Table

This section describes the content of the ASCII code table.
10
10-56
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 305 2012/03/15 17:25:35

VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the various functions incorporated on the KV-
700 CPU Unit such as functions for setting and checking PLC
operation, and handy functions when debugging programs and
performing adjustments with external devices.
11-1 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function ............................. 11-2
11-2 I/O Inhibit Function ...........................................................11-3
11-3 Input Time Constant Selection Function ........................ 11-4
11-4 Latch Function (Power Interruption Hold) ...................... 11-5 11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-5 Direct Clock Pulse Output ............................................... 11-7
11-6 Clock Function ................................................................ 11-22
11-7 Other Functions .............................................................. 11-23
11-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 306 2012/03/15 17:25:35

11-1 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function
11-1 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function

The fixed scan time operation function executes the program with the scan time held
at a fixed value.
This section describes how to set the scan time.
Fixed Scan Time Operation

Normally, when a program is executed, the scan time changes according to the
processing content.
When this function is used, a wait is caused by END processing to keep the scan time
at a fixed value. When the scan time is longer than the preset time, the scan time
changes. Always set the time after having actually measured the scan time to confirm
the time of the program to be executed.
■ How to set fixed scan time operation
1 Set the scan time to CM0721. (in 1 msec units)

2 Fixed scan time operation is started when CR3203 turns ON.
3 Set in the range 200 msec or below.
11 Setting "0" returns to regular operation. Even if you set a value of 200 msec or more,
the scan time does not become 200 msec or more.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
When the scan time exceeds the setting value, CR2304 turns ON, and the scan time
is stored to CM0722. (1 msec units)
Note: • Be sure to set a value larger than the measured scan time (stored to
CM0720). The value is stored to CM0720 in 0.1 msec units.
• When the power is turned ON or at a reset, the content of CM0721 is
cleared. When fixed scan time operation is used, set the value of CM0721
in the program.
11-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 307 2012/03/15 17:25:35

11-2 I/O Inhibit Function
11-2 I/O Inhibit Function

I/O processing is executed at each scan during program execution. This section
describes how to inhibit I/O.
"About Scan Time" page 4-3
Input Refresh Inhibit Function

The "input refresh inhibit function" disables refreshing of the content of the input relay
by input signals from an external device.
If input is inhibited, debugging can be performed without the use of an external device
by using the KV BUILDER's monitor function to forcibly turn input relays ON/OFF.
■ Method of use
Inhibit/enable inputs by the content set to CR2301.
Control relay Details of Operation
CR2301 ON: Inhibits input refresh processing in END processing.
The content of the input relay is not updated.
OFF: Enables input refresh processing in END processing.
The content of the input relay is updated according to the
state of the input signal.
Output Inhibit Function

The "output inhibit function" disables output of signals to external devices even if the
program is turning output coils ON/OFF.
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
■ Method of use
Inhibit/enable outputs by the content set to CR2300.
CR2300 ON: Inhibit output processing in END processing.
OFF: Enables output processing in END processing.
The content of output coils is output for the output.
Note: Positioning pulse output, arbitrary frequency output, and direct clock pulse
output cannot be inhibited even if CR2300 is set to ON.
The access window and the I/O indicator LED turn ON/OFF.
11-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 308 2012/03/15 17:25:35

11-3 Input Time Constant Selection Function
11-3 Input Time Constant Selection Function

This section describes how to set the input time constant.
About the Input Time Constant

The CPU Unit and Input Unit can alter changing of the input timing when signals are
read from input contacts as an input time constant. Use this function to shorten the input
time constant, for example, when you want to input a short-width pulse after connecting
a non-contact external device such as a transistor output that does not generate
chattering.
■ How to change the input time constant of the KV-700 CPU Unit
The input time constant of the KV-700 can be switched by setting control relay
CR2305 and control memory CM1620.
Normally, the input time constant is 10 ms. However, it can be changed to a value
batch-set in CM1620 when control relay CR2305 is turned ON.

CR2305 ON: Sets the input time constant at CM1620.
OFF: The input time constant is fixed to 10 ms.
Control relay Setting Value Input time constant

CM1620 0 10 µs
1 20 µs
2 500 µs
11 3
4
1 ms
2.5 ms
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 or more Do not set this value.
Note, however, that when the HSP instruction and control relay CR2305 are used
simultaneously, the HSP instruction is given priority, and the specified relay cannot
be changed to the value set at CM1620.
Control relay CR2305
OFF: Sets the input time constant to 10 ms.
ON: References the value entered at CM1620 to determine the time constant.
Note: The input time constant is set after one scan has ended. Accordingly,
specified details are enabled from the next scan onwards.
■ How to change the input time constant of the Expansion Input Unit
Change the input time constant of the Expansion Input Unit on the Unit Editor.
For details on how to set on Unit Editor, refer to the "KV BUILDER User's Manual."
For details on access window operations, see "Chapter 2 Access Window."
11-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 309 2012/03/15 17:25:35

11-4 Latch Function (Power Interruption Hold)

The latch function holds (power interruption hold) the content of devices at the state
before the power was turned OFF by battery backup even if the power is turned OFF.
Latch Function
The state of data memories or relays can be held in the event of a power interruption.
Set the latch function by the MEMSW instruction. ( Refer to the Instruction Refer-
ence Manual.)
The memory switch has two switches, 0 and 1.

Each switch comprises 16 bits, and switch functions are set by turning these bits ON/
OFF.
The content of the memory switches is set when the program is transferred.
If the program does not contain the MEMSW instruction, "$0000" is set on the switch.
MEMSW0
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 MEMSW0
$1120
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
No. Switch Functions ON OFF

0 Cancel error at power ON ON OFF 11
Write protection of main routine
ON OFF
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
1 program
SW1
2 Reserved for system – –
3 Counter, CTH and CTC values Clear Hold
Set digital trimmer upper limit
0 value Enabled Disabled
SW2 1 Reserved for system – –
DM00000 to DM09999 at power
0 ON Clear Hold
1 DM10000 to DM19999 at power Clear Hold
SW3 ON
2 ON Clear Hold
3
ON Clear Hold
11-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 310 2012/03/15 17:25:35

MEMSW1
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 MEMSW0
$3210
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
No. Switch Functions ON OFF

0 Hold relays 01000 to 04915 ON OFF
SW1 1 Hold relays 05000 to 09915 ON OFF
11 Note: Set holding of relays set by MEMSW1 only to internal auxiliary relays.
Do not set this function to I/O Units and special units (units other than I/O
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Units). When this function is set to I/O relays, the relays do not hold the
content of devices. When this function is set to relays assigned to special
units, the program may not function normally. In the case of programs that
detect the up edge of relays at the first scan after operation is started, the up
edge may not be able to be detected and the unit may not operate if that relay
is held.
[Example]
• Setting of error cancellation when the • Setting of program write protection

unit is turned ON
MEMSW0 MEMSW0
$0001 $0002
• Setting to clear DM00000 to DM09999 • Setting to hold relays 01000 to 04915

when the unit is turned ON
MEMSW0 MEMSW1
$0100 $0001
• Setting to enable the digital trimmer

upper limit value
MEMSW0
$0010
11-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 311 2012/03/15 17:25:35

11-5 Direct Clock Pulse Output

This section briefly describes direct clock pulse output and how to set direct clock pulse
output.
Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output

High-speed counters (CTH) and high-speed counter comparators (CTC) can be used
to output a clock pulse that is not affected by the cycle time directly to output relay 00500
or 00501.
Set the pulse cycle (frequency) and pulse width by the internal clock cycle and high-
speed counter comparator (CTC) for the high-speed counter (CTH).
The cycle (frequency) of the clock pulse that can be set can be changed as desired
within the following ranges by the program.
Output Internal Clock Pulse Cycle (frequency) Range

00500 CR2100 (1.0 µs) 10 µs (100 kHz) to 4294967.295 ms
CR2101 (10.0 µs) 20 µs (50 kHz) to 42949672.95 ms
CR2102 (100.0 µs) 200 µs (5 kHz) to 429496729.5 ms
00501 CR2200 (1.0 µs) 10 µs (100 kHz) to 4294967.295 ms
CR2201 (10.0 µs) 20 µs (50 kHz) to 42949672.95 ms
CR2202 (100.0 µs) 200 µs (5 kHz) to 429496729.5 ms
For the pulse output, the internal clock pulse is counted by the high-speed counter
(CTH). Each time that the current value becomes equal to the setting value of high-
speed counter comparator (CTC), the ON/OFF states of output relays 00500 and 11
00501 changes to generate a pulse.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Count value
CTC
ON ON
Note: • The ON/OFF states of output relays 00500 and 00501 is determined by the
settings of the control relays.
• For details on how to set control relays, read "Outline of High-speed
Counters " ( page 6-2).
• Output at start of direct clock pulse output always starts from an OFF state.
• During direct clock pulse output, ootput relays 00500 and 00501 cannot be
used by the regular program.
11-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 312 2012/03/15 17:25:35

Setting Pulse Output by High-speed Counter Comparator

Altering the pulse cycle/width
You can alter only the pulse width and keep the pulse cycle fixed, or alter only the pulse
cycle and keep the pulse width fixed by using two high-speed counter comparators.
The pulse cycle and pulse width according to the high-speed counter comparator are
as follows.
■ ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse
Set pulse ON/OFF by special

auxiliary relay.
ON
OFF Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
Pulse width (µs) = CTC0 setting value x internal clock cycle (µs)
Pulse cycle (µs) = CTC0 setting value x 2 x internal clock cycle (µs)
To calculate the pulse cycle from the frequency, calculate as follows:

Pulse cycle (µs) = 1000000 ÷ frequency (Hz)
[Example] To output a pulse of 10 kHz

Pulse cycle = 1000000 ÷ 10000 = 100 µs
11 CTC0 setting value = 100 ÷ 2 ÷ 1 = 50
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
■ Pulse of variable pulse width

The pulse cycle and pulse width can be varied by varying the setting values of CTC0
and CTC1.
Set pulse ON/OFF by special

auxiliary relay.
ON
OFF Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
Pulse width (µs) = CTC1 setting value x internal clock cycle (µs)
Pulse cycle (µs) = CTC0 setting value x internal clock cycle (µs)
• The pulse width can be varied by varying the setting value of CTC1.
• The pulse cycle can be varied by varying the setting value of CTC0.
Note: The pulse width determined above becomes the pulse width that is output
internally on the KV-700.
Actually, the pulse is output after passing through the output circuit. So, the
pulse width fluctuates due to the response delay or the influence of the
connected load. Set the pulse width after having measured the actual output
waveform by an oscilloscope in advance. (Use a pulse of variable pulse
width.)
11-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 313 2012/03/15 17:25:35

How to calculate the pulse cycle and comparator setting value

The maximum frequency of the clock pulse that can be output on the KV-700 is about
100 kHz.
Calculate the pulse cycle when the clock pulse is output and the setting value of the
high-speed comparator by the following equations.
■ Pulse cycle
Pulse cycle (µs) = 1000000 ÷ frequency (Hz)
■ ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse (when one comparator is used)
ON
OFF Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
CTC setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs) ÷ 2
■ Pulse of variable pulse width
ON
OFF Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
CTC setting value for pulse width = Pulse width (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
CTC setting value for pulse cycle = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)
■ Setting range of CTC by internal clock

Special auxiliary relay Cycle CTC Setting Range
(internal clock)
CR2100 CR2200 1.0 µs 5 to 4294967295
CR2101 CR2201 10.0 µs 1 to 4294967295
CR2102 CR2202 100.0 µs 1 to 4294967295
Note: • When CR2100 and CR2200 are set as the operands of the high-speed
counter (CTH), set the setting value of CTC to five or more. When the setting
value is set to a value smaller than five, the clock pulse will not be output
correctly.
• The pulse width changes according to the load that is connected. Set the
pulse width after having measured the actual output waveform by an
oscilloscope in advance.
• When CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3 are used to generate the clock
pulse, do not set the setting values of CTC0 and CTC1 or CTC2 and CTC3
to the same value.
11-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 314 2012/03/15 17:25:35

Operation by control relay

■ Operation by control relay for high-speed counter (CTH0)
The ON/OFF state of output relay 00500 can be changed as follows by setting control relays (CR2103 to
CR2112) at start of operation, or by changing the relays while the clock pulse is being generated.
Also, the pulse cycle, pulse width or direct output enable/disable can be set as desired.
Operation of output relay 00500 during control relay ON/OFF is as follows.
High-speed Control
Counter Relays Operation when CTH0 (current value) = CTC (setting value)
Comparator
CTC0 CR2103 Automatic clear of CTH0 current value ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
CR2104 Inhibit control of 00500. ON: Inhibit OFF: Enable
CR2105 Turn direct output of 00500 OFF. ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
CR2106 Turn direct output of 00500 ON. ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
CR2107 Invert 00500 output ON/OFF. ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
CTC1 CR2108 Inhibit control of 00500. ON: Inhibit OFF: Enable
CR2112 Automatic clear of CTH0 current value ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
● Setting the control relays

Control relays must be set to generate a clock pulse. Set them by the following method.
• Of CR2104 to CR2107 and CR2108 to CR2111, only one of each of these control relay relays can be set
to ON.
11 • The SET, RES or STA instructions are used to turn CR2103 to CR2112 ON/OFF.
• Control of 00500 is enabled by turning CR2104 and CR2108 OFF.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
• To vary the pulse cycle, be sure to set CR2103 or CR2112 ON, and automatically clear the current value
of CTH0. The pulse cycle cannot be changed unless CR2103 or CR2112 are turned ON.
• The clock pulse can be output or stopped by turning CR2105 ON/OFF.
Note: When multiple relays are turned ON each within the ranges CR2104 to CR2107 and CR2108 to CR2111,
the relay having the smallest No. is given priority.
● Operation of output 00500 by control relay setting

ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse Pulse of variable pulse width
Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting
CR2103 ON CR2112 OFF CR2103 ON CR2112 OFF
CR2104 OFF CR2108 ON CR2104 OFF CR2108 OFF
CR2105 OFF CR2109 OFF CR2105 OFF CR2109 ON
CR2106 OFF CR2110 OFF CR2106 ON CR2110 OFF
CR2107 ON CR2111 OFF CR2107 OFF CR2111 OFF
Count value Count value
CTC0 CTC0
CTC1
ON ON ON ON ON ON
11-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 315 2012/03/15 17:25:35

■ Operation by control relay for high-speed counter (CTH1)

The ON/OFF state of output relay 00501 can be changed as follows by setting control relays (CR2203 to
CR2212) at start of operation, or by changing the relays while the clock pulse is being generated.
Also, the pulse cycle, pulse width or direct output enable/disable can be set as desired.
Operation of output relay 00501 during control relay ON/OFF is as follows.
High-speed Control
Counter Relays Operation when CTH1 (current value) = CTC (setting value)
Comparator
CTC2 CR2203 Automatic clear of CTH1 current value ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
CR2204 Inhibit control of 00501. ON: Inhibit OFF: Enable
CTC3 CR2208 Inhibit control of 00501. ON: Inhibit OFF: Enable
CR2212 Automatic clear of CTH1 current value ON: Execute OFF: Do not execute
● Setting the control relays

Control relays must be set to generate a clock pulse. Set them by the following method.
• Of CR2204 to CR2207 and CR2208 to CR2211, only one of each of these control relay relays can be set
to ON.
• The SET, RES or STA instructions are used to turn CR2203 to CR2212 ON/OFF.
• Control of 00501 is enabled by turning CR2204 and CR2208 OFF.
• To vary the pulse cycle, be sure to set CR2203 or CR2212 ON, and automatically clear the current value
11
of CTH1. The pulse cycle cannot be changed unless CR2203 or CR2212 are turned ON.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
• The clock pulse can be output or stopped by turning CR2205 ON/OFF.
Note: When multiple relays are turned on each within the control relay ranges CR2204 to CR2207 and CR2208
to CR2211, the relay having the smallest No. is given priority.
● Operation of output 00501 by control relay setting

ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse Pulse of variable pulse width
Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting
CR2203 ON CR2212 OFF CR2203 ON CR2212 OFF
CR2204 OFF CR2208 ON CR2204 OFF CR2208 OFF
CR2205 OFF CR2209 OFF CR2205 OFF CR2209 ON
CR2206 OFF CR2210 OFF CR2206 ON CR2210 OFF
CR2207 ON CR2211 OFF CR2207 OFF CR2211 OFF
Count value Count value

CTC2 CTC2
CTC3
ON ON ON ON ON ON
11-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 316 2012/03/15 17:25:36

Example of Direct Clock Pulse Output (output example of ON/OFF ratio 1:1)
To output a clock pulse of cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from output 00500
The following describes an example of a program for outputting a clock pulse of pulse
ON/OFF ratio 1:1 from output 00500 using high-speed counter (CTH0) and high-speed
counter comparator (CTC0).
■ Control relay settings

Set CR2103 to CR2107 as shown in the table on the Relay No. Setting
right.
CR2103 ON
The program can be simplified by using reverse CR2104 OFF
output (toggle) for the ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse. CR2105 OFF
CR2106 OFF
CR2107 ON
■ Internal clock and setting value of CTC0

Determine the internal clock, and calculate the setting value of CTC0 at that time
by the following equation:
CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs) ÷ 2
In the above equation, substitute Control relay Internal Clock CTC0 Value
pulse cycle=1 ms and internal CR2100 1.0 µs 500
clock=10 µs (CR2101) in the cal-
CR2101 10.0 µs 50
culation to calculate the setting
value of CTC0. CR2102 100.0 µs 5
The setting value of CTC0 becomes "50".

11 Refer to the table on the right for values calculated by other internal clocks.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
■ Program example
CR2008 CR2103 CR2104 CR2105 CR2106 CR2107 CTH0 • Set the pulse output to output 00500 by
00001 SET RES RES RES SET RES
CR2104 to CR2107.
CR2002 CTH0
00002 CR2101 In the example, set so that direct output to
#00050 00500 is enabled (CR2104: OFF), and out-
00003 CTC0 put to 00500 is reversed (CR2107: ON)
each time that CTH0=CTC0.
• Set CR2103 to ON, and specify clearing of
CTH0 by CTC0.
Count value
By this setting, clearing of the current value
CTC0 of CTH0 by the value set at CTC0 is re-
peated.
ON ON • The current value of CTH0 (RES CTH0

section of program) is cleared at the start of
operation.
By this setting, the pulse width of the clock
pulse is output correctly from the 1st pulse.
• The enable input relay of CTH0 is always
used at ON during clock pulse output.
Note: When high-speed counter enable input is used for starting and stopping clock
pulse output, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when clock
pulse output is started.
11-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 317 2012/03/15 17:25:36

■ One-point advice
When controlling (enabling/disabling) clock pulse output by external inputs, control
output by CR2105 ON/OFF.
CR2105 ON/OFF is executed by the SET, RES or KEEP instructions.
Accordingly, clock pulse output always starts from "OFF" and ends at "OFF".
When the program in either of the figures below is added to the example on the
previous page, the clock pulse is output from 00500 only when 00000 is "ON".
● When SET/RES instruction is used ● When KEEP instruction is used
00000 CR2105 00000 KEEP

SET SET
CR2105
00000 CR2105 00000
RES RES
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 318 2012/03/15 17:25:36

To output a clock pulse of cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from output 00501

The following describes an example of a program for outputting a clock pulse of pulse
ON/OFF ratio 1:1 from output 00501 using high-speed counter (CTH1) and high-speed
counter comparator (CTC2).

Set CR2203 to CR2207 as shown in the table on the Relay No. Setting
right.
CR2203 ON
The program can be simplified by using reverse CR2204 OFF
output (toggle) for the ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse. CR2205 OFF
CR2206 OFF
CR2207 ON
■ Internal clock and setting value of CTC2

Determine the internal clock, and calculate the setting value of CTC2 at that time
by the following equation:
CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs) ÷ 2
In the above equation, substitute
Control relay Internal Clock CTC0 Value
pulse cycle=1 ms and internal
clock=10 µs (CR2201) in the cal- CR2200 1.0 µs 500
culation to calculate the setting CR2201 10.0 µs 50
value of CTC2. CR2202 100.0 µs 5
The setting value of CTC2 becomes "50".

Refer to the table on the right for values calculated by other internal clocks.
11
■ Program example
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
CR2008 CR2203 CR2204 CR2205 CR2206 CR2207 CTH1 • Set the pulse output to output 00501 from
00001 SET RES RES RES SET RES CR2204 to CR2207.
CR2002 CTH1
00002 CR2201
In the example, set so that direct output to
00501 is enabled (CR2204: OFF), and out-
#00050
00003 CTC2 put of 00501 is reversed (CR2207: ON)
each time that CTH1=CTC2.
CTH1 by CTC2.
Count value
By this setting, clearing of the current value
CTC2 of CTH1 by the value set at CTC2 is re-
peated.
• The current value of CTH1 (RES CTH1
ON ON
section of program) is cleared at the start of
operation.
11-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 319 2012/03/15 17:25:36


00000 CR2205 00000 KEEP
SET SET
CR2205
00000 CR2205 00000
RES RES
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 320 2012/03/15 17:25:36

Example of Variable Clock Pulse ON/OFF Ratio

To output a pulse of cycle 500 µs (2 kHz) and pulse width 200 µs from output 00500
The following describes an example of a program for outputting a clock pulse for
varying the pulse ON/OFF ratio from output 0500 using high-speed counter (CTH0)
and high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, CTC1).

Set CR2103 to CR2112 as Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting
shown in the table on the CR2103 ON CR2112 OFF
right.
CR2104 OFF CR2108 OFF
CR2105 OFF CR2109 ON
CR2106 ON CR2110 OFF
■ Internal clock and setting value of CTC0, CTC1

Determine the internal clock, and calculate the setting value of CTC0 and CTC1 at
that time by the following equation:
CTC1 setting value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)

CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)
In the above equation, substitute pulse width=200 µs, pulse cycle=500 µs and
11 internal clock=10 µs (CR2101) in the calculation to calculate the setting values of
CTC0 and CTC1.
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
The setting value of CTC1 becomes "20" and the setting value of CTC0 becomes
"50".
Control relay Internal Clock CTC0 Value CTC1 Value
CR2100 1.0 µs 500 200
CR2101 10.0 µs 50 20
CR2102 100.0 µs 5 2
■ Program example
CR2008 CR2103 CR2104 CR2105 CR2106 CR2107 • Set the pulse output to output 00500 by
00001 SET RES RES SET RES
CR2104 to CR2107 and CR2108 to
CR2108 CR2109 CR2110 CR2111 CR2112 CTH0 CR2111.
00002 RES SET RES RES RES RES
CR2002 CTH0 In the example, set so that direct output to

00003 CR2101 00500 is enabled (CR2104: OFF), and
#00050 output to 00500 is turned ON by CTC0
00004 CTC0
(CR2106: ON) and OFF by CTC1 (CR2109:
#00020 ON).
00005 CTC1
CTH0 by CTC0.
Count value pulse is output correctly from the 1st pulse.
CTC0
CTC1
ON ON ON ON
11-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 321 2012/03/15 17:25:36

Note: • When high-speed counter enable input is used for starting and stopping
clock pulse output, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan
when clock pulse output is started.
• Refer to "One-point advice" below for details on starting and stopping clock
pulse output.
00000 CR2105 00000 KEEP

SET SET
CR2105
00000 CR2105 00000
RES RES
• The cycle (frequency) of the clock pulse can be varied by using the STA
instruction to rewrite the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC0.
For details on varying the clock pulse cycle, read "Setting Pulse Output by
High-speed Counter Comparator" (page 11-8).
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 322 2012/03/15 17:25:36

To output a pulse of cycle 500 µs (2 kHz) and pulse width 200 µs from output 00501
The following describes an example of a program for outputting a clock pulse for
varying the pulse width from output 00501 using high-speed counter (CTH1) and high-
speed counter comparators (CTC2, CTC3).

Set CR2203 to CR2212 as Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting
shown in the table on the CR2203 ON CR2212 OFF
right.
■ Internal clock and setting values of CTC2 and CTC3

Determine the internal clock, and calculate the setting value of CTC2 and CTC3 at
that time by the following equation:
CTC3 setting value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)

CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ internal clock (µs)
In the above equation, substitute pulse width=200 µs, pulse cycle=500 µs and
internal clock=10 µs (CR2201) in the calculation to calculate the setting values of
CTC2 and CTC3.
11 The setting value of CTC3 becomes "20" and the setting value of CTC2 becomes
"50".
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
CR2200 1.0 µs 500 200
CR2201 10.0 µs 50 20
CR2202 100.0 µs 5 2
■ Program example
CR2008 CR2203 CR2204 CR2205 CR2206 CR2207 • Set the pulse output to output 00501 from
00001 SET RES RES SET RES
CR2208 CR2209 CR2210 CR2211 CR2212 CTH1 CR2211.
00002 RES SET RES RES RES RES
CR2002 CTH1 In the example, set so that direct output to

00003 CR2201 00501 is enabled (CR2204: OFF), and out-
#00050 put of 00501 is turned ON by CTC2
00004 CTC2 (CR2206: ON) and OFF by CTC3 (CR2209:
#00020 ON).
00005 CTC3
CTH1 by CTC2.
Count value pulse is output correctly from the 1st pulse.
CTC2 • The enable input relay of CTH1 is always

CTC3
ON ON ON ON
11-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 323 2012/03/15 17:25:36


00000 CR2205 00000 KEEP
SET SET
CR2205
00000 CR2205 00000
RES RES
• The cycle (frequency) of the clock pulse can be varied by using the STA
instruction to rewrite the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC2.
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 324 2012/03/15 17:25:36

Example of Stopping Clock Pulse Output at a Specified Number of Pulses

To stop clock pulse output after output of 10,000 clock pulses of cycle 500µs (2 kHz)
and pulse width 200 µs from output 00500.
■ Control relay, internal clock and CTC settings

The following table shows the settings of the control relays and CTC0 and CTC1
according to the internal clock.
Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting
The following table shows the internal clock and CTC0, CTC1 setting values.
CR2100 1.0 µs 500 200
CR2101 10.0 µs 50 20
CR2102 100.0 µs 5 2
■ Program example
CR2008 CR2103 CR2104 CR2105 CR2106 CR2107 • Set the pulse output to output 00500 by
00001 EI SET RES SET SET RES
11
CR2108 CR2109 CR2110 CR2111 CR2112 CR2111.
00002 RES SET RES RES RES
In the example, set so that direct output to
CR2203 CTH0 CTH1 00500 is enabled (CR2104: OFF), and out-
00003 SET RES RES
put to 00500 is turned ON by CTC0
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
00000 01000 01000 CR2105 (CR2106: ON) and OFF by CTC1 (CR2109:
00004 DIFU RES
ON).
CR2002 CTH0
00005 • Set CR2103 to ON, and specify clearing of
CR2101
CTH0 by CTC0.
#00050
00006 CTC0 By this setting, the pulse width of the clock
#00020
00007 CTC1 • Enable interrupts by the EI instruction.
Clock pulse output is stopped by the inter-
CR2002 CTH1
00008 00500 rupt program (INT CTC2) when the current
value of high-speed counter CTH1 becomes
#10000
00009 CTC2 equal to the setting value of high-speed
END
comparator CTC2.
00010 • Set CR2203 to ON, and specify clearing of
INT CTH1 by CTC2.
00011 CTC2 By this setting, repeated operation can be
CR2002 CR2105 performed at the specified pulse (10,000).
00012 SET • The enable input relay of CTH0 is always
RETI used at ON during clock pulse output.
00013 • The enable input relay of CTH1 is always
ENDH used at ON during clock pulse counting.
00014
• Specify the internal clock (CR2101) for
clock input of high-speed counter CTH0,
and specify 00500 for clock input of high-
speed counter CTH1.
By this setting, CTH0 is used for clock pulse
output, and CTH1 is used for clock pulse
counting.
• Set the number of clock pulses by the
setting value of high-speed counter com-
parator CTC2.
• Clock pulse output is started by input 00000
turning ON.
To restart clock pulse output after it has
stopped, turn input 00000 ON again.
11-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 325 2012/03/15 17:25:36

ON/OFF of CR2103 to CR2111 can also be set by the LDA and STA instructions
in addition to the Set and RES instructions.
The figure below shows how the sample program is rewritten with the LDA and STA
instructions. The number of rungs and steps used in the program can be reduced.
CR2008 CR2103 CR2104 CR2105 CR2106 CR2107 CR2008 $0268 CR2100 CTH0 CR2203 CR2813 CTH1
EI SET RES SET SET RES EI LDA STA RES SET SET RES
CR2108 CR2109 CR2110 CR2111 CTH0

RES SET RES RES RES
CR2203 CR2813 CTH1

SET SET RES
• About LDA $0268

When LDA $0268 is executed, input to internal registers is as follows.
[0] [2] [6] [8]
Internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
When STA CR2100 is executed, the values of the internal registers are assigned
to auxiliary relays CR2100 to CR2115.
** : 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Control relay
CR21 ** 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
By this setting, CR2103, CR2105, CR2106, and CR2109 turn ON.
11
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 326 2012/03/15 17:25:36

11-6 Clock Function
11-6 Clock Function

The KV-700 CPU Unit counts by the clock IC with "year, month, day, hours, minutes,
seconds and day of the week" backed up by battery even of the unit is turned OFF. This
section describes how to read that value and how to set the clock IC.
Clock Function
The KV-700 CPU Unit has a built-in clock. The current "year, month, day, hours,
minutes, seconds and day of the week" data can be read from this clock and used in
the program.
The clock's accuracy is ±20 ppm (25°C) and ±60 s/month. The clock operates even if
the CPU Unit is turned OFF.
■ How to read clock data

The calendar timer's time data is stored to control memories CM0700 to CM0706.
The following shows the format of the time data.
Bit Bit
15 0
CM700 Year 0 to 99 The lower two digits of the calendar year are displayed as the year.
CM701 Month 1 to 12
CM702 Day 1 to 31
CM703 Hour 0 to 23 All data is described in 16-bit binary data format.
CM704 Minute 0 to 59
CM705 Second 0 to 59
11 CM706 Day of week 0 to 6 Day of week is as follows:

0 (Sunday), 1 (Monday), 2 (Tuesday),
3 (Wednesday), 4 (Thursday), 5 (Friday), and 6 (Saturday).
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
• This data can be read directly on the ladder. (read only)
■ How to write clock data (time setting)

Write the time data using the WTIME instruction.
For details on the WTIME instruction, refer to "Instruction Reference Manual."
The time data can also be set in the access window.
For details on how to set the time in the access window, refer to "Displaying and
Setting the Date/Time" (page 2-21).
11-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 327 2012/03/15 17:25:36

11-7 Other Functions

This section describes other functions that come in handy when writing programs on
KV BUILDER. For details on operations, refer to the KV BUILDER User's Manual.
Contact Device Comment Store Function, Rung Comment Store Function

The contact comment store function transfers contact comments to the KV-700 CPU
Unit using KV BUILDER. Rung comments also be transferred.
The KV-700 CPU Unit can memorize not only programs but also the content of contact
comments assigned to each of the contacts in KV BUILDER. Programs that are difficult
to understand by device Nos, alone can be debugged more easily and programs made
more efficiently by assigning comments to contacts.
For details on how to assign comments and KV BUILDER operations, refer to "KV
BUILDER User's Manual."
Password Setting Function

The password setting function is for restricting reading of parameters or the program
stored on the PLC. If you set a password on KV BUILDER in advance, the parameters
or program on the PLC cannot be read unless the correct password is entered. Set a
password if reading of the program will inconvenience you.
For details on how to set, input and change password, and KV BUILDER operations, 11
refer to "KV BUILDER User's Manual."
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
11-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 328 2012/03/15 17:25:36

Precautions When Writing the Ladder Program in the RUN Mode
The KV-700 can rewrite the ladder program in KV BUILDER while the program is in the
WARNING RUN mode.
Pay sufficient attention to safety when rewriting the ladder program while the system
is in the RUN mode.
Rewriting the ladder program while the system is in the RUN mode may cause a
hazardous situation depending on the state of the control devices connected to the
PLC and the ladder program in use.
Pay sufficient attention to this when executing a ladder program.
Each of the functions act as follows when the ladder program is written while the system is in the RUN mode.
KV Function In RUN Mode Operation After Rewrite

High-speed counters/ Used → unused Initialization
high-speed counter compara- Unused → add Initialization
tors
Used → used (setting value of high- When the new setting value ≤
speed counter comparator is current value during setting of
changed) current value automatic clear, the
current value becomes the value of
the "new setting value - 1". Also, the
setting value is initialized when the
device specified for count input has
been changed.
11 Internal auxiliary/
Used → used/unused → unused
Hold
Current state is held.
control relays
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Positioning control functions Continued operation until current output completes

Cam switch function Continued operation
Specified frequency pulse Continued operation
output function
Frequency counter functions Continued operation
Differential detection type The differential information is initialized after conversion, and processing for
instructions newly acquiring differential information is performed. Differential detection
of relays whose state has changed during this period cannot be performed.
Note: When writing is performed when the program is in the RUN mode, and an error occurs on the KV
body, transfer the program again.
11-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 329 2012/03/15 17:25:36

These appendices present tables for the relays, timers, counters,
memory Nos. and special relays for each model of the KV-700 Series.
Refer to these appendices when using the KV-700 CPU.
1 Device No. Lists ................................................................. A-2
2 Error Message Lists ........................................................ A-15
3 ASCII Code Table ............................................................. A-18
4 Index ................................................................................. A-19
APPENDICES
A-1
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 330 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
1 Device No. Lists

The following pages list KV-700 device Nos.
Relay, Timer, Counter and Memory Nos. by Model

■ KV-700
Model No. KV-700 KV-700+M

CPU input relay 00000 to 00009
CPU output relay 00500 to 00503
Extended I/O relay 01000 to 59915
Internal auxiliary relay
Control relay CR0000 to 3915
Timers/counters T/C000 to 511
High-speed counter CTH0 to 1
High-speed counter comparator CTC0 to 3
Data memory DM00000 to 19999 DM00000 to 39999
Temporary memory TM000 to 512
Control memory CM0000 to 3999
APPENDICES
A-2
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 331 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
KV-700 Devices
Control relays CR
With control relays (CR0000 to CR3999), you can check the operation state of the CPU Unit, set input time constants,
set high-speed counters, and make other settings.
Control relays reserved for the system cannot be used.
Attribute
Blank: R/W
:
CR0715
:
CR0915
:
CR1715
:
CR1813
CR1814 Cam switch function, absolute/incremental ON: Absolute
OFF: Incremental
CR1815 Cam switch function, cam switch function stopped when turn ON
and OFF during operation
:
APPENDICES
CR2001
CR2002 R ON at all times
CR2003 R OFF at all times
CR2006 R 1s clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2009 ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
CR2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
CR2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
CR2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
:
CR2015
A-3
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 332 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
ON: Execute.
CR2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
Operation when OFF:
ON:
Do not execute.
Disable output.
ON: Execute.
CR2105 comparator CTC0 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 00500. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
ON: Disable output.
ON: Execute.
CR2109 highspeed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00500. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2110 comparator CTC1 is ON Turn ON direct output to 00500.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2113 Single-phase 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses

High-speed counter
selection.
ON: Execute.
CR2203 Operation when Automatically clear CTH1. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2205 comparator CTC2 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 00501.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
APPENDICES
comparator CTC2 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.

CR2209 highspeed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00501.

ON:
OFF:
Execute.
Do not execute.
comparator CTC3 is ON ON: Execute.
ON: Execute.
Single-phase 1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
CR2213 High-speed counter
selection.
ON: Execute.
CR2300 Disable external outputs OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2301 Disable external input refreshing OFF: Do not execute.

ON: Enabled
CR2303 Fixed scan time operation OFF: Disabled
CR2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
CR2305 Set input time constant of all CPU Unit inputs. ON: Set.
OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
(Determine referring to CM1620 when ON.)
CR2306 R ON at backup battery error
:
CR2315
A-4
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 333 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
ON: Use.

ON: Use.

:
CR2413
ON: Execute.
CR2414 Specified frequency pulse output OFF: Do not execute.
CR2415 Specified frequency pulse output, error

ON: Execute.
CR2500 Frequency counter, start of operation OFF: Do not execute.
CR2501 Frequency counter, Single-phase, Single-phase, 2-phase 1X 2 pulses

input source setting w/out direction w/ direction
CR2502 CR2501 OFF ON OFF ON
ON: rpm
CR2503 Frequency counter, Hz/rpm switching OFF: Hz
ON: Use.
CR2504 Frequency counter, user function for updating rpm by single rotation OFF: Do not use.

:
CR2507
ON: Execute.
CR2508 Cam switch, start of operation OFF: Do not execute.
CR2509 Cam switch, output response impossible warning (generated when output does not track during
cam switch operation)
CR2510 R Cam switch, error
:
APPENDICES
CR2615

Up edge Down edge Both edges

CR2704 INT2 interrupt polarity


:
CR2715
CR2800 Serial communications, send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
CR2801 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
CR2802 R Serial communications, text data download error
A-5
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 334 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CR2803 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
CR2804 Serial communications, start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
ON: Perform.
CR2805 Serial communications, receive text data in word units OFF: Do not perform.
ON: Perform.
CR2806 Serial communications, send text data in word units OFF: Do not perform.

:
CR2813
ON: Execute.
CR2814 Suppress zero during execution of DASC instruction (all suffixes) OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2815 Omit + sign during execution of DASC.S, DASC.L and DASC.F. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
ON: Execute.

:
CR2915
CR3000 X-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3001 X-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3002 X-axis, origin sensor input
CR3003 X-axis, stop sensor input
CR3004 R X-axis, zero return in operation
CR3005 X-axis, zero return completed
CR3007 X-axis, error/clear error
CR3008 X-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3009 X-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3010 X-axis, start driver operation
CR3011 X-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3012 X-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
:
APPENDICES
CR3015
CR3100 Y-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3101 Y-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3102 Y-axis, origin sensor input
CR3103 Y-axis, stop sensor input
CR3104 R Y-axis, zero return in operation
CR3105 Y-axis, zero return completed
CR3107 Y-axis, error/clear error
CR3108 Y-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3109 Y-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3110 Y-axis, start driver operation
CR3111 Y-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3112 Y-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
:
CR3115
A-6
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 335 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CR3200 Logging function, trigger setting
CR3201
CR3202 Logging function, time stamp ON
CR3203 Logging function, start
CR3204 Logging function, write during operation
CR3205 Logging function, CPU buffer overflow
CR3206 Logging function, registered device error
CR3207 Logging function, write error
CR3208 Logging function, MMC data overflow
CR3209 Logging function, MMC insufficient free space
CR3210 Logging function, logging execution in progress
:
CR3215
CR3300 Alarm relay Alarm 0
: :
CR3415 Alarm 31
CR3500 R Turn ON if one of alarm relays CR3300 to CR3415 is ON.
ON: Leave history.
CR3501 Leave history when alarm relay state changes to OFF from ON. OFF: Do not leave history.

:
CR3513
CR3514 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
CR3515 R HKEY instruction, end of scan
CR3600 R HKEY instruction information storage area
:
CR3615
APPENDICES
CR3708 Operation panel KV-D30, green backlight (lights when ON)
CR3709 Operation panel KV-D30, red backlight (lights when ON)
ON: Japanese
CR3710 Operation panel KV-D30, system message display OFF: English
ON: Sound.
CR3711 Operation panel KV-D30, sound buzzer OFF: Turn off.
ON: Positive display
CR3712 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting OFF: Negative display
ON: Enabled
CR3713 Operation panel KV-D30, enable alarm interrupt OFF: Disabled
CR3714 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching

(Switch to page of CM0401 value is forcibly turned OFF by up edge.)
ON: Disabled
CR3715 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching by "▲" "▼" keys disabled OFF: Enabled

:
CR3915
A-7
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 336 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Control memory CM
With control memory (CM0000 to CM3999), you can set various special CPU Unit functions.
Control memory reserved for the system cannot be used.
Attribute
Blank: R/W
page 0
CM0009
page 19
CM0199
APPENDICES

CM0204 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
page 0
A-8
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 337 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
Operation panel KV-D30
page 19
CM0400 Operation panel KV-D30, move enable/disable setting
CM0401 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching setting
CM0402 Operation panel KV-D30, current display page
:
CM0409
CM0410 Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
:
CM0415
:
CM0699
CM0700 R Read from calendar (year)
CM0701 R Read from calendar (month)
CM0702 R Read from calendar (day)
CM0703 R Read from calendar (hour)
APPENDICES
CM0704 R Read from calendar (minute)
CM0705 R Read from calendar (second)
CM0706 R Read from calendar (day of week)
:
CM0719
CM0720 R Scan time measurement value (Average value of each tens scans is entered to this memory.) (in
0.1 ms units)
CM0721 Fixed scan time operation setting value (in 1 ms units)
CM0722 R Scan time (in 1 ms units) when the setting value is exceeded during fixed scan time operation is
entered to this memory.
:
CM0999
CM1000 Number of received text data
CM1001 R Received text data 1
: :
CM1099 Received text data 99
A-9
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 338 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1100 Number of sent text data
CM1101 R Received sent data 1
: :
CM1199 Received sent data 99
:
CM1399
CM1400 Cam switch function, set leading output relay No.
CM1401 Cam switch function, comparator value in multi-stage compare mode
CM1402 Cam switch function, number of pulses in cycle of device input to CTH0
CM1403 Cam switch function, absolute type input address
CM1404 R Cam switch function, current angle
CM1405 R Cam switch function, error No.
:
CM1409
CM1410 Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output relay ON/OFF
CM1411
CM1412 Cam switch function, : angle setting value for turning output +1 relay ON/OFF
: :
CM1471 angle setting value for turning output +30 relay ON/OFF
CM1472 Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output +31 relay ON/OFF
CM1473
:
CM1479
CM1480 R Frequency counter function, frequency measurement results (Hz/rpm)
CM1481 R
CM1482 Frequency counter function, measurement cycle (ms)
CM1483 Frequency counter function, average number of measurements
APPENDICES

:
CM1489
CM1490 Specified frequency pulse output function, set frequency (Hz)
CM1491
:
CM1499
:
CM1531
:
CM1563
A-10
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 339 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
:
CM1569
:
CM1577
:
CM1599
CM1601
CM1603
CM1605
CM1607
CM1609
CM1611 R
CM1613 R
CM1615 R
CM1617 R
APPENDICES
CM1619
CM1620 Input time constant setting ( "Input Time Constant Selection Function" page 11-4)
:
CM1699
CM1701
CM1703
CM1705
CM1707
CM1709
CM1711
A-11
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 340 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM1713
CM1715
:
CM1719
CM1720 Access window, user message 1
CM1721 Access window, user message 2 (max. 32 characters)
:
CM1737
CM1738 Access window, operation disabled setting
:
CM1999
CM2000 X-axis, I/O setting
CM2001 X-axis, sensor enable
CM2003
CM2005
CM2006 X-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2007 X-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2008 X-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2009
CM2010 X-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2011 X-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2012 X-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2013
APPENDICES
CM2014 X-axis, change current value setting value

CM2015
CM2016 X-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2017
CM2019 X-axis, M code
CM2020 R X-axis, output pulse current value
CM2021 R
CM2022 R X-axis, output frequency current value
CM2023 R
CM2024 X-axis, error code
CM2025 X-axis, operation point No.
:
CM2029
A-12
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 341 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM2030 Y-axis, I/O setting
CM2031 Y-axis, sensor enable
CM2033
CM2035
CM2036 Y-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2037 Y-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2038 Y-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2039
CM2040 Y-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2041 Y-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2042 Y-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2043
CM2044 Y-axis, change current value setting value
CM2045
CM2046 Y-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2047
CM2049 Y-axis, M code
CM2050 R Y-axis, output pulse current value
CM2051 R
CM2052 R Y-axis, output frequency current value
CM2053 R
CM2054 Y-axis, error code
CM2055 Y-axis, operation point No.
:
APPENDICES
CM2059
CM2064
Point parameter 0
CM2068
CM2069
CM2070 CPU positioning function Point parameter 1
: :
CM2369 Point parameter 30
A-13
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 342 2012/03/15 17:25:36

1 Device No. Lists
Attribute
Blank: R/W
CM2374
Point parameter 31
CM2378
CM2379
:
CM2599
CM2601
: :
CM2661 device type 30
CM2663
CM2664 Logging function, trigger selection details 0
: :
CM2670 trigger selection details 6
CM2671 Logging function, number of registered devices
CM2672 Logging function, Memory Card storage capacity
:
CM3999
APPENDICES
A-14
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 343 2012/03/15 17:25:36

2 Error Message Lists

The following describes error messages and remedies to take when an error message is displayed.
PLC Body Errors

These errors are displays when an error occurs on the KV-700 CPU Unit body.
No. Messages Cause Remedy

10 CALL Nest Sub-routine exceeds the nesting This error occurs during ladder execu-
level of 4. tion. Review the ladder paying attention
11 FOR Nest FOR to NEXT instructions exceed to how sub-routines are used and how
the nesting level of 8. the INT instruction is used.
12 INT Nest Five or more interrupts occurred This error occurs during ladder execu-
simultaneously. tion. Review the ladder paying attention
to how the INT instruction is used.
13 MPS Nest MPS to MPP instructions exceed This error occurs during ladder execu-
the nesting level of 8. tion. Review the ladder paying attention
to how sub-routines are used and how
the INT instruction is used.
14 BREAK The number of BREAK instructions This error occurs during conversion.
between FOR and NEXT exceeds Limit the number of BREAK instructions
eight. between FOR and NEXT to within
(In a nested structure, the number eight.
of nested instructions exceeds
eight.)
15 Convert System error occurred. Clear the error, and turn the unit ON
16 Opecode again.
17 Operand If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
18 Operand Range
19 Object Size The ladder object size has ex- Ether add on expanded memory, or
ceeded the maximum size. reduce the size of the ladder program.
APPENDICES
20 Code Size The ladder code size has exceeded
the maximum size.
30 Cycletime Over Scan time is 300 ms or faster. Review the program.
Make sure that there are not too many
repeated FOR to NEXT instructions.
Make sure that the interrupt program is
not being executed at a fast rate.
40 No Ladder The program is not registered. Register the ladder program before
operating the main unit.
50 Unit Kobetu Expansion and Special Unit settings Use the Ladder Support software or
Chksum are corrupted. Memory Card to register unit setup
51 Unit Conf Info Unit setup information is not set. information.
A-15
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 344 2012/03/15 17:25:37


52 No Unit Connection Expansion or Special Units are not Turn the KV OFF, then connect the
connected even though they are set Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit
as connected in the unit setup Editor.
information.
53 S-Unit BSI Timeout A probable cause is that noise has Remove any sources of noise.
caused bus communications to If this error occurs frequently, contact
stop. your agent.
54 Unit Number The actual number of connected Turn the KV OFF, then connect the
units differs from the number of Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit
Expansion and Special Units set in Editor.
Unit Editor.
55 Unit Type The type of actual units differs from
the number of Expansion and
Special Units set in Unit Editor.
56 Extend Bus Com A probable cause is that noise has Remove any sources of noise.
Error caused bus communications to If this error occurs frequently, contact
stop. your agent.
57 No End Unit The End Unit is not connected. Turn the KV OFF, and connect the End
Unit.
80 FROM Broken Flash ROM error Contact your agent.
81 SRAM Broken Hardware malfunction
82 Extend Memory Expanded memory was removed or Execute an all clear, and transfer the
Change inserted. ladder program again.
83 Low Battery The backup battery voltage has Replace the backup battery.
dropped.
84 SRAM Backup The content (DM, CM, DR, RLY, Replace the backup battery, and
TM, C current values) of RAM is execute an all clear. This erases the
corrupted as the voltage of the ladder program, so transfer the ladder
backup battery has dropped. program again.
85 RTC Low Voltage A probable cause is that the clock Replace the backup battery, check the
value is corrupted as the voltage of clock value, and set the clock again as
the backup battery has dropped. required.
86 NMI Only System error occurred. Clear the error, and turn the unit ON
APPENDICES
again.
If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
87 Memory Card Error A probable cause is that the Write protect (memory switch)
Memory Card is damaged, data is ↓
incorrect, or magnetism or noise
Remove the memory switch.
has caused the Memory Card to
stop functioning. File content is in error.
↓
Store programs and data files matched
to the environment.
* Only device values and alarm values can be cleared by executing SRAM clear. In this case, the ladder
program is not cleared from memory.
A-16
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 345 2012/03/15 17:25:37


120 Watch Dog Timer System error occurred. Clear the error, and turn the unit ON
121 Stack Overflow again.
122 System If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
123 Device Range
124 Resource
125 Error Buffer Over- More than 16 system internal errors
flow have occurred.
126 Error Buffer Invalid System error occurred.
127 Code Size Automatic load failed. Write protect (memory switch)
A probable cause is that noise has ↓
caused the unit to stop operating. Remove the memory switch.
File content is in error.
↓
Store programs and data files matched
to the environment.
255 No Error Message System error occurred. Clear the error, and turn the unit ON
again.
If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
APPENDICES
A-17
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 346 2012/03/15 17:25:37

3 ASCII Code Table
3 ASCII Code Table

This section describes the content of the ASCII code table.
Upper 4 bits
N D SP
U
L
L
E 0 P p
S D
O
H
C
1 1 A Q a q
S D
T
X
C
2 2 B R b r
E D
T
X
C
3 3 C S c s
E D
O
T
C
4 4 D T d t
E N
NQ A
K 5 E U e u
Lower 4 bits
A S
CK Y
N 6 F V f v
B E
E
L
T
B 7 G W g w
BS C
A
N 8 H X h x
HT E 9 I Y i y
M
L F SU J Z j z
B
VT E
S
C K k
FF → L l
CR ← M m
SO ↑ N n
S I ↓ O o
APPENDICES
A-18
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 347 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
4 Index [C]
Cam Switch Function ............................................ 8-2
This index of terms used in this manual is
Cam switch function device specifications ....... 8-2
arranged in alphabetical order.
Cam switch operation chart ............................. 8-3
Cam Switch Mode (absolute encoder) .................. 8-4
[A] Devices used in the cam switch mode (absolute) .
About comparator ................................................ 9-13 ......................................................................... 8-4
About direct input/output ....................................... 5-2 How to specify items in the cam switch function8-5
About protection of contacts................................ 1-40 Cam Switch Mode (incremental encoder) ............. 8-6
About Relay Nos. .................................................. 4-6 Devices used in the cam switch mode (incremen-
About Scan Time................................................... 4-3 tal) .................................................................... 8-6
About input response delay ............................. 4-3 How to specify items in the cam switch function8-6
Scan time ......................................................... 4-3 Cam Switches ............................................. 2-28, 8-1
About the Alarm Monitor Function....................... 2-30 Cautions When Connecting Units ....................... 1-36
About the exclusive pressure-contact tool .......... 1-42 Clearing Alarm Relay Records ............................ 2-36
About the User Message Display ........................ 2-44 Clearing SRAM ................................................... 2-40
User message 1 ............................................. 2-44 Clock Function .................................................. 11-22
User message 2 ............................................. 2-44 How to read clock data ................................ 11-22
About zero return ................................................ 9-15 How to write clock data (time setting) .......... 11-22
Absolute management current position (PLS) .... 9-20 Commands/Responses List ................................ 10-5
AC Power Unit (KV-U7) ....................................... 1-14 comment display ................................................. 2-14
External dimensions ....................................... 1-16 Connecter for extended memory ........................... 1-6
Names and Functions of Parts ....................... 1-14 Connecting to terminal block units ...................... 1-41
Power Unit Wiring Method ............................. 1-17 Connecting Units ................................................. 1-36
Specifications ................................................. 1-16 connector ............................................................ 1-42
Acceleration/deceleration time .................... 9-7, 9-17 Connector for Extended Memory ........................ 1-11
ACCESS WINDOW ............................................... 2-1 Contrast............................................................... 2-37
Menu Tree ........................................................ 2-4 Control Memories for Positioning Control ........... 9-20
APPENDICES
Modes .............................................................. 2-3 Control Memory ................................................... 4-17
Names and Functions of Access Window Parts2-5 Control memory ............................................ 1-5, A-8
Outline .............................................................. 2-2 Control Relay Lists .............................................. 4-11
Access Window Setup ........................................ 2-37 Control Relays ..................................................... 4-10
Setup Functions Available in Access Window Explanations .................................................. 4-10
Setup .............................................................. 2-37 Control relays ....................................................... A-3
Alarm Monitor ...................................................... 2-30 Control Relays for Positioning Control ................ 9-19
real time display ............................................. 2-32 Counters ................................................................ 1-5
record display ................................................. 2-32 CPU Monitor........................................................ 2-25
Alarm record clear inhibit .................................... 2-46 CPU Unit (KV-700) ................................................ 1-6
All Clear ............................................................... 2-42 CPU Unit Wiring ............................................. 1-12
All clear, SRAM clear inhibit ................................ 2-46 External dimension diagrams (CPU) .............. 1-10
ASCII Code Table ................................... 10-56, A-18 External dimension diagrams (Start Unit, End Unit)
Assembling and Wiring Connectors .................... 1-41 ....................................................................... 1-10
Assembling the Unit ............................................ 1-37 Input specifications .......................................... 1-8
AW settings, changes to setting inhibit ............... 2-46 Internal Circuit Diagrams ............................... 1-12
Names and Functions of Parts ......................... 1-6
[B] Output specifications ........................................ 1-9
Current value (CTH) .............................................. 6-6
Backup battery ...................................................... 1-6
Current value change setting .............................. 9-18
A-19
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 348 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
[D] Distance between surrounding areas .................. 1-35

Daily Care ........................................................... 1-46 DM Transfer ........................................................ 3-16
Data Memory ....................................................... 4-24 About DM Data Format .................................. 3-16
Data memory ......................................................... 1-5
Device Configuration ............................................. 4-6 [E]
Device Lists ......................................................... 9-22 Error code ........................................................... 9-20
Control relays ................................................. 9-25 Error Message Lists ........................................... A-15
Errors/warnings .............................................. 9-26 PLC Body Errors ........................................... A-15
Point parameters ............................................ 9-25 Error/clear error ................................................... 9-19
System parameters and statuses .................. 9-22 Example of Direct Clock Pulse Output (output examp
Device Mode ......................................................... 2-8 of ON/OF ratio 1:1) ............................................ 11-12
Changing device values (T, C, CTH/CTC, TRM) .. To output a clock pulse of cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from
....................................................................... 2-17 output 00500 ................................................ 11-12
Changing device values (when device values are To output a pulse of cycle 500 µs (2 kHz) and
numerical values) ........................................... 2-16 pulse width 200 µs from output 00501 ......... 11-18
Changing device values (when device values are Examples of Alarm Monitor Display .................... 2-31
ON/OFF display) ............................................ 2-15 Executing Instructions ........................................... 9-4
Changing the device No. to monitor ............... 2-10 Execution of interrupts .......................................... 5-3
Changing the device type to monitor ............. 2-10 Expansion Input Unit (KV-B16XA/C32XA/C64XA) .....
Changing the monitor value display format .... 2-11 ............................................................................ 1-18
Device name/comment display ...................... 2-13 derating .......................................................... 1-19
Devices That Can Be Displayed and Whose External dimensions ....................................... 1-20
Settings Can be Changed ................................ 2-8 Internal Circuit Diagrams ............................... 1-21
Example of monitor screen for each device ..... 2-9 Names and Functions of Parts ....................... 1-18
Method of Operation in Device Mode .............. 2-9 Specifications ................................................. 1-19
Moving to the Device mode ............................. 2-9 Wiring ............................................................. 1-21
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys . Expansion Output Unit (KV-B16RA/B16TA/C32TA/
......................................................................... 2-8 C64TA) ................................................................ 1-24
T, C, CTH/CTC, TRM monitor display examples derating .......................................................... 1-25
APPENDICES
....................................................................... 2-18 External dimensions ....................................... 1-26

Device mode, device writing inhibit ..................... 2-46 Internal Circuit Diagrams ............................... 1-27
Device No. Lists ................................................... A-2 Names and Functions of Parts ....................... 1-24
KV-700 Devices .............................................. A-3 Specifications ................................................. 1-25
Relay, Timer, Counter and Memory Nos. by Model Wiring ............................................................. 1-27
........................................................................ A-2
Explanation of Commands and Responses ........ 10-7
Digital Trimmer Mode .......................................... 2-19
Extended Ladder ................................................. 4-25
Changing Digital Trimmers ............................ 2-19
Advantages of the Extended Ladder Language ....
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys ....................................................................... 4-26
....................................................................... 2-19
Features of the Extended Ladder Language . 4-25
Direct Input/Output ................................................ 5-6
Extension Unit ..................................................... 1-31
Direct Input ....................................................... 5-6
About connection ........................................... 1-32
Direct Output .................................................... 5-6
External dimensions ....................................... 1-33
display format ...................................................... 2-11
Names and Functions of Parts ....................... 1-31
Display Language ............................................... 2-38
Specifications ................................................. 1-32
Displaying and Setting the Date/Time ................. 2-21
Extension Unit, setting change inhibit ................. 2-46
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys .
....................................................................... 2-21
[F]
Setting the Date/Time .................................... 2-21
Time adjustment ............................................ 2-23 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function .................. 11-2
Displaying the Alarm Relay Record .................... 2-35 Fixed Scan Time Operation ........................... 11-2
How to set fixed scan time operation ............. 11-2
A-20
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 349 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
Format of Commands and Responses ............... 10-4 Input Refresh Inhibit Function ........................ 11-3
free space ........................................................... 3-14 Output Inhibit Function ................................... 11-3
Frequency Counter ..................................... 2-27, 7-1 I/O setting details ................................................ 9-23
Frequency Counter Functions ............................... 7-2 Input capture ......................................................... 5-4
Data update cycle ............................................ 7-2 Input Relays .......................................................... 4-7
Flow of processing ........................................... 7-3 Input relays............................................................ 1-5
Function selection ............................................... 9-14 Input Time Constant Selection Function ............. 11-4
About the Input Time Constant ...................... 11-4
[G] How to change the input time constant of the
KV-700 CPU Unit ........................................... 11-4
Grounding precautions ........................................ 1-40
Inspection ............................................................ 1-46
Installation Environment ...................................... 1-34
[H]
Internal auxiliary relay hold function ...................... 4-9
HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS ................................... 6-1
Internal Auxiliary Relays........................................ 4-9
High-speed Counters .................................... 1-5, 6-2
Internal auxiliary relays ......................................... 1-5
Automatic reset by a count up ....................... 6-12
Interrupt Priority ..................................................... 5-4
Comparator Match Output ............................. 6-14
Interrupt Processing .............................................. 5-2
Configuration of high-speed counters, high-speed
Interrupt Program .................................................. 5-5
couter comparators .......................................... 6-2
INTERRUPTS ....................................................... 5-1
Count input types ............................................. 6-5
Current value (CTH) ......................................... 6-6
Direct clock pulse input .................................. 6-10
[J]
Extended Functions ....................................... 6-16 Jog operation X-axis ........................................... 9-30
External input setting ....................................... 6-8 Jog operation Y-axis ........................................... 9-30
High-speed Counter Specifications .................. 6-5 JOGX instruction ................................................. 9-30
Internal clock input setting ............................. 6-10 JOGY instruction ................................................. 9-30
Preset Function .............................................. 6-13
Reading/changing current values, rewriting setting [K]
values ............................................................... 6-6 Key Lock ............................................................. 2-48
APPENDICES
Reset by execution condition OFF ................. 6-11 How to Set Key Lock ...................................... 2-48
Reset by external input .................................. 6-12 KV-10/16/24/40 Compatibility.............................. 9-42
Reset by RES instruction ............................... 6-11 KV-700 .................................................................. 1-6
Reset Method ................................................. 6-11 KV-700 Series Specifications ................................ 1-4
Ring Counter Function ................................... 6-15 General specifications ...................................... 1-4
Setting Count Input .......................................... 6-8 Performance specifications .............................. 1-5
Setting value (CTC) ......................................... 6-6 KV-B16RA/B16TA/C32TA/C64TA ...................... 1-24
Home sensor ....................................................... 9-10 KV-B16XA/C32XA/C64XA .................................. 1-18
How to calculate the pulse cycle and comparator KV-EB1S/KV-EB1R ............................................. 1-31
setting value ........................................................ 11-9
KV-U7 .................................................................. 1-14
ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse (when one comparator is
KV-U7 connector ................................................... 1-6
used) .............................................................. 11-9
Pulse cycle ..................................................... 11-9
[L]
Pulse of variable pulse width ......................... 11-9
Setting range of CTC by internal clock .......... 11-9 Latch Function (Power Interruption Hold) ........... 11-5
How to Monitor Alarms ........................................ 2-33 Limit switch CCW ................................................ 9-11
How to Register Alarms ...................................... 2-30 Limit switch CW ................................................... 9-11
List of Devices ....................................................... 4-6
[I] Logging Function ................................................. 3-17
About Logging ................................................ 3-17
I/O Inhibit Function .............................................. 11-3
How to Register Logging Devices .................. 3-17
A-21
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 350 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
[M] Operation by control relay for high-speed counter

(CTH0) ......................................................... 11-10
Maintenance ........................................................ 1-46
Operation by control relay for high-speed counter
Max. number of connected units ......................... 1-36
(CTH1) ......................................................... 11-11
Max. number of I/O ............................................... 1-5
Operation current speed ..................................... 9-20
MEMORY CARD ................................................... 3-1
Operation during broken line detection ................. 1-5
About files stored on Memory Cards from KV
Operation mode .................................................... 9-5
BUILDER ......................................................... 3-5
Operation point parameter No. ............................ 9-20
About Memory Card Operation ...................... 2-24
Operation Timing Charts ..................................... 9-21
Checking the time stamp ....................... 3-7, 3-11
ORGX instruction ................................................ 9-32
Data management on Memory Cards .............. 3-4
ORGY instruction ................................................ 9-32
Deleting files .................................................. 3-12
Other Positioning Devices ................................... 9-19
desktop PC, etc. ............................................... 3-4
Control Memories for Positioning Control ...... 9-20
File List ........................................................... 3-12
Control Relays for Positioning Control ........... 9-19
File list ............................................................ 3-10
Device Lists .................................................... 9-22
Files that are saved by operation in the access
window ............................................................. 3-9 I/O setting details ........................................... 9-23
Free space ..................................................... 3-13 Operation Timing Charts ................................ 9-21
free space ...................................................... 3-14 Sensor enable details .................................... 9-24
How to save and read program data ................ 3-3 Outline of Positioning/Speed Control .................... 9-2
laptop PC, etc. ................................................. 3-3 Main functions .................................................. 9-3
Loading data (can be executed only in the pro- Parameter setup .............................................. 9-2
gram mode) ...................................................... 3-5 Point parameters .............................................. 9-3
Memory Card errors ....................................... 3-14 System parameters .......................................... 9-3
Memory Card Functions ................................... 3-2 Trapezoidal control .......................................... 9-2
Names and Functions of Setting Operation Keys Output mode selection ........................................ 9-12
......................................................................... 3-5 Output operation time ............................................ 4-8
Operation Method ............................................ 3-5 Output Relays ....................................................... 4-8
Saving data to Memory Card ........................... 3-8 Output relays ......................................................... 1-5
To Use the Memory Card ................................. 3-3
APPENDICES
Usable Memory Cards ..................................... 3-2 [P]

Memory Card Operations .................................... 2-24
Password Setting Function ............................... 11-23
Memory Card, file load/save/delete inhibit .......... 2-46
PLSX instruction .................................................. 9-28
MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL) . 9-1
PLSY instruction .................................................. 9-28
Mounting on the DIN Rail .................................... 1-38
Point parameter
Mounting orientation............................................ 1-35
Acceleration/deceleration time ......................... 9-7
Mounting Position ................................................ 1-35
No. ................................................................... 9-5
Multi-level Comparator Mode ................................ 8-8
Operation mode ............................................... 9-5
Devices used by the multi-level comparator .... 8-8
Run speed ........................................................ 9-7
How to specify items in the cam switch function8-8
Specified number of stop sensor pulses .......... 9-8
Startup speed ................................................... 9-7
[N] Target value/travel amount .............................. 9-6
No. ......................................................................... 9-5 Use of stop sensor ........................................... 9-8
Number of instructions .......................................... 1-5 Point parameters ................................................... 9-3
Number of mounted I/O units ................................ 1-5 Positioning Control Exceeding 32 Points ............ 9-43
Positioning Control Reference Examples ............ 9-36
[O] Positioning Control Reference Examples ...... 9-36
Operation by control relay ................................. 11-10 Speed Control Reference Examples .............. 9-38
Positioning Instructions ....................................... 9-27
Positioning Monitor .............................................. 2-25
A-22
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 351 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
Positioning pulse output ........................................ 1-5 How to Connect to the KV-700 ...................... 10-2
Power Unit Wiring Method .................................. 1-17 Send Break signal .......................................... 10-3
Internal Circuit Diagrams ............................... 1-17 Set value ............................................................. 9-14
Precautions during wiring (OP-22185, OP-23139, Setting Inhibited Operation .................................. 2-46
OP-42224) ........................................................... 1-41 Modes in Which Operation Can be Inhibited . 2-46
Precautions When Wiring to Each Unit ............... 1-39 Setting Pulse Output by High-speed Counter Com-
Precautions when wiring to I/O devices .............. 1-39 parator ................................................................. 11-8
Precautions When Writing the Ladder Program in the ON/OFF ratio 1:1 pulse .................................. 11-8
the RUN Mode ................................................. 11-24 Pulse of variable pulse width ......................... 11-8
Preset Function ................................................... 6-13 Setting the polarity of externally input interrupt ..... 5-3
Program Example Continuous Operation Reference Setting Up Parameters .......................................... 9-4
Example .............................................................. 9-40
Setting value (CTC)............................................... 6-6
Program size ......................................................... 1-5
Specified Frequency Pulse Output ........................ 7-5
PROGRAMMING .................................................. 4-1
Comparator Match Output ............................... 7-5
Before You Start Programming ........................ 4-2
Setting method ................................................. 7-5
Flow of Operation from Installation to Actual
Specified number of stop sensor pulses ............... 9-8
Operation ......................................................... 4-2
Specified point No. .............................................. 9-20
Pulse output in progress/emergency stop ........... 9-19
Start of driver operation ....................................... 9-19
Start speed .......................................................... 9-17
[R]
Startup speed ........................................................ 9-7
Reading/changing current values, rewriting setting
Stop sensor ......................................................... 9-10
values .................................................................... 6-6
System Configuration ............................................ 1-2
Receiving Text Data .......................................... 10-52
System Parameters [Comparator Setup] ............ 9-13
Receive data format and internal data memories .
..................................................................... 10-52 Axis ................................................................ 9-13
Relay, Timer, Counter and Memory Nos. by Model ... Function selection .......................................... 9-14
............................................................................. A-2 Set value ........................................................ 9-14
Relays ................................................................... 4-6 System Parameters [I/O Setup] ............................ 9-9
Removing the Terminal Block ............................. 1-45 Axis .................................................................. 9-9
APPENDICES
Replacing the Battery .......................................... 1-46 Home sensor .................................................. 9-10
Responses during an Error ............................... 10-51 Limit switch CCW ........................................... 9-11
Ring Counter Function ........................................ 6-15 Limit switch CW ............................................. 9-11
Run speed ................................................... 9-7, 9-17 Stop sensor .................................................... 9-10
Run speed change request ................................. 9-20 Zero return direction ....................................... 9-12
Run speed change setting value ......................... 9-18 System Parameters [Zero Return/Jog] ................ 9-15
RUN-PROG Selector Switch ............................... 1-11 Acceleration/deceleration time ....................... 9-17
Rung Comment Store Function ......................... 11-23 CM defaults for changing setting values ........ 9-15
Current value change setting ......................... 9-18
[S] Jog ................................................................. 9-15
Sample Interrupt Programs ................................... 5-7 Run speed ...................................................... 9-17
Example of Application of an Interrupt Using a Run speed change setting value .................... 9-18
High-speed Counter ......................................... 5-8 Start speed ..................................................... 9-17
Example of Interrupt Application ...................... 5-7 Zero return ..................................................... 9-15
Sending commands and receiving responses .... 10-4
Sending Text Data ............................................ 10-54 [T]
Send data format and internal data memory 10-54 Target value/travel amount ................................... 9-6
Sensor enable details.......................................... 9-24 TCHX instruction ................................................. 9-34
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ............................. 10-1 TCHY instruction ................................................. 9-34
Command Send Procedure ........................... 10-3 Teaching X-axis .................................................. 9-34
Communications Specifications ..................... 10-2 Teaching Y-axis .................................................. 9-34
A-23
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 352 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 Index
Temporary Data Memory .................................... 4-24

Timers ................................................................... 1-5
Timers/Counters .................................................. 4-16
Explanations .................................................. 4-16
Transferring Programs ........................................ 3-15
Transferring Programs from the Access Window
....................................................................... 3-15
Trapezoidal control ................................................ 9-2
Trapezoidal control X-axis ................................... 9-28
Trapezoidal control Y-axis ................................... 9-28
Trimmer, device writing inhibit ............................. 2-46
Types of Interrupts ................................................ 5-3
Input capture .................................................... 5-4
Setting the polarity of externally input interrupts
......................................................................... 5-3
[U]
Unit Monitor ........................................................... 2-6
Method of Operation (example: on I/O unit) ..... 2-6
Names and Functions of Setting/Operation Keys .
......................................................................... 2-6
Use of stop sensor ................................................ 9-8
User Memory ......................................................... 4-4
Calculating the number of bytes used .............. 4-4
Program Size ................................................... 4-4
User Messages ................................................... 2-44
[W]
APPENDICES
Warning/clear warning ........................................ 9-19

Wiring to the connector ....................................... 1-43
Wiring Units ......................................................... 1-39
[Z]
Zero return completed ......................................... 9-19
Zero return direction ............................................ 9-12
Zero return in progress ........................................ 9-19
Zero return locus ................................................. 9-16
Zero return X-axis ............................................... 9-32
Zero return Y-axis ............................................... 9-32
A-24
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 353 2012/03/15 17:25:37

4 INDEX
APPENDICES
A-25
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 354 2012/03/15 17:25:37

Revision History
Printing Date Version Revision Details
July 2003 Official release
April 2012 17th edition
KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 355 2012/03/15 17:25:37

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from
the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to
illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily
conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all
shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is
Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for
human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR
ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES
OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or
damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such
third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided
to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2003 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 084053E 1042-17 183GB Printed in Japan

KV-700 Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KV-700 Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KV-700 Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

183GB

■ KV-700 Series Related Manuals

Type of Manual Description of Manual

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 1 2012/03/15 17:25:24

WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury.

Failure to follow these instructions may lead to physical dam-

Important: Provides additional information on precautions and restrictions that must

Note: Provides additional information on proper operation.

Indicates a reference item or page to be referred to in this manual and a separate

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 2 2012/03/15 17:25:24

● EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 3 2012/03/15 17:25:24

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 4 2012/03/15 17:25:24

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 5 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 3 MEMORY CARD 4

Chapter 8 CAM SWITCHES

Chapter 9 MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL)

Chapter 10 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Chapter 11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 6 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 1 CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES &

1-1 Basic System Configuration.................................................... 1-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 7 2012/03/15 17:25:24

2-1 Outline ....................................................................................... 2-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 8 2012/03/15 17:25:24

3-1 About the Memory Card ........................................................... 3-2

4-1 Before You Start Programming ............................................... 4-2

5-1 Interrupt Processing ................................................................ 5-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 9 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 6 HIGH-SPEED COUNTERS

6-1 High-speed Counters ............................................................... 6-2

Chapter 7 FREQUENCY COUNTERS

7-1 Frequency Counters................................................................. 7-2

Chapter 8 CAM SWITCHES

8-1 Cam Switch Function ............................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9 MOTOR CONTROL (POSITIONING CONTROL)

9-1 About Positioning/Speed Control ........................................... 9-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 10 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Chapter 10 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

10-1 Serial Communications Specifications ................................ 10-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 11 2012/03/15 17:25:24

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 12 2012/03/15 17:25:24

11-1 Fixed Scan Time Operation Function ................................... 11-2

1 Device No. Lists ........................................................................ A-2

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 13 2012/03/15 17:25:24

Page Configuration and Symbols

3-1 About the Memory Card

Headline 3-1 About the Memory Card

Card when the power is turned ON if the

project name is set to "AUTOLOAD."

Indicates the page or manual

"Access window menu tree" page 2-4

Figure illustrating operation

to refer to. The page or

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 14 2012/03/15 17:25:24

KV-700 UM_E-size.pdf 15 2012/03/15 17:25:24

CONFIGURATION OF THE KV-700 SERIES & SPECIFICATIONS

1-1 Basic System Configuration ..............................................1-2

1-2 CPU Unit ..............................................................................1-6